CAREL pRack pR300T CO2 compressor rack User manual
The pRack pR300T is an integrated CAREL solution for control and management of CO2 compressor racks. The pRack pR300T is available in 4 sizes: Small, Medium, Medium + Driver and Large. Each size has different electrical characteristics and installation requirements, which can be found in Chapter 2 of the manual. You can manage the medium and low temperature lines, as well as the high pressure stage with the pRack pR300T. The pRack pR300T also offers management of the high pressure valve (HPV) and receiver pressure regulating valve (RPRV), as well as valve management via external or built-in (PRK30TD*) driver through fieldbus communication port or via external driver in position mode in 0…10V.
Advertisement
Advertisement
pRack pR300T pRack pR300T user manual for the management of CO2 systems in transcritical conditions NO POWER & SIGNAL CABLES TOGETHER READ CAREFULLY IN THE TEXT! H i g h E f f i c i e n c y S o l u t i o n s ENG DISPOSAL IMPORTANT CAREL bases the development of its products on decades of experience in HVAC, on the continuous investments in technological innovations to products, procedures and strict quality processes with in-circuit and functional testing on 100% of its products, and on the most innovative production technology available on the market. CAREL and its subsidiaries nonetheless cannot guarantee that all the aspects of the product and the software included with the product respond to the requirements of the final application, despite the product being developed according to start-of-the-art techniques. The customer (manufacturer, developer or installer of the final equipment) accepts all liability and risk relating to the configuration of the product in order to reach the expected results in relation to the specific final installation and/or equipment. CAREL may, based on specific agreements, act as a consultant for the positive commissioning of the final unit/application, however in no case does it accept liability for the correct operation of the final equipment/system. INFORMATION FOR USERS ON THE CORRECT HANDLING OF WASTE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT (WEEE) In reference to European Union directive 2002/96/EC issued on 27 January 2003 and the related national legislation, please note that: • WEEE cannot be disposed of as municipal waste and such waste must be collected and disposed of separately; • the public or private waste collection systems defined by local legislation must be used. In addition, the equipment can be returned to the distributor at the end of its working life when buying new equipment; • the equipment may contain hazardous substances: the improper use or incorrect disposal of such may have negative effects on human health and on the environment; • the symbol (crossed-out wheeled bin) shown on the product or on the packaging and on the instruction sheet indicates that the equipment has been introduced onto the market after 13 August 2005 and that it must be disposed of separately; • in the event of illegal disposal of electrical and electronic waste, the penalties are specified by local waste disposal legislation. The CAREL product is a state-of-the-art product, whose operation is specified in the technical documentation supplied with the product or can be downloaded, even prior to purchase, from the website www.CAREL.com. Each CAREL product, in relation to its advanced level of technology, requires setup / configuration / programming / commissioning to be able to operate in the best possible way for the specific application. The failure to complete such operations, which are required/indicated in the user manual, may cause the final product to malfunction; CAREL accepts no liability in such cases. Only qualified personnel may install or carry out technical service on the product. The customer must only use the product in the manner described in the documentation relating to the product. Warranty on the materials: 2 years (from the date of production, excluding consumables). In addition to observing any further warnings described in this manual, the following warnings must be heeded for all CAREL products: • Prevent the electronic circuits from getting wet. Rain, humidity and all types of liquids or condensate contain corrosive minerals that may damage the electronic circuits. In any case, the product should be used or stored in environments that comply with the temperature and humidity limits specified in the manual. • Do not install the device in particularly hot environments. Too high temperatures may reduce the life of electronic devices, damage them and deform or melt the plastic parts. In any case, the product should be used or stored in environments that comply with the temperature and humidity limits specified in the manual. • Do not attempt to open the device in any way other than described in the manual. • Do not drop, hit or shake the device, as the internal circuits and mechanisms may be irreparably damaged. • Do not use corrosive chemicals, solvents or aggressive detergents to clean the device. • Do not use the product for applications other than those specified in the technical manual. Approval: the quality and safety of CAREL INDUSTRIES Hqs products are guaranteed by the ISO 9001 certified design and production system. WARNING: separate as much as possible the probe and digital input signal cables from the cables carrying inductive loads and power cables to avoid possible electromagnetic disturbance. Never run power cables (including the electrical panel wiring) and signal cables in the same conduits. NO POWER & SIGNAL CABLES TOGETHER READ CAREFULLY IN THE TEXT! All of the above suggestions likewise apply to the controllers, serial boards, programming keys or any other accessory in the CAREL product portfolio. CAREL adopts a policy of continual development. Consequently, CAREL reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any product described in this document without prior warning. The technical specifications shown in the manual may be changed without prior warning. The liability of CAREL in relation to its products is specified in the CAREL general contract conditions, available on the website www.CAREL.com and/or by specific agreements with customers; specifically, to the extent where allowed by applicable legislation, in no case will CAREL, its employees or subsidiaries be liable for any lost earnings or sales, losses of data and information, costs of replacement goods or services, damage to things or people, downtime or any direct, indirect, incidental, actual, punitive, exemplary, special or consequential damage of any kind whatsoever, whether contractual, extra-contractual or due to negligence, or any other liabilities deriving from the installation, use or impossibility to use the product, even if CAREL or its subsidiaries are warned of the possibility of such damage. Key icone NOTE: IMPORTANT: TUTORIAL: to bring attention to a very important subject; in particular, regarding the practical use of the various functions of the product. to bring critical issues regarding the use of the pRack PR300 to the attention of the user. some simple examples to accompany the user in configuring the most common settings. CAREL reserves the right to modify the features of its products without prior notice. 3 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Content 1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 1.2 1.3 Main features ............................................................................................................................7 Components and accessories ........................................................................................7 Config. of the system and configuration of the inputs and outputs ....8 2. HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS AND INSTALLATION 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 22 General installation instructions ................................................................................ 22 Power supply ......................................................................................................................... 22 Connecting the analogue inputs .............................................................................. 22 Connecting the digital inputs ..................................................................................... 24 Connecting the analogue outputs .......................................................................... 25 Connecting the digital outputs.................................................................................. 25 pLAN electrical connections ........................................................................................ 26 4. START UP 4.1 27 4.2 4.3 4.4 27 Starting the first time .............................................................................................................. Wizard ......................................................................................................................................... 27 Example of system configuration using the Wizard ...................................... 27 Advanced configuration ................................................................................................. 29 5. USER INTERFACE 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 30 Graphic terminal .................................................................................................................. 30 Description of the display .............................................................................................. 30 Password ................................................................................................................................... 30 Menu description ................................................................................................................ 31 FUNCTIONS 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.13 6.14 6.15 6.16 6.17 32 Schematic diagram and system configurations used .................................. 32 Unit On-Off.............................................................................................................................. 33 Control ....................................................................................................................................... 33 Compressors........................................................................................................................... 35 Gas cooler ................................................................................................................................ 39 HPV valve management ................................................................................................. 40 RPRV valve management ............................................................................................... 42 Energy saving ........................................................................................................................ 43 Accessory functions........................................................................................................... 43 Oil management.................................................................................................................. 44 Subcooling .............................................................................................................................. 45 Heat recovery......................................................................................................................... 46 Generic functions ................................................................................................................ 47 Double line synchronization (DSS)........................................................................... 48 EEVS: Electronic Expansion Valve Synchronization ........................................ 48 Settings...................................................................................................................................... 50 Managing the default values ....................................................................................... 50 7. TABLE MASKS 7.1 7.2 7.3 9 pRack 300 S, M, D, L board description ............................................................................9 Technical specifications ................................................................................................ 11 pRack pR300T S, M, D, L board dimensions ....................................................... 16 pRack pR300T general connection diagram...................................................... 17 3. INSTALLATION 6. 7 51 Parameter table .................................................................................................................... 51 Alarm table .............................................................................................................................. 70 I/O Table .................................................................................................................................... 73 5 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG 8. ALARMS 8.1 8.2 8.3 Alarm management .......................................................................................................... 79 Compressor alarms ............................................................................................................ 79 Pressure and prevent alarms ........................................................................................ 80 9. SUPERVISORY AND COMMISSIONING SYSTEMS 9.1 9.2 82 PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO supervisory systems ....................... 82 Commissioning software ............................................................................................... 82 10. SOFTWARE UPDATE AND CONFIGURATION 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 79 83 Smart Key: operating instructions ............................................................................ 83 pRack Manager: operating instructions ................................................................ 84 Pendrive: operating instructions ............................................................................... 85 Configuring pCOWeb/pCOnet from a system screen ................................ 89 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 6 ENG 1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 Main features 1.2 Components and accessories pRack pR300T is the integrated CAREL solution for control and management of CO2 compressor racks. The pRack pR300T is available in 4 hardware sizes listed in the table (for the detailed description of each size, electrical characteristics and installation, refer to Chapter 2): The main features and compressor management characteristics of pRack pR300T are listed below. Hardware sizes: Size Available analog inputs Small Medium Medium + Driver Large 5 (*) 8 (*) 8 + 4 (*) 10 (*) 1.1.1 pR300T functionality list Possibility of management integrated in a single control for the medium temperature and low temperature line and the high pressure stage. Management of the high pressure valve (HPV) Management of the receiver pressure regulating valve (RPRV) Valves management via external or built-in (PRK30TD*) driver through fieldbus communication port or via external driver in position mode in 0…10V Integration between HPV and receiver pressure Accessory functions (pre-positioning, minimum and Main features maximum values differentiated by machine ON and OFF, maximum distance from the setpoint, ...) Oil cooler Oil receiver and oil injection Heat Reclaim Integration between heat reclaim and HPV and RPRV valve management Double suction line and one high pressure stage Up to 16 fans for condensing line Inverter regulation on the first compressor and on the first fan Generic functions easily configurable (ON/OFF, modulations, alarms, scheduler) S, M, D, L version (based on pCO5+ hardware) Hardware External display (pGDE) or built-in display Scroll, reciprocating, digital scroll compressors management Up to 12 piston compressors per line, a maximum of 4 different sizes Up to 4 alarms per compressor Compressors Inverter management, even with modulation inside the dead zone Pump down Control of overheating in suction Italian, English, German, French, Spanish, Russian, Lingue Portoguese, Swedish Temperature: °C, °F Pressure: barg, psig (all pressure values are also converted Unit of measure to temperature) Date format settable between: dd/mm/yy, mm/dd/yy, yy.mm.dd Proportional band (P, PI) available for compressors and fans Control Neutral zone available for compressors and fans FIFO Compressor LIFO rotation Timed Fixed (the ON/OFF order can be set as required) Scheduling available: heating/cooling, 4 daily time bands, 5 special periods (e.g.: closing period), 10 special days (e.g.: Scheduling by holidays) calendar Schedulable functions: set point compensation for compressors and fans, split condenser (heating/cooling only), anti noise, heat recovery, generic functions Compensation from digital input, from scheduling, floating Setpoint based on supervisor parameter (compressors) or outside temperature (fans) High pressure, including activation of heat recovery or Prevent ChillBooster Automatic and manual management Configurable compressor alarms Alarms Double Signal on digital outputs for high or low priority alarms Log from application Supervisor Carel Modbus protocol Tab. 1.a Available digital inputs 8 14 14+2 18 Available analog outputs 4 4 4 6 Available digital outputs 8 13 13 18 Tab. 1.b (*) can also be used as digital inputs For each size the following versions are available: • with built-in terminal, without terminal All pRack pR300T models are equipped with: • integrated RS485 serial interface • anthracite gray plastic cover • connector kit • USB. pRack pR300T models Size Code PRK30TS0E0 PRK30TS3E0 small PRK30TS0F0 PRK30TS3F0 PRK30TS3FK PRK30TM0E0 PRK30TM3E0 medium PRK30TM0F0 PRK30TM3F0 PRK30TM3FK PRK30TD0E0 PRK30TD3E0 driver PRK30TD0F0 PRK30TD3F0 PRK30TD3FK PRK30TL0E0 PRK30TL3E0 large PRK30TL0F0 PRK30TL3F0 PRK30TL3FK 7 Description pRack PR300T small, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS OPTO, 2 SSR, connector kit pRack PR300T small, USB, display built-in, BMS/ FBUS OPTO, 2 SSR, connector kit pRack PR300T small, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS opto, connector kit pRack PR300T small, USB, display built-in, BMS/ FBUS opto, connector kit pRack PR300T small, USB, external display, BMS/ FBUS opto, connector kit pRack PR300T medium, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS OPTO, 2 SSR, connector kit pRack PR300T medium, USB, display built-in, BMS/ FBUS opto, 2 SSR, connector kit pRack PR300T medium, USB, no display, BMS/ FBUS opto, connector kit pRack pR300T medium, USB, display built-in, BMS/ FBUS opto, kit connettori pRack pR300T medium, USB, external display, BMS/FBUS opto, kit connettori pRack PR300T medium, EVD EVO embedded for 2 UNIV. EXV, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS opto, 2 SSR, connector kit pRack PR300T medium, EVD EVO Eembedded for 2 UNIV. EXV, USB, display built-in, BMS/FBUS opto, 2 SSR, connector kit pRack PR300T medium, evd evo embedded for 2 univ. EXV, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS opto, connector kit pRack PR300T medium, evd evo embedded for 2 univ. EXV, USB, display built-in, BMS/FBUS opto, connector kit pRack PR300T medium, evd evo embedded for 2 univ. EXV, USB, external display, BMS/FBUS opto, connector kit pRack PR300T large, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS OPTO, 6 SSR, connector kit pRack PR300T large, USB, display built-in, BMS/ FBUS opto, 6 SSR, connector kit pRack PR300T large, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS opto, connector kit pRack pR300T large, USB, display built-in, BMS/ FBUS opto, connector kit pRack pR300T large, USB, external display, BMS/ FBUS opto, connector kit Tab. 1.c pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Accessories: Example 2: 2 suction lines on the same board with scroll or piston compressors, 1 high pressure line: Code PGDERK1FX0 Description pGD evolution user terminal for pRack pR300T Module to convert a 0...10V analog output to an SPDT CONVONOFF0 digital output CVSTDUTLF0 USB/RS485 serial convertor with telephone connector CVSTDUMOR0 USB/RS485 serial converter with 3-way terminal PCOSO0AKY0 Smart Key programming key S90CONN002 Connection cable for terminal 1=0.8m S90CONN000 Connection cable for terminal 1=1.5m S90CONN001 Connection cable for terminal 1=3 m SPKT*R* and Ratiometric pressure probes 0…5 Vdc SPKC00* SPK*C*, SPK1*, Active pressure probes 4…20 mA SPK2*, SPK3* NTC* Pressure probe NTC -50T90°C NTC*HT* Pressure probe NTC -0T150°C EVD0000E50 EVD EVO universal driver for Carel valves, RS485/ModbusTM EVDIS00D*0 Display for EVD EVO E2VCABS*00 EVD-valve connection cable Tab. 1.d I/O pR300T pR300 I/O I/O Fig. 1.b Example 3: 2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston compressors), 1 high pressure line (on the first suction line board): 1.3 Configuration of the system and configuration of the inputs and outputs I/O 3 2 C8 C7 C7 2 NC8 NO8 NO7 C4 C1 NO6 NO5 NO4 C1 C4 3 J15 1 J26 FBus2 B M S card IDC1 ID8 ID7 ID6 ID5 ID4 Y4 Y3 ID3 ID2 ID1 Y2 VG0 VG GND U5 GND U4 +VDC J5 Y1 J4 J3 GND U3 U2 J2 U1 G0 G J24 GND +Vterm IDC1 ID8 ID7 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 Y4 ID2 ID1 Y3 Y2 J1 +5 VREF FieldBus card J5 Y1 VG0 VG GND U5 GND U4 +VDC J14 4 B M S card J4 J3 GND U3 U2 U1 G0 G +5 VREF +Vterm GND J2 J13 J25 BMS2 pR300T pR300 FieldBus card J24 NO3 J12 J11 pLAN J10 1 J26 FBus2 pR300T pR300 J1 NO2 J15 NO1 C8 C7 C7 J14 4 NC8 C4 J13 J10 J25 BMS2 NO8 C4 NO7 NO6 NO5 C1 J12 J11 pLAN NO4 NO3 C1 Note: each input/output is completely configurable with the only requirements being those set by the system configuration. For example, the suction pressure probe on line 1 can be arbitrarily configured to any one of the analog inputs in the pLAN control board with address 1 compatible with the type of probe. NO2 pLAN NO1 pRack pR300T has the same system configuration management and input and output configuration management as the standard pRack. I/O I/O 1.3.1 System configurations available pRack pR300T can manage system configurations with up to 2 suction lines (maximum 12 scroll or piston compressors for lines 1 and 2) and up to 1 high pressure line (maximum 16 fans per line). When there are two suction lines, the lines can be managed by the same pRack board or by separate boards. The condenser line can be managed by the board that manages the suction line, or by a separate board, in accordance with the number of inputs/outputs available. Fig. 1.c Example 4: 2 suction lines on separate boards with scroll or piston compressors, 1 high pressure line on separate board: For each line, both suction and condensing, pRack pR300T can manage a modulating device (inverter, Digital Scroll® compressor or compressor with continuous control). 4 J25 BMS2 3 2 NC8 C8 C7 NO8 C7 J14 J13 J10 J15 1 J26 FBus2 pR300T pR300 B M S card IDC1 ID8 ID7 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 Y4 ID2 ID1 J5 Y3 VG0 VG GND U5 GND U4 +VDC Y1 J4 J3 GND U2 J2 U1 G0 G +Vterm GND J24 +5 VREF FieldBus card J1 Y2 pLAN U3 Example 1: 1 suction line with scroll or piston compressors, 1 high pressure line: NO7 C4 NO6 NO5 C4 J12 J11 pLAN NO4 C1 NO3 NO2 C1 NO1 I/O 3 2 C8 C7 C7 4 3 2 J12 J11 pLAN 4 3 2 NC8 C8 C7 C7 J14 J13 J10 J25 BMS2 NO8 NO7 C4 NO6 NO5 NO4 C4 C1 NO3 NO2 NO1 C1 NC8 C7 C8 J15 1 J26 FBus2 J15 1 J26 FBus2 NC8 C4 J14 J13 J25 BMS2 NO8 NO7 J15 pR300 pR300T pR300 pR300T 1 J26 FBus2 B M S card IDC1 ID8 ID7 ID6 ID5 ID4 Y4 Y3 ID3 ID2 ID1 J5 Y2 VG0 VG GND U5 GND U4 +VDC Y1 J4 J3 GND U3 U2 J2 U1 G0 G +5 VREF J24 GND +Vterm IDC1 ID8 ID7 J1 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 Y4 ID2 ID1 J5 Y3 Y1 VG0 VG GND U5 GND U4 +VDC FieldBus card B M S card J4 J3 GND U3 U2 J2 U1 G0 G +5 VREF J24 GND +Vterm FieldBus card J1 Y2 C4 C1 NO6 NO5 NO4 C1 NO3 NO2 NO1 J12 NO8 J14 4 J25 BMS2 J11 pLAN C7 J13 J10 J10 NO7 C4 NO6 NO5 C4 J12 J11 pLAN NO4 C1 NO3 NO2 C1 NO1 pLAN I/O pR300T B M S card IDC1 ID8 ID7 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 Y4 Y3 ID1 J5 Y2 VG0 VG GND U5 GND U4 +VDC Y1 J4 J3 GND U3 U2 J2 U1 G0 +5 VREF G J24 GND +Vterm FieldBus card J1 I/O I/O I/O Fig. 1.d Fig. 1.a Note: if connecting more than one pRack pR300 board in a pLAN, mixed networks cannot be created combining Compact boards and S, M, L boards, while mixed networks are possible using combinations of the latter models only. Important: all the boards connected to the pLAN must have the same software revision. pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 8 ENG 2. HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS AND INSTALLATION 2.1 pRack 300 S, M, D, L board description pRack pR300T S 14 J10 4 3 2 C8 C7 NC8 J15 J14 J13 J25 BMS2 NO8 C7 NO7 C4 NO6 C4 J12 J11 pLAN NO5 NO4 C1 NO3 C1 15 NO2 13 12 11 NO1 10 1 J26 FBus2 16 17 18 pR300T IDC1 ID8 ID6 ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1 Y4 Y2 Y3 8 7 6 NO11 5 Y1 VG0 VG GND U5 GND U4 3 4 ID7 3 +VDC GND U3 U2 U1 2 J5 J4 J3 NO10 1 J2 +5 VREF J24 GND G G0 +Vterm J1 B M S c ard ID5 FieldBus c ard Fig. 2.a pRack pR300T M J10 4 J25 BMS2 J26 FBus2 16 17 3 2 C13 NC13 NO13 C12 NC12 NO12 C9 C8 C9 J17 J16 J15 J14 J13 NC8 NO8 C7 C7 NO7 C4 NO6 NO5 NO4 C4 C1 NO3 J12 J11 pLAN NO9 15 14 C1 13 NO2 12 11 NO1 10 J18 1 18 pR300T 1 2 3 B M S card 3 5 6 7 3 8 ID14H ID14 IDC13 ID13 ID13H IDC9 J8 ID12 ID10 GND ID9 U8 U7 U6 IDC1 ID8 ID7 8 ID11 J7 J6 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 Y4 ID1 Y3 Y2 Y1 VG0 VG GND U5 GND U4 +VDC 4 J5 J4 J3 GND U3 U2 J2 U1 +5 VREF J24 GND G0 G J1 +Vterm FieldBus card 9 Fig. 2.b Key: Ref. Description 1 Power supply connector [G(+), G0(-)] +Vterm: power supply for additional terminal+5 VREF power supply 2 for ratiometric probes 3 Universal inputs/outputs 4 +VDC: power supply for active probes 5 Button for setting pLAN address, second display, LED VG: power supply at voltage A(*) for opto-isolated analogue output 6 VG0: power to opto-isolated analogue output, 0 Vac/Vdc 7 Analogue outputs 8 ID: digital inputs for voltage A (*) ID..: digital inputs for voltage A (*) 9 IDH..: digital inputs for voltage B (**) 10 pLAN telephone connector for terminal/downloading application (*) Voltage A: 24 Vac or 28 to 36 Vdc; (**) Voltage B: 230 Vac - 50/60 Hz. Ref. Description 11 pLAN plug-in connector 12 Reserved 13 14 15 Reserved Reserved Relay digital outputs 16 BMS2 connector 17 18 FieldBus2 connector Jumpers for selecting FieldBus/ BMS Tab. 2.a 9 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG pRack pR300T D 14 J25 BMS2 J26FBus2 16 17 2 1 4 24 NC13 23 3 DI2 DI1 ID14H ID14 IDC13 S2 S3 ID13 ID13H IDC9 S1 VREF ID11 ID9 GND J7 ID12 G G0 8 U8 U7 J6 U6 IDC1 ID8 ID7 GND C D A B S4 J29 ID10 VBAT 7 6 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 Y4 ID2 ID1 Y3 Y1 VG0 VG GND 5 3 C13 21 J5 Y2 J4 U5 GND U4 +VDC GND 3 2 20 J30 B M S card J3 U3 U2 +5 VREF J2 U1 GND +Vterm G0 G J24 3 J28 4 1 J27 18 22 J1 NO13 C12 NC12 C9 NO12 NO11 C9 NO9 NO10 C8 1 pR300T FieldBus card J18 J17 4 2 2 3 1 4 NC8 C7 NO8 C7 NO7 C4 NO6 J10 J16 J15 J14 J13 3 J12 J11 pLAN NO5 C4 NO4 C1 C1 15 NO3 13 12 NO2 11 NO1 10 J8 9 8 Fig. 2.c Key: Ref. 1 Description Power supply connector [G(+), G0(-)] +Vterm: power supply for additional terminal 2 +5 VREF power supply for ratiometric probes 3 Universal inputs/outputs 4 +VDC: power supply for active probes 5 Button for setting pLAN address, second display, LED VG: power supply at voltage A(*) for opto-isolated analogue output 6 VG0: power to opto-isolated analogue output, 0 Vac/Vdc 7 Analogue outputs 8 ID: digital inputs for voltage A (*) 9 ID..: digital inputs for voltage A (*); IDH..: digital inputs for voltage B (**) 10 pLAN telephone connector for terminal/downloading application 11 pLAN plug-in connector 12 Reserved (*) Voltage A: 24 Vac or 28 to 36 Vdc; (**) Voltage B: 230 Vac - 50/60 Hz. Ref. 13 Description Reserved 14 Reserved 15 16 17 Relay digital outputs BMS2 connector FieldBus2 connector 18 Jumpers for selecting FieldBus/ BMS 20 21 22 23 24 Electronic valve A connector Electronic valve B connector Connector for external Ultracap module (accessory) Valve driver analogue and digital inputs Valve status signal LED Tab. 2.b N.C. Model J18 C16 NO17 NO18 NO16 C16 C13 NO13 C12 NC12 NO12 C9 NO11 NO10 NO9 C9 C8 NC8 NC15 1 C15 2 C14 3 NC14 4 J17 J16 NO15 C7 NO8 NO7 C7 C4 NO6 J10 J25 BMS2 J15 J14 J13 NO14 J12 J11 pLAN NO5 NO4 C4 C1 NO3 NO2 C1 NO1 J22 J21 J22 J23 FBus2 15 15 19 J26 FBus2 NC13 15 C16 14 NC17 13 12 NC18 11 C16 10 NC16 pRack pR300T L 16 17 18 9 3 7 8 pR300T 1 2 3 3 6 U10 GND ID17 IDC13 ID14 ID14H IDC17 GND ID13 ID18 U9 ID13H Y6 Y5 ID16H ID16 IDC15 ID15H ID15 8 3 IDC9 ID12 ID11 ID10 GND ID9 U8 J6 U7 U6 IDC1 ID8 ID7 J7 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 Y4 7 ID2 ID1 Y3 Y2 Y1 VG0 VG GND 5 J20 J5 J4 U5 GND U4 +VDC 4 J19 B M S card J3 GND U3 U2 J2 U1 +5 VREF J24 GND G0 G J1 +Vterm FieldBus card 8 J8 9 Fig. 2.d Key: Ref. Description 1 Power supply connector [G(+), G0(-)] +Vterm: power supply for additional terminal 2 +5 VREF power supply for ratiometric probes 5 Button for setting pLAN address, second display, LED VG: power supply at voltage A(*) for opto-isolated analogue output 6 VG0: power to opto-isolated analogue output, 0 Vac/Vdc 7 Analogue outputs 8 ID: digital inputs for voltage A (*) 9 ID..: digital inputs for voltage A (*); IDH..: digital inputs for voltage B (**) 10 pLAN telephone connector for terminal/downloading application (*) Voltage A: 24 Vac or 28 to 36 Vdc; (**) Voltage B: 230 Vac - 50/60 Hz. pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 Ref. 11 Description pLAN plug-in connector 12, 13, 14 Reserved 15 Relay digital outputs 16 BMS2 connector 17 18 19 FieldBus2 connector Jumpers for selecting FieldBus/ BMS FieldBus2 connector Tab. 2.c 10 ENG 2.2 Technical specifications 2.2.1 Physical specifications Dimensions Plastic case Built-in terminal SMALL MEDIUM, LARGE BUILT-IN DRIVER Assembly Material Flammability Ball pressure test Resistance to creeping current Colour PGDE (132x64 pixel) with backlit keypad Operating conditions Storage conditions Ingress protection Other features Environmental pollution Class according to protection against electric shock PTI of the insulating materials Period of stress across the insulating parts Type of action Type of disconnection or microswitching Heat and fire resistance category Ageing characteristics (operating hours) Number of automatic operating cycles Overvoltage category 13 DIN modules 110 X 227,5 X 60 mm 18 DIN modules 110 X 315 X 60 mm 18 DIN modules 110 X 315 X 75 mm fitted on DIN rail in accordance with DIN 43880 CEI EN 50022 technopolymer V2 (UL94) and 850 °C (in accordance with IEC 60695) 125 °C ≥ 250 V Antrancite PRK300T*3**, PRK300T*0**(w/o built-in terminal): -40T70 °C, 90% RH noncondensing(*) PRK300T*3*0 (with built-in terminal): -20T60 °C, 90% RH non-condensing (*) with Ultracap module fitted: -40T60°C PRK300TD*** (w/o built-in terminal): -40T70 °C, 90% RH non-condensing PRK300TD*** (with built-in terminal): -30T70 °C, 90% RH non-condensing Models with USB port and/or with Ultracap module: IP20 on the front panel only Models without USB port and without Ultracap module: IP40 on the front panel only 2 to be integrated into Class I and/or II appliances in the versions without valve driver, class I in the versions with valve driver PCB: PTI 250 V; insulating material: PTI 175 long 1C; 1Y for SSR versions microswitching Category D (UL94-V2) 80,000 100,000 (EN 60730-1); 30,000 (UL 873) category II Tab. 2.d 2.2.2 Electrical specifications Power supply SMALL, MEDIUM, LARGE: use a dedicated 50 class II safety transformer VA. BUILT IN DRIVER: use a dedicated 100 VA class II safety transformer. Vac P (Vac) Vdc SMALL 24 Vac (+10/45 VA 28 to 36 Vdc MEDIUM 15%), 50/60 Hz (-20/+10%) LARGE protected by an protected by an external 2.5 A external 2.5 A type type T fuse T fuse BUILT-IN DRIVER 90 VA P (Vdc) 30 W Not allowed Important: only power “PRK300TD***” with alternating current. The power transformer secondary must be earthed. Terminal block with male/female plug-in connectors Cable cross-section min 0.5 mm2 - max 2.5 mm2 CPU 32 bit, 100 MHz Non-volatile memory (FLASH) 2 M byte Bios + 11 Mbyte application program Data memory (RAM) 3.2 Mbyte (1.76 Mbyte Bios + 1.44 Mbyte application program) T buffer memory (EEPROM) 13 kbyte P parameter 32 kbyte (not available to the pLAN) memory(EEPROM) Clock with battery standard, precision 100 ppm Battery CR2430 3 Vdc lithium button battery (size 24x3 mm) Software class and structure Class A Category of immunity to Category III voltage surges (EN 61000-4-5) Device not designed to be hand-held when powered Tab. 2.e 11 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG 2.2.3 Universal inputs/outputs U... - 0 to 5 V signals from ratiometric probes powered by controller Input precision: ± 0.3 % f.s. Time constant for each input: 0.5 s Classification of measuring circuits (CEI EN 61010-1): category I Digital inputs w/o optical isolation, Lmax = 30 m (maximum number) • • • - voltage-free contacts - fast digital inputs type: voltage-free contact max current: 10 mA max frequency 2kHz and resolution ±1 Hz max tot 4 - 0 to 20 mA /4 to 20 mA inputs powered externally 4 5 4 8 6 (max 4 on U1...U5, 3 on U6...U8) 7 (max 4 on U1...U5, 3 on U6...U8) 6 SMALL MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN DRIVER 5 8 max 2 4 (max 2 on U1...U5, max 2 on U6...U8) 10 4 (2 on U1...U5, 1 on U6...U8, 1 on U9...U10) 6 max tot 10 - 0 to 20 mA /4 to 20 mA inputs from probes powered by the controller 5 LARGE 10 max tot 9 - 0 to 1 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc signals powered externally 5 3 (2 on U1...U5, 1 on U6...U8) 6 max tot 8 - 0 to 1 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc signals from probes powered by controller 2 max tot 7 - CAREL NTC probes (-50T90°C; R/T 10 kΩ±1% at 25°C); - HT NTC (0T150°C); - PTC (600Ω to 2200Ω) - PT500 (-100T400°C) - PT1000 (-100T400°C) - PT100 probes (-100T200°C) SMALL MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN DRIVER 5 8 max tot 5 Analogue inputs, Lmax = 30 m (maximum number) 6 (max 4 on U1...U5, 3 on U6...U8, 2 on U9...U10) 9 (max 4 on U1...U5, 3 on U6...U8, 2 on U9...U10) 6 LARGE 10 6 (max 2 on U1...U5, max 2 on U6...U8, 2 on U9...U10) Important: for active probes powered externally (0 to 1 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA ), to avoid irreparably damaging the controller, implement adequate current protection measures that must ensure < 100 mA; the ratiometric probes can only be powered by the controller; on power-up, the universal inputs/outputs remain shorted to GND for around 500 ms until the end of the configuration procedure. Analogue outputs w/o optical isolation (maximum number), Lmax = 30 m 0 to 10 Vdc (maximum current 2 mA) PWM (output 0/3.3 Vdc, maximum current 2 mA, frequency: 2kHz asynchronous) SMALL MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN DRIVER 5 8 5 8 LARGE 10 10 Tab. 2.f 2.2.4 Power supply to probes and terminals can be used to power any active probes using the 24/21 Vdc ± 10% (P+5*/P+3*) available at terminal +VDC (J2). The maximum current available is 150 mA, protected against short-circuits. +5Vref to power the 0 to 5V ratiometric probes, use the 5 Vdc (± 5%) available at terminal +5VREF(J24). The maximum current available is 60 mA. P+3**********: 21 Vdc ± 10%; P+5**********: 24 Vdc ± 10% Vterm Used to power an external terminal as an alternative to the one connected to J10, Pmax = 1.5 W Important: if the length exceeds 10 m, use shielded cable with the shield connected to earth. In any case, the max length allowed is 30 m. Tab. 2.g +Vdc 2.2.5 Digital inputs ID... IDH... Type Lmax Optically-isolated 30 m SMALL MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN DRIVER LARGE Minimum digital input pulse Normally open (open-closed-open) Normally closed (closed-open-closed) detection time Maximum number Power supply to the inputs External Classification of measuring Category I: 24 Vac/Vdc (J5, J7, J20) circuits (CEI EN 61010-1) Category III: 230 Vac (J8, J19) Digital input current draw at 24 Vac/Vdc Digital input current draw at 230 Vac no. of optically-isolated no. of optically-isolated inputs, 24 Vac/Vdc or 230 Vac inputs, 24 Vac or 24 Vdc 50/60 Hz 8 None 12 2 14 4 200 ms 400 ms IDH...: 230 Vac (+10/-15%) 50/60 Hz 5 mA 5 mA Tab. 2.h Note: • separate as much as possible the probe and digital input cables from cables to inductive loads and power cables, so as to avoid possible electromagnetic disturbance. Never run power cables (including the electrical panel cables) and signal cables in the same conduits; • the two 230 Vac or 24 Vac/Vdc inputs on terminals J8 (ID13, ID14) or J19 (ID15, ID16) have the same common pole and therefore both will operate at 230 Vac or 24 Vac/Vdc. There is basic insulation between the two inputs; there is reinforced insulation between the inputs and the rest of the controller; • ID1...ID8, ID9 to ID12, ID17, ID18 have functional insulation from the rest of the controller; • for DC voltage inputs (24 Vdc) either the + or the - can be connected to common terminal; • the rating of the external contact connected to the digital inputs must be at least 5 mA. pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 12 ENG 2.2.6 Analogue outputs Y... Type Lmax Maximum number Power supply Precision Resolution Settling time Maximum load 0 to 10 V optically-isolated on Y1...Y6 30 m SMALL, MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN DRIVER LARGE external Y1...Y6 8 bit Y1...Y6 1 kΩ (10 mA) 4 Y1...Y4, 0 to 10 V 6 Y1...Y6, 0 to 10 V 24 Vac (+10/-15%) or 28 to 36 Vdc on VG(+), VG0(-) ± 2% full scale from 1 s (slew rate 10 V/s) to 20 s (slew rate 0.5 V/s) selectable via SW Tab. 2.i Warnings: • for lengths > 10 m, only use shielded cable, with the shield connected to earth; • a 0 to 10 Vdc analogue output can be connected in parallel to other outputs of the same type, or alternatively to an external source of voltage. The higher voltage will be considered. Correct operation is not guaranteed if actuators with voltage inputs are connected; • power the VG-VG0 analogue outputs at the same voltage on G-G0: Connect G0 to VG0 and G to VG. This is valid for both alternating and direct current power supplies. 2.2.7 Digital outputs NO..., NC... Type Maximum no Relay. Minimum contact current: 50 mA. 8: SMALL; 13: MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN DRIVER; 18: LARGE; The relay outputs have different features depending on the model of controller. The outputs can be divided into groups. The relays belonging to the same group (individual cell in the table) have basic insulation and therefore must have the same voltage. Between groups (cells in the Insulation distance table) there is double insulation and consequently these may have different voltages. There is also double insulation between each terminal of the digital outputs and the rest of the controller. Relays with the same insulation Makeup of the groups Number of changeover contacts Model 1 SMALL 1-3 Type of relay Type A MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN DRIVER 1-3 Type of relay Type A LARGE NO 1-3 Type of relay Type A LARGE NC 1-3 Type of relay Type A EXTRALARGE 1-3 Type of relay Type A 1: SMALL (relay 8) 3: MEDIUM (relay 8, 12, 13) 5: LARGE NO/NC (relay 8, 12, 13, 14 e 15) 2 4-6 Type A 4-6 Type A 4-6 Type A 4-6 Type A 4-6 Type A 3 7 Type A 7 Type A 7 Type A 7 Type A 7 Type A 4 8 Type A 8 Type A 8 Type A 8 Type A 8 Type A 5 9-11 Type A 9-11 Type A 9-11 Type A 9-11 Type A Group 6 12 Type A 12 Type A 12 Type A 12 Type A 7 13 Type A 13 Type A 13 Type A 13 Type A 8 14-15 Type A 14-15 Type A 14-16 Type B 9 16-18 Type A 16-18 Type C 17-20 Type B 10 21-24 Type B 11 25-29 Type B Note: the output relays have different features, depending on the model of controller. Rated data Relay type A Approval Relay rated data Switchable power Relay type B Approval Relay rated data Relay type C Approval SPDT, 2000 VA, 250 Vac, 8A resistive UL 873 2 A 250 Vac resistive, 2A FLA, 12 LRA, 250 Vac, C300 pilot duty (30,000 cycles) EN 60730-1 2 A resistive, 2A inductive, cosφ=0.6, 2(2)A (100,000 cycles) SPST, 1250 VA, 250 Vac, 5A resistive UL 873 1 A 250 Vac resistive, 1A FLA, 6 LRA, 250 Vac, C300 pilot duty (30,000 cycles) EN 60730-1 1 A resistive, 1A inductive, cosφ=0.6, 1(1)A (100,000 cycles) SPDT, 1250 VA, 250 Vac, 5A resistive UL 873 1 A 250 Vac resistive, 1A FLA, 6 LRA, 250 Vac, C300 pilot duty (30,000 cycles) EN 60730-1 1 A resistive, 1A inductive, cosφ=0.6, 1(1)A (100,000 cycles) Tab. 2.j 2.2.8 SSR outputs (in models where featured) Maximum number Working voltage Load current (MAX) Impulsive load current (MAX) 2: SMALL (outputs 7, 8); 4: MEDIUM (outputs 7, 8, 12, 13); 6: LARGE (outputs 7, 8, 12, 13, 14, 15) 24 Vac/Vdc 1A 1.2 A Tab. 2.k • • • • Warnings: if the load requires higher current, use an external SSR; to power external loads, use the same power supply as the pCO (connected to terminals G/G0); this must always be dedicated and not in common with the power supply to other devices on the electrical panel (such as contactors, coils, etc...); the groups that the digital outputs are divided into have two common pole terminals to simplify wiring; make sure that the current running through the common terminals does not exceed the rated current of an individual terminal, that is, 8 A. 13 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG 2.2.9 Serial port Use AWG 20-22 twisted pair shielded cable for the +/Serial Serial ZERO Serial ONE Serial TWO Serial THREE Serial FOUR Type/connectors pLAN/J10, J11 Features • Integrated on main board • HW driver: asynchronous half duplex RS485 pLAN • Not optically-isolated • Connectors: 6-pin telephone jack + 3-pin plug-in p. 5.08 • Maximum length: 500 m • Max data rate: 115200 bit/s • Maximum number of connectable devices: 3 BMS 1 Serial Card • Not integrated on main board • HW driver: not featured • Can be used with all pCO family optional BMS cards FieldBus 1 Serial Card • Not integrated on main board • HW driver: not present • Can be used with all pCO family optional FieldBus cards BMS 2 / J25 • Integrated on main board • HW driver: asynchronous half duplex RS485 Slave • Optically-isolated • 3-pin plug-in connector p. 5.08 • Maximum length: 1000 m • Max data rate: 384000 bit/s FFieldBus 2 / J26 (and • Integrated on main board J23 on Large and • J23: not optically-isolated Extralarge version) • J26: optically-isolated • 3-pin plug-in connector p. 5.08 • J23 and J26 are independent. Tab. 2.l Note: in industrial/residential environments, for distances > 10 m, shielded cable is required, with the shield connected to earth. In residential environments (EN 55014), irrespective of the cable length, on versions without valve driver, the connection cable between the controller and the terminal and the serial cable must be shielded and connected to earth at both ends. 2.2.10 Model with electronic expansion valve driver Valve compatibility Motor connection Digital input connection CAREL: E*V**** ALCO: EX4; EX5; EX6; EX7; EX8 330 Hz (recommended by CAREL); EX8 500 Hz (from ALCO specifications) SPORLAN: SEI 0.5-11; SER 1.5-20; SEI 30; SEI 50; SEH 100; SEH175 Danfoss: ETS 12.5-25B; ETS 50B; ETS 100B; ETS 250; ETS 400 CCM 40, CCM 10-20-30, CCMT 2-4-8 CAREL: two CAREL EXV as for EVD EVOLUTION TWIN SPORLAN: SER(I) G, J, K Shielded 4-wire cable CAREL P/N E2VCABS*00, or AWG22 shielded 4-wire cable Lmax =10 m, or AWG14 shielded 4-wire cable Lmax 50 m Digital input to be activated with voltage-free contact or transistor to GND. Closing current 5mA; maximum length < 10 m Maximum length 10 m or less than 30 m with shielded cable S1 ratiometric pressure probe (0 to 5 V) electronic pressure sensor (4 to 20 mA) combined ratiometric pressure probe (0 to 5 V) 4 to 20 mA input (max. 24 mA) S2 low temperature NTC Probes Power to active probes (VREF) Emergency power supply resolution 0.1 % fs resolution 0.5 % fs resolution 0.1 % fs resolution 0.5 % fs 10 kΩ at 25 °C, -50T90 °C high temperature NTC 50 kΩ at 25 °C,-40T150 °C combined NTC 10 kΩ at 25 °C,-40T120 °C 0 to 10 V input (max 12 V) S3 ratiometric pressure probe (0 to 5 V): electronic pressure sensor (4 to 20 mA) combined ratiometric pressure probe (0 to 5 V) 4 to 20 mA input (max. 24 mA) S4 low temperature NTC resolution 0.1 % fs resolution 0.1 % fs resolution 0.5 % fs resolution 0.1 % fs resolution 0.5 % fs 10 kΩ at 25 °C,-50T105 °C high temperature NTC 10 kΩ at 25 °C,-40T150 °C combined NTC 10 kΩ at 25 °C, -40T120 °C measurement error: 2% fs massimo; 1% typical measurement error: 8% fs massimo; 7% typical measurement error: 2 % fs massimo; 1 % typical measurement error: 8 % fs massimo; 7 % typical measurement error: 1°C in the range -50T50 °C; 3°C in the range +50T90 °C measurement error: 1.5 °C in the range -20T115°C, 4 °C in range outside of -20T115 °C measurement error: 1°C in the range -40T50 °C; 3°C in the range +50T90 °C measurement error: 9% fs massimo; 8% typical measurement error: 2% fs massimo; 1% typical measurement error: 8% fs massimo; 7% typical measurement error: 2 % fs massimo; 1 % typical measurement error: 8 % fs massimo; 7 % typical measurement error: 1 °C in the range -50T50 °C; 3°C in the range 50T90 °C measurement error: 1.5 °C in the range -20T115 °C; 4 °C in range outside of -20T115 °C measurement error 1 °C in the range -40T50 °C; 3°C in the range +50T90 °C programmable output: +5 Vdc ±2% or 12 Vdc ±10%, Imax = 50 mA optional Ultracapacitor module (PCOS00UC20 or EVD0000UC0). If the controller operates constantly at temperatures near the upper limit of 60°C it’s recommended to use the external module EVD0000UC0, where possible located in the coolest point of the panel. The PCOS00UC20 and EVD0000UC0 modules can be connected at the same time to the same controller, thus doubling the energy available to close the valves. Important: The module only powers the valve driver and not the controller. Tab. 2.m pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 14 ENG 2.2.11 Meaning of the inputs/outputs on the pRack pR300T S, M, L boards Version S, M, L M, L S, M, L M, L L Connector J1-1 J1-2 J2-1 J2-2 J2-3 J2-4 J2-5 J3-1 J3-2 J3-3 J3-4 J4-1 J4-2 J4-3 J4-4 J4-5 J4-6 J5-1 J5-2 J5-3 J5-4 J5-5 J5-6 J5-7 J5-8 J5-9 J6-1 J6-2 J6-3 J6-4 J7-1 J7-2 J7-3 J7-4 J7-5 J8-1 J8-2 J8-3 J8-4 J8-5 J9 J10 J11-1 J11-2 J11-3 J12-1 J12-2 J12-3 J12-4 J12-5 J13-1 J13-2 J13-3 J13-4 J13-5 J14-1 J14-2 J14-3 J15-1 J15-2 J15-3 J16-1 J16-2 J16-3 J16-4 J16-5 J17-1 J17-2 J17-3 J18-1 J18-2 J18-3 J19-1 J19-2 J19-3 J19-4 J19-5 J20-1 J20-2 J20-3 J20-4 J20-5 Signal G G0 B1 B2 B3 GND +VDC B4 BC4 B5 BC5 VG VG0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 ID6 ID7 ID8 IDC1 B6 B7 B8 GND ID9 ID10 ID11 ID12 IDC9 ID13H ID13 IDC13 ID14 ID14H RX-/TXRX+/TX+ GND C1 NO1 NO2 NO3 C1 C4 NO4 NO5 NO6 C4 C7 NO7 C7 NO8 C8 NC8/--C9 NO9 NO10 NO11 C9 NO12 C12 NC12/--NO13 C13 NC13 ID15H ID15 IDC15 ID16 ID16H Y5 Y6 B9 BC9 B10 Description +24 Vdc or 24 Vac power supply power supply reference universal analogue input 1 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA) universal analogue input 2 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA) universal analogue input 3 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA) common for analogue inputs 21 Vdc power supply for active probes (maximum current 200 mA) passive analogue input 4 (NTC, PT1000, ON/OFF) common for analogue input 4 passive analogue input 5 (NTC, PT1000, ON/OFF) common for analogue input 5 power to optically-isolated analogue output, 24 Vac/Vdc power to optically-isolated analogue output, 0 Vac/Vdc analogue output no. 1, 0…10 V analogue output no. 2, 0…10 V analogue output no. 3, 0…10 V analogue output no. 4, 0…10 V digital input no. 1, 24 Vac/Vdc digital input no. 2, 24 Vac/Vdc digital input no. 3, 24 Vac/Vdc digital input no. 4, 24 Vac/Vdc digital input no. 5, 24 Vac/Vdc digital input no. 6, 24 Vac/Vdc digital input no. 7, 24 Vac/Vdc digital input no. 8, 24 Vac/Vdc common for digital inputs from 1 to 8 (negative pole for DC power supply) universal analogue input 6 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA) universal analogue input 7 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA) universal analogue input 8 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA) common for analogue inputs digital input no. 9, 24 Vac/Vdc digital input no. 10, 24 Vac/Vdc digital input no. 11, 24 Vac/Vdc digital input no. 12, 24 Vac/Vdc common for digital inputs from 9 to 12 (negative pole for DC power supply) digital input no. 13, 230 Vac digital input no. 13, 24 Vac/Vdc common for digital inputs 13 and 14 (negative pole for DC power supply) digital input no. 14, 24 Vac/Vdc digital input no. 14, 230 Vac 8-pin telephone connector for connecting a display terminal (not used) 6-pin telephone connector for connecting the standard pGDE user terminal RX-/TX- connector for RS485 connection to the pLAN network RX+/TX+ connector for RS485 connection to the pLAN network GND connector for RS485 connection to the pLAN network common for relays: 1, 2, 3 normally open contact, relay no. 1 normally open contact, relay no. 2 normally open contact, relay no. 3 common for relays: 1, 2, 3 common for relays: 4, 5, 6 normally open contact, relay no. 4 normally open contact, relay no. 5 normally open contact, relay no. 6 common for relays: 4, 5, 6 common for relay no. 7 normally open contact, relay no. 7/ normally open contact, relay no. 7 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc (*) common for relay no. 7 normally open contact, relay no. 8/ only S-board: normally open contact, relay no. 8 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc, S board only (*) common for relay no. 8 normally closed contact relay no. 8/ only S-board: not used, S board only (*) common for relay: 9, 10, 11 normally open contact, relay no. 9 normally open contact, relay no. 10 normally open contact, relay no. 11 common for relay: 9, 10, 11 normally open contact, relay no. 12/ normally open contact, relay no. 12 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc (*) common for relay no. 12 normally closed contact relay no. 12/ not used (*) normally open contact, relay no. 13 common for relay no. 13 normally closed contact relay no. 13 digital input no. 15, 230 Vac digital input no. 15, 24 Vac/Vdc common for digital inputs 15 and 16 (negative pole for DC power supply) digital input no. 16, 24 Vac/Vdc digital input no. 16, 230 Vac digital input no. 5 0…10 V digital input no. 6 0…10 V passive analogue input 9 (NTC, PT1000, ON/OFF) common for analogue input 9 passive analogue input 10 (NTC, PT1000, ON/OFF) 15 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Version Connector J20-6 J20-7 J20-8 J20-9 J21-1 J21-2 J21-3 J21-4 J21-5 L J21-6 J22-1 J22-2 J22-3 J22-4 J22-5 J23-1 J23-2 J23-3 J24-1 J24-2 J24-3 J25-1 S, M, D, L J25-2 J25-3 J26-1 J26-2 J26-3 J27-1 J27-2 J27-3 J27-4 J28-1 J28-2 J28-3 J28-4 J29-1 J29-2 D J29-3 J29-4 J29-5 J29-6 J29-7 J29-8 J30-1 J30-2 J30-3 (*) depending on model Signal BC10 ID17 ID18 IDC17 NO14 C14 NC14/--NO15 C15 NC15/--C16 NO16 NO17 NO18 C16 EE+ GND +V term GND +5 Vref EE+ GND EE+ GND 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 GND VREF S1 S2 S3 S4 DI1 DI2 VBAT G0 G Description common for analogue input 10 digital input no. 17, 24 Vac/Vdc digital input no. 18, 24 Vac/Vdc common for digital inputs 17 and 18 (negative pole for DC power supply) normally open contact, relay no. 14/ normally open contact, relay no. 14 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc (*) common for relay no. 14 normally closed contact relay no. 14/ not used (*) normally open contact, relay no. 15/ normally open contact, relay no. 15 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc (*) common for relay no. 15 normally closed contact relay no. 15/ not used (*) common for relay: no. 16, 17, 18 normally open contact, relay no. 16 normally open contact, relay no. 17 normally open contact, relay no.18 common for relay: no. 16, 17, 18 E- terminal for RS485 connection to the I/O expansion modules (not used) E+ terminal for RS485 connection to the I/O expansion modules (not used) GND terminal for RS485 connection to the I/O expansion modules (not used) additional power supply terminal Aria (not used) power supply common power supply for 0/5 V ratiometric probes E- terminal for RS485 connection, BMS2 E+ terminal for RS485 connection, BMS2 GND terminal for RS485 connection, BMS2 E- terminal for RS485 connection, FIELDBUS 2 E+ terminal for RS485 connection, FIELDBUS 2 GND terminal for RS485 connection, FIELDBUS 2 ExV connection, power stepper-motor ExV connection, power stepper-motor ExV connection, power stepper-motor ExV connection, power stepper-motor ExV connection, power stepper-motor ExV connection, power stepper-motor ExV connection, power stepper-motor ExV connection, power stepper-motor Signals-ground Active probe power supply Probe 1 (pressure) or external-signal 4…20mA Probe 2 (temperature) or external-signal 0…10V Probe 3 (pressure) or external-signal 4…20mA Probe 4 (temperature) Digital input 1 Digital input 2 Emergency power supply Power supply Power supply Tab. 2.n 2.3 pRack pR300T S, M, D, L board dimensions 45 110 44 pR300T pR300 B A Fig. 2.e A B B - with USB port and/or built-in terminal B - with Ultracap module Small 227,5 60 70 Medium 315 60 70 Buit-in driver 315 60 70 Large 315 60 70 - - 75 - Tab. 2.o pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 16 ENG 2.4 pRack pR300T general connection diagram Small 24 Vac/230 Vdc 0 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/230 Vac 0 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/230 Vac 0 Vac/Vdc J10 4 3 2 White C8 IDC1 GND U5 J3 U4 +VDC GND U1 U3 U2 White Green ID GND ID8 4-20 mA Probe: +VDC GND U3 U2 U1 Black - GND + ID7 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 Y4 ID1 Y3 Y1 VG0 VG GND GND U4 +VDC U5 Ratiometric probe: +VDC GND U3 U2 U1 J5 Y2 J4 J2 NC8 C7 1 RS485 BMS connections B M S card J3 GND U3 U1 Ntc/Pt1000 U2 J2 +5 VREF J24 GND G0 G 24 Vac/Vdc 0 Vac/Vdc +Vterm FieldBus card J15 J26 FBus2 pR300 pR300T J1 NO8 C7 J14 J13 J25 BMS2 NO7 C4 NO6 NO5 C4 J12 J11 pLAN NO4 C1 NO3 NO2 C1 NO1 24 Vac/230 Vac 0 Vac/Vdc pGDE pRack Black Green (max 6 active probes) Universal inputs U1-U2-U3-U4-U5 (*) *NOT USED Refer to technical leaflet to different 4 -20 mA sensors model ID 24 Vac/Vdc 0 Vac/Vdc OUT 4 OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 AO/DO 24 Vac/ Vdc 0 Vac/Vdc Fig. 2.f 17 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Medium 24 Vac/230 Vdc 0 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/230 Vac 0 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/230 Vac 0 Vac/Vdc J10 4 3 2 White C13 NC13 NO13 C12 NC12 C9 NO12 NO11 NO10 C9 C8 NO9 White Green GND U5 GND J3 U4 +VDC ID GND U3 U2 4-20 mA Probe: ID14H ID14 IDC13 ID13 ID13H IDC9 J8 ID12 ID11 ID10 GND ID9 U8 U7 U6 IDC1 ID8 J6 U1 GND U3 U2 U1 Black - GND + ID7 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 Y4 ID1 Y3 Y2 Y1 VG0 VG GND U5 GND U4 +VDC J7 Ratiometric Probe: +VDC GND U3 U2 U1 J5 Black Green (*) (max 6 active probes) Universal inputs U1-U2-U3-U4-U5-U6-U7-U8 RS485 BMS connections J4 J2 NC8 C7 1 +VDC Ntc/Pt1000 J18 J26 FBus2 B M S card J3 GND U3 U1 U2 J2 +5 VREF J24 GND G0 G 24 Vac/Vdc Vac ac/V /Vdc dc 0 Vac/Vdc Vac/ Va c/Vd c/ Vdcc Vd +Vterm FieldBus card J17 J16 J15 pR300 pR300T J1 NO8 C7 J14 J13 J25 BMS2 NO7 C4 NO6 NO5 C4 J12 J11 pLAN NO4 C1 NO3 NO2 C1 NO1 pGDE pRack *NOT USED Refer to technical leaflet to different 4 -20 mA sensors model ID 24 Vac/Vdc 0 Vac/Vdc Fig. 2.g pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 18 24 Vac/Vdc 230 Vac 0 Vac/Vdc 19 ID17 GND U10 IDC17 GND U5 GND U4 4-20 mA Probe: ID18 ID17 GND U10 GND ID17 IDC13 ID14 ID14H IDC17 ID18 U9 Y6 Y5 C16 NO18 NO17 NO16 C16 NC15 J17 IDC17 24 Vac/Vdc 230 Vac 0 Vac/Vdc ID13 J7 ID13H IDC9 ID12 J5 ID11 ID10 J19 ID18 +VDC ID9 ID16H J22 GND White GND U3 GND U8 ID16 IDC15 C15 NO15 NC14 C14 NO14 J16 GND U1 U7 - J21 U9 Green J6 U2 Ratiometric Probe: ID15 ID15H RS485 BMS connections U6 J4 IDC1 J26 FBus2 ID8 GND + pR300 pR300T ID7 B M S card 1 ID6 2 ID5 3 ID4 4 ID3 ID2 ID1 Y4 Y3 FieldBus card Y2 J10 C1 NC13 C13 NO13 NC12 C12 NO1 12 C9 NO11 NO1 10 NO9 C9 NC8 C8 NO8 C7 NO7 C7 C4 NO6 NO5 NO4 C4 C1 NO3 NO2 NO1 J15 U10 J2 Y1 VG0 VG J3 +VDC GND J25 BMS2 J14 GND White U3 GND U5 GND U4 +VDC GND U3 J13 Y6 Black U2 Ntc/Pt1000 U2 U1 +5 VREF J2 U1 +VDC GND +Vterm J24 GND U3 U2 U1 24 Vac/Vdc 0 Vac/Vdc G0 G J1 J12 U9 Y5 (max 6 active probes) Universal inputs U1-U2-U3-U4-U5-U6-U7-U8-U9-U10 J11 pLAN Y6 Y5 ID pGDE pRack OUT 5 OUT 6 AO/DO ENG Large 24 Vac/230 Vac 0 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/230 Vac 0 Vac/Vdc J18 J23 FBus2 J20 J8 ID J3 Black Green (*) *NOT USED Refer to technical leaflet to different 4 -20 mA sensors model J20 24 Vac/Vdc 0 Vac/Vdc J20 0 Vac/Vdc Fig. 2.h pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Built-in Driver CAREL ExV valve A pGDE pRack verde/green marrone/brown giallo/yellow bianco/white verde/green marrone/brown giallo/yellow bianco/white CAREL ExV valve B shield 2 C13 NC1 13 NO1 13 C12 NC1 12 NO12 C9 NO11 NO1 10 C9 NO9 C8 NC8 C7 DI2 DI1 GND Black Green (max 6 active probes) (*) *NOT USED Refer to technical leaflet to different 4 -20 mA sensors model Connection with other different valve model 6 1 4 2 4 5 3 4 COMA NOA 1 green 2 brown 3 white 4 red 2 3 3 5 5 5 black 6 blue Fig. 2.i pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 20 ratiometric pressure transducer driver B NTC driver B 1 1 3 ALCO EX5/6 EX7/8 DANFOSS ETS/CCM/CCMT NTC driver A Sporlan SEI / SEH / SER ratiometric pressure transducer driver A G G0 VBAT DI2 DI1 S4 S2 S3 S1 VREF GND J29 Key: U5 U4 GND J3 +VDC GND U3 U2 U1 ID White Green ID14H ID14 IDC13 ID13 IDC9 ID13H J8 ID12 ID11 ID10 ID9 GND U8 U7 U6 IDC1 ID8 ID7 J6 S4 S3 S2 S1 VREF GND G G0 GND + VBAT C D A B 4-20 mA Probe: +VDC GND U3 U2 U1 White J29 J30 J7 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 Y4 ID1 Y3 Y2 VG0 VG GND +VDC GND U3 U2 U1 Black J28 J5 Ratiometric probe: J2 Universal inputs U1-U2-U3-U4-U5-U6-U7-U8 Y1 J4 U5 GND U4 +VDC Ntc/Pt1000 J27 1 RS485 BMS connections B M S card J3 GND U3 U1 U2 J2 +5 VREF J24 GND G0 G 24 Vac/Vdc 0 Vac/Vdc +Vterm FieldBus card J1 18 1 3 2 4 3 J17 J16 J26 FBus2 pR300 pR300T J1 NO8 C7 4 J15 1 3 2 4 J10 J25 BMS2 NO7 C4 NO6 J14 J13 - J12 J11 pLAN NO5 C4 C1 NO3 NO2 C1 NO1 shield ENG External Driver (suitable for S/M/L/D) J10 4 3 2 - GND + IDC1 ID8 ID7 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 Y4 ID1 Y3 Y1 VG0 VG GND J5 Y2 J4 U5 GND U4 +VDC RS485 BMS connections 230 Vac 35 VA TRADRFE240 (dedicated) shield 2 4 198 serial address 3 NOA 1 G G0 VBAT G0 VBAT G 2 AT COMA 24 Vac C8 1 B M S card J3 GND U3 U2 J2 U1 +5 VREF J24 GND +Vterm G0 G J1 J15 J26 FBus2 pR300 pR300T FieldBus card NC8 C7 J14 J13 J25 BMS2 NO8 C7 NO7 C4 NO6 NO5 C4 J12 J11 pLAN NO4 C1 NO3 NO2 C1 NO1 pGDE pRack DI1 DI2 S4 S2 S3 S1 VREF GND Ultracap Technology GND Tx/Rx Connection with other different valve model 1 1 3 2 4 5 3 4 COMA NOA Key: 6 1 4 1 green 2 brown 3 white 4 red ALCO EX5/6 EX7/8 DANFOSS ETS/CCM/CCMT 2 3 3 5 5 NTC driver A ratiometric pressure transducer driver B NTC driver B Sporlan SEI / SEH / SER ratiometric pressure transducer driver A G G0 VBAT 5 black 6 blue Fig. 2.j 21 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG 3. INSTALLATION 3.1 General installation instructions • all the very low voltage connections (analogue and 24 Vac/Vdc digital 3.1.1 Installation procedure • Environmental conditions • Avoid assembling the pRack PR300T and the terminal in environments with the following characteristics: • temperature and humidity that do not conform to the rated operating data of the product; • • strong vibrations or knocks; • exposure to aggressive and polluting atmospheres(e.g.: sulphur and • • • • • • ammonia fumes, saline mist, smoke) so as to avoid corrosion and/or oxidation; strong magnetic and/or radio frequency interference (therefore avoid installing the units near transmitting antennae); exposure of the pRack PR300T to direct sunlight and to the elements in general; large and rapid fluctuations in the room temperature; environments containing explosives or mixes of flammable gases; exposure to dust (formation of corrosive patina with possible oxidation and reduction of insulation). inputs, analogue outputs, serial bus connections, power supplies) must have reinforced or double insulation from the mains network; in residential environments, the connection cable between the pRack PR300T and the terminal must be shielded; there is no limit to the number of cables that can be connected to an individual terminal. The only limitation concerns the maximum current crossing each terminal: this must not exceed 8 A; the maximum cross-section of the cable that connected to a terminal is 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG); the maximum value of the twisting torque to tighten the screw on the terminal (torque tightening) is 0.6 Nm; Important: • Installation must be performed according to the standards and legislation in force in the country where the device is used; • for safety reasons the equipment must be housed inside an electrical panel, so that the only accessible part is the display and the keypad; • in the event of malfunctions, do not attempt to repair the device, but rather contact the CAREL service centre; • the connector kit also contains the stick-on labels. Positioning the instrument inside the panel The position of the instrument in the electrical cabinet must be chosen so as to guarantee correct physical separation of the instrument from the power components (solenoids, contactors, actuators, inverters, …) and the connected cables. Proximity to such devices/cables may create random malfunctions that are not immediately evident. 3.1.3 Anchoring the pRack PR300T The pRack PR300T is installed on a DIN rail. To fasten the unit to the DIN rail, press it lightly against the rail. The rear tabs will click into place, locking the unit to the rail. Removing the unit is just as Simple, using a screwdriver through the release slot to lever and lift the tabs. The tabs are kept in the locked position by springs. The structure of the panel must allow the correct flow of cooling air. 3.1.2 Wiring procedure 3.2 Power supply When laying the wiring, “physically “ separate the power part from the control part. The proximity of these two sets of wires will, in most cases, cause problems of induced disturbance or, over time, malfunctions or damage to the components. The ideal solution is to house these two circuits in two separate cabinets. Sometimes this is not possible, and therefore the power part and the control part must be installed inside the same panel. For the control Signals, it is recommended to use shielded cables with twisted wires. Power supply to 28…36 Vdc +10/-20% or24 Vac +10/-15% 50…60 Hz; the pRack PR300T S, M, D, L (controller Maximum current P= 15 W (power supply Vdc) P=40 VA (Vac) with terminal connected) Tab. 3.a Important: If the control cables have to cross over the power cables, the intersections must be as near as possible to 90 degrees, always avoiding running the control cables parallel to the power cables. • power supplies other than those specified seriously damage the • Use cable ends suitable for the corresponding terminals. Loosen • a Class II safety transformer, must be used in the installation to supply • • • • • • • system; each screw and insert the cable ends, then tighten the screws. When the operation is completed, slightly tug the cables to check they are sufficiently tight; separate as much as possible the sensor Signal, digital input and serial line cables from the cables carrying inductive loads and power cables to avoid possible electromagnetic disturbance. Never insert power cables (including the electrical cables) and probe Signal cables in the same conduits. Do not install the sensor cables in the immediate vicinity of power devices (contactors, circuit breakers or similar); reduce the path of the sensor cables as much as possible, and avoid spiral paths that enclose power devices; avoid touching or nearly touching the electronic components fitted on the boards to avoid electrostatic discharges (extremely damaging) from the operator to the components; if the power transformer secondary is earthed, check that the earth wire corresponds to the wire that runs to the controller and enters terminal G0; this applies to all the devices connected to the pRack PR300T; do not secure the cables to the terminals by pressing the screwdriver with excessive force, to avoid damaging the pRack PR300T; for applications subject to considerable vibrations (1.5 mm pk-pk 10/55 Hz), secure the cables connected to the pRack PR300 around 3 cm from the connectors using clamps; if the product is installed in industrial environments (application of the EN 61000-6-2 standard) the length of the connections must be less than 30 m; pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 just one pRack PR300T controller, rating 30 VA for pRack Compact and 50 VA for pRack S, M, L; • the power supply to the pRack PR300T controller and terminal (or pRack PR300T controllers and terminals) should be separated from the power supply to the other electrical devices (contactors and other electromechanical components) inside the electrical panel; • if the power transformer secondary is earthed, check that the earth wire corresponds to the wire that runs to the controller and enters terminal G0. This applies to all the devices connected to the pRack PR300T; • a yellow LED indicates that power is connected to the pRack PR300T. 3.3 Connecting the analogue inputs The analogue inputs on the pRack PR300T can be configured for the most common sensors on the market: 0 to 1 V, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA. The different types of sensors for each input can be selected by setting a parameter on the user terminal. 22 ENG 3.3.1 Connecting universal NTC temperature sensors 3.3.3 Connecting current pressure probes The analogue inputs are compatible with 2-wire NTC sensors. The inputs must be set for NTC Signals from the user terminal or using the default value installation procedure. The connection diagram is shown below: pRack PR300T can be connected to all CAREL SPK* series active pressure probes or any other pressure sensors available on the market with 0…20 mA or 4…20 mA Signal. The inputs must be set for 0…20 mA or 4…20 mA Signals from the user terminal or using the default value installation procedure. The connection diagram is shown below: pR300T pR300T GND GND U5 U4 GND J3 +VDC GND U3 U2 J2 U1 J24 GND +Vterm G0 G J1 +5VREF U5 U4 GND J3 +VDC GND U3 U2 J2 U1 GND +Vterm J24 +5VREF G0 G J1 Fig. 3.a Hardware Version Terminals GND, U4, U5 S U1, U2, U3, U4, U5 GND, U4, U5 M, D U1, U2, U3, U4, U5, U6, U7, U8, S2, S4 GND, U4, U5, U9, U10 L U1, U2, U3, U4, U5, U6, U7, U8, U9, U10 NTC probe cable 1 2 1 2 1 2 Tab. 3.b Fig. 3.c Hardware Terminals Probe wire colour Description Version +VDC brown power supply S, M, L, D U1, U2, U3, B6, B7, B8, S1, S3 white Signal Tab. 3.d Important: do not connect the green wire. Note: the two wires of the NTC sensors are equivalent, as they have no polarity, therefore it is not necessary to follow any specific order when connecting to the terminal block. 3.3.4 Connecting 0 to 5 V ratiometric pressure probes pRack PR300T can be connected to any other pressure probes available on the market with 0 to 5 V ratiometric sensor. The inputs must be set for 0 to 5 V Signals from the user terminal or using the default value installation procedure. The connection diagram is shown below: 3.3.2 Connecting PT1000 temperature sensors The pRack PR300T can be connected to 2-wire PT1000 sensors for all high temperature applications; the operating range is: -100 to 200 °C. The inputs must be pre-configured for PT1000 Signals from the user terminal or using the default value installation procedure. The connection diagram is shown below: pR300T S, M L GND U5 GND J3 U4 +VDC GND U3 U2 U1 +5VREF GND G0 G Fig. 3.b Terminals U4, U5, GND U4, U5 U4, U5, U9, U10 U4, U5, U9, U10 J2 Fig. 3.d G0 G J1 Hardware Version J24 GND U5 GND J3 U4 +VDC GND U3 U1 U2 J2 +5VREF J24 GND G0 G +Vterm J1 J1 +Vterm pR300T Hardware Terminals Version +5 Vref PT1000 probe cable 1 2 1 2 Tab. 3.c S, M, L, D GND U1, U2, U3, U6, U7, U8, S1, S3 Probe wire Description colour black power supply power supply green reference white Signal Tab. 3.e Important: for correct measurement by the PT1000 sensor, each sensor wire needs to be connected to a dedicated terminal, as shown in Fig. 3.b. Note: the two wires of the PT1000 sensors are equivalent, as they have no polarity, therefore it is not necessary to follow any specific order when connecting to the terminal block. 23 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG 3.3.5 Connecting 0…10 V active probes 3.4 Connecting the digital inputs PRack PR300T can be connected to 0…10 V sensors. The inputs must be set for 0…10 V Signals from the user terminal or using the default value installation procedure. The connection diagram is shown below: The pRack PR300T features digital inputs for connecting safety devices, alarms, device status and remote switches. These inputs are all optically isolated from the other terminals. They can work at 24 Vac, 24 Vdc and some at 230 Vac for S, M, L models. GND U5 GND J3 U4 GND U3 U2 U1 GND J2 +5VREF J24 +Vterm G0 G J1 +VDC Note: separate the sensor Signal and digital input cables as much as possible from the inductive load and power cables, to avoid possible electromagnetic disturbance. Important: • if the control voltage is drawn in parallel with a coil, fit a dedicated RC filter in parallel with the coil (the typical ratings are 100 Ω, 0.5 μF, 630 V). • If connecting the digital inputs to safety systems (alarms), remember that: the presence of voltage across the contact must be the normal operating condition, while no voltage must represent an alarm situation. This will ensure that any interruption (or disconnection) of the input will also be Signalled. Do not connect the neutral in place of an open digital input. Always interrupt the phase. The 24 Vac/Vdc digital inputs have a Resistance of around 5 kΩ. out H M out T + (G) Fig. 3.e Hardware Version Terminals +VDC GND U1, U2, U3, U6, U7, U8, S, M, L, D Description power supply (any) reference Signal Tab. 3.f All pRack digital inputs can be powered at 24 Vac and 24 Vdc, while for models M, L only 230 Vac inouts are also available. To maintain the optical isolation of the digital inputs, a separate power supply must be used just for the digital inputs. The connection diagrams shown in these figures, which while being the more common and the more convenient, do not exclude the possibility of powering the digital inputs independently from the power supply to the pRack PR300T. In any case, the inputs only have functional insulation from the rest of the controller. 3.3.6 Connecting theanalogueinputsselectedasON/OFF The pRack PR300T allows some analogue inputs to be configured as voltage-free digital inputs, not optically-isolated. The inputs must be pre-configured as voltage-free digital inputs from the user terminal or using the default value installation procedure. 24 Vac digital inputs GND U5 GND J3 U4 +VDC GND U3 U1 U2 J2 +5VREF J24 GND G0 G J1 +Vterm The following figure represents an example for connecting the 24 Vac digital inputs on pRack models S, M, L. Fig. 3.f Hardware Version S, M S, M, L Terminals BC4, BC5 U4, U5 U4, U5, U9, U10 U4, U5, U9, U10 G Digital input cable 1 2 1 2 G0 Tab. 3.g Fig. 3.g Important: the maximum current available at the digital input is 5 mA (thus the rating of the external contact must be at least 5 mA). These inputs are not optically-isolated. 24 Vdc digital inputs The following figure represents an example for connecting the 24 Vdc digital inputs on pRack models S, M, L. 3.3.7 Remote connection of the analogue inputs The Sizes of the cables for the remote connection of the analogue inputs are shown in the following table: Type of input NTC PT1000 current voltage Size [mm2] for length up to 50 m 0.5 0.75 0.25 0.25 Size [mm2] for length up to 100 m 1.0 1.5 0.5 0.5 24 Vdc Tab. 3.h + – If the product is installed in industrial enviroment (in compliance for the EN 61000-6-2 standard) the length of the connections must be less than 30m. In any case you should never exceed this length to have no measurement errors. pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 Fig. 3.h 24 ENG 230 Vac digital inputs 3.5.2 Optional modules pRack M, L models have up to two groups of inputs powered at 230 Vac 50/60 Hz +10/-15%; each group features two inputs (see paragraph 2.2.1 for details). The groups have double insulation between them and can have different voltages. Module for converting a PWM analogue output to a liner 0…10 V and 4…20 mA analogue output (code CONV0/10A0) The module is used to convert a PWM output (5 V pulses) to a liner 0…10 V and 4…20 mA analogue output (code CONV0/10A0). The control Signal (at the input terminals optically-isolated from the rest of the module) must have a maximum amplitude of 5V and a period between 8 ms and 200 ms. The 0…10 V output voltage can be connected to a maximum load of 2 kΩ, with a maximum ripple of 100 mV. The 4…20 mA current output can be connected to a maximum load of 280 Ω, with maximum overshoot of 0.3 mA. The mechanical dimensions of the module are 87x36x60 mm (2 DIN modules) with IP20 index of protection. Important: within each group the inputs must be powered at the same voltage to avoid short-circuits or powering lower voltage inputs at 230 Vac. ID18 DC17 ID17 GND U10 Y6 U9 GND Y5 ID16 J20 ID16H IDC15 J19 ID15 ID15H The following figure represents an example for connecting the 230 Vac digital inputs on pRack models S, M, L. Module for converting a 0…10 V analogue output to an SPDT digital output (code CONVONOFF0) The module is used to convert a 0…10 V analogue output to an ON/OFF relay output. The control Signal (at the input terminals, optically-isolated from the rest of the module), to ensure the switching of the relay from OFF to ON, must have a maximum amplitude of 3.3 V. The relay is SPDT, with max current of 10 A and max inductive load of 1/3 HP. The mechanical dimensions of the module are 87x36x60 mm (2 DIN modules) with IP20 index of protection. Fig. 3.i 3.6 Connecting the digital outputs 3.4.1 Remote connection of the digital inputs Important note: do not connect other devices to the digital inputs IDn inputs. 3.6.1 Electromechanical relay digital outputs The pRack PR300T features digital outputs with electromechanical relays. For ease of installation, the common terminals of some of the relays have been grouped together. The following figure illustrates a connection example. If the following this diagram is used, the current at the common terminals must not exceed the rating (nominal current) of a single terminal (8 A). The Sizes of the cables for the remote connection of the digital inputs are shown in the following table: Size (mm2) for length up to 50 m 0,25 Size (mm2) for length until 100 m 0,5 110/230 - 24 Vac If the product is installed in industrial environments (application of the EN 61000-6-2 standard) the length of the connections must be less than 30 m. This length shouldn’t be exceeded in any case, to avoid measurement errors. 3.5 Connecting the analogue outputs 3.5.1 Connecting 0…10 V analogue outputs The pRack PR300T provides 0…10 V optically-isolated analogue outputs, powered externally at 24 Vac/Vdc. The figure below shows the electrical connection diagram; the 0V (zero) of the power supply is also the reference for the output voltage: Fig. 3.k The relays are divided into groups, according to the degree of insulation. Inside each group, the relays have just basic insulation and thus must have the same voltage (generally 24V ac or 110 to 230 Vac). Between the groups there is double insulation and thus the groups can have different voltages. There is also double insulation from the rest of the controller. ID18 ID17 GND U10 U9 GND Y6 Y5 J20 Vout Vout Vout Vout Changeover outputs Some relays feature changeover outputs, the number of changeover outputs depends on whether or not there are solid state relays (SSR) and consequently varies depending on the models. Vout Vout 24 Vac/Vdc 0V Fig. 3.j Hardware Version S, M L Terminals Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4 Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, Y5, Y6 Hardware Version Reference VG0 VG0 Changeover relay reference, without SSR model Terminal PRK30T**F* models S M L Tab. 3.i 8 8, 12, 13 8, 12, 13, 14, 15 J15 J15, J17, J18 J15, J17, J18, J21 PRK30T**E* models S M D L 8, 13 8, 13 6 J15, J18 Tab. 3.j 25 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG 3.6.2 Solid state relay (SSR) digital outputs Models PRK100**C* and PRK100**D* Compact 6 S 7 M 10 - The pRack PR300T also features a Version with solid state relays (SSR) on some models for controlling devices that require an unlimited number of switching cycles and thus would not be supported by electromechanical relays. L 13 1 (1) 1 (8) 3 (8, 12, 13) 5 (8, 12, 13, 14, 15) - 7 8 13 - 18 - Tab. 3.l Important: the SSRs can control resistive loads powered at 24 Vac/ Vdc, maximum power Pmax= 10 W. For details see paragraph 2.2.2. The figure shows a connection example for resistive loads. 3.6.4 Remote connection of the digital outputs An example of resistive loads is illustrated in the the following figure: The Sizes of the cables for the remote connection of the digital outputs are shown in the following table: Size [mm2] 0,5 1,5 2,5 24 Vac AWG 20 15 14 Current [A] 2A 6A 8A Tab. 3.m If the product is installed in industrial environments (application of the EN 61000-6-2 standard) the length of the connections must be less than 30 m. This length shouldn’t be exceeded in any case, to avoid measurement errors. Fig. 3.l 3.7 pLAN electrical connections The following figure illustrates correct applications for inductive loads. If the selected system configuration involves the connection of more than one pRack PR300T board in a pLAN, AWG20/22 twisted pair shielded cable must be used, with capacitance between the wires less than 90 PF/m. The maximum length of the pLAN network is 500 m with AWG22 twisted pair shielded cable. The boards should be connected in parallel with reference to plug-in connector J5 (pRack Compact) or J11 (Versions S, M, L). external SSR NO18 NO17 J21 J26 FBus2 C9 C9 NO9 NO11 NO10 C16 C15 J16 NO16 C8 NC8 J15 NC15 C7 1 NC14 2 NO15 NO8 C7 3 C14 4 NO14 J14 J10 J25 BMS2 NO7 C4 C4 NO6 NO5 C1 J13 J12 J11 pLAN NO4 C1 NO3 NO1 NO2 input load management J22 Important: follow the network polarity: RX/TX+ on one board must be connected to RX/TX+ on the other boards; the same applies to RX/TX-. The figure shows the diagram for more than one board connected in a pLAN network powered by the same transformer; this is a typical application with more than one board connected inside the same electrical panel. pR300T pR300 Y5 ID16H ID16 IDC15 ID15 ID15H ID12 ID11 ID10 ID9 GND U8 U7 IDC1 J6 U6 ID8 ID7 J7 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 Y4 ID1 Y3 J5 Y2 Y1 VG0 VG GND U5 GND U4 +VDC J19 BMS card J4 J3 GND U2 U3 +5 VREF J2 U1 GND G0 +Vterm G J24 ID6 FieldBus card J1 Fig. 3.m AWG 20/22 NC1 2 NO1 NO2 NO13 C9 C12 C1 NO11 NO12 C9 NO9 NO10 C16 NO17 C16 C15 NO18 J20 U9 GND U10 ID13H ID13 IDC1 VG 3 Y5 Y6 FieldBus card ID16H IDC15 ID15 ID15H IDC9 ID12 GND ID11 U5 ID10 GND GND +VDC J7 J3 U8 GND U7 U3 J2 J6 ID9 U4 IDC1 U1 U6 U2 +5 VREF ID8 +Vterm J24 ID6 GND ID7 ID4 G0 ID3 G ID2 ID1 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 VG0 VG GND U5 GND U4 +VDC J5 J1 ID5 J4 J3 GND U3 U2 J2 U1 +5 VREF G J24 GND IDC13 G0 GND U10 ID13 IDC9 ID12 ID11 ID10 ID9 GND U8 U7 +Vterm U9 Y6 ID13H Y5 ID16H ID16 ID15H IDC15 U6 IDC1 ID8 ID7 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 Y4 Y3 ID2 ID1 J1 J7 J6 J19 B M S ca r d J20 J5 Y2 Y1 VG0 VG GND ID15 J19 J4 U5 GND U4 +VDC pR300T FieldBus card J3 GND U3 U2 J2 U1 +5 VREF J24 GND G0 +Vterm G J1 J23 FBu J22 pR300T B M S ca rd NO16 C8 NC8 C7 J21 J26 FBus2 J23 FB ID16 J22 pR300T FieldBus card J1J1 72 J16 NC15 NC14 NO15 C7 NO8 J15 J11 pLAN 2 1 J10 C14 C4 NO7 NO6 C4 NO5 C1 J25 BMS2 3 NO14 NC12 J14 4 C16 NO17 NO18 NO16 C16 NC15 C12 NO12 C9 NO11 NO10 C9 NO9 C8 NC8 NO8 J21 J26 FBus2 J13 J10 J17 J16 C15 1 C14 2 NC14 3 J15 NO15 C7 C7 4 NO14 J10 J25 BMS2 NO7 C4 NO6 NO5 NO4 C4 C1 NO3 NO2 NO1 C1 J11 pLAN J14 NO4 C1 J12 J11 pLAN J13 J12 NO3 input load management NO2 external SSR NO1 24 Vac/Vdc AWG 20/22 Dedicated or the same of G-G0 but not in common with other external load Fig. 3.n The table below shows the reference outputs for pRack models fitted with SSR outputs. Hardware Version S M L Reference Relay SSR 7, 8 7, 8, 12, 13 7, 8, 12, 13, 14, 15 Fig. 3.o Terminal J14, J15 J14, J15, J17, J18 J14, J15, J17, J18, J21 Tab. 3.k Important: pLAN connections are also possible with multiple boards powered by different transformers, for further details see the pCO Sistema manual, code: +030220335. 3.7.1 Connecting the terminals Important: the SSR relay load is powered at 24 Vac/Vdc, thus all the other terminals in the group must be powered at 24 Vac/Vdc due to the absence of double insulation within the group. pRack PR300T features PGDE terminals, both built-in and external connected via pLAN. Up to two external terminals can be connected, with pLAN addresses 31 and 32. The connection can be made using 6-wire telephone cables (connector J10 for S, M, L models) or shielded pair cables with 3-pin plug-in connectors (J11 for S, M, L models), as shown in the table: 3.6.3 Summary table of digital outputs according to the Versions available Type of cable 6-wire telephone (J10) AWG24 AWG20/22 Hardware changeover total no. of NO contacts NC contacts SSR relays Version contacts outputs Models PRK100**A* and PRK100**B* Compact 5 7 2 (1, 2) S 6 8 2 (7, 8) M 9 2 (8, 13) 13 2 (7, 12) 4 (7, 12, 14, L 12 2 (8, 13) 18 15) pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 Power supply distance Power supply 10 m Taken from pRack (150 mA) 200 m 500 m Taken from pRack (150 mA) Separate, from TCONN6J000 Tab. 3.n 26 ENG 4. START UP 4.1 Starting the first time 4.2 Wizard After having correctly installed pRack, a number of preliminary operations are required to configure the installation. Start up Select Config.Item: WIZARD Tutorial: the pRack PR300 configuration procedure varies according to the complexity of the installation: A. systems with only one board and maximum one external terminal. In this case, simply connect the terminal (if not built-in), power up the board and select one of the configuration solutions described below. B. systems with more than one board in pLAN or two external terminals. IIn this case, the additional operations described in Appendix A. 2 need to be completed before proceeding with configuration. Answer the questions to have a fully configuration Fig. 4.b This solution is for obtaining the recommended configuration for the system. By responding to a series of questions, from screen to screen, the user is guided in choosing the devices that are present. Once the guided procedure is finished, the final obtainable results can be viewed (report) and, if the configuration is correct, direct installation can be performed of the parameters for pRack pR300T operation, including those associated with the inputs and outputs as described in paragraph 4.4. The procedure for configuring an installation described below is the same for all system configurations that feature just one pRack PR300 board, and for system configurations with more than one board connected in a pLAN. When first starting the pRack PR300 board, after waiting around 1 minute, a screen is shown for choosing the language used to display the program (English or Italian). Press ENTER ( ) to change the language displayed, while pressing ESC displays the following screen. Note: after having configured the parameters using the Wizard, the configuration can be modified manually, within the context of the selected system configuration. Important: before starting the pRack PR300T, carefully check the settings made automatically by the software. Note: If no option is chosen within a time set by parameter and visible on the screen, the current language remains selected. Tutorial: the following paragraph shows a configuration example using the Wizard for an installation with two suction lines. After having selected the user interface language, the pRack PR300 software shows a screen for choosing between three possible system configuration solutions, as follows: • Wizard • Advanced configuration. 4.3 Exampleofsystemconfigurationusingthe Wizard Important: after having configured the system, the configuration can be modified, it can be modified by repeating the same procedure, making sure the Carel default values have been reset. After having restored the defaults, the 7 segment display will show the number 88, the same as when first starting the controller. This means that the DEFAULT values have been restored correctly. pLAN 3 address ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 Y4 ID1 Y3 J5 Y2 Y1 VG VG0 J4 GND U5 GND U4 +VDC J3 GND U3 U2 U1 J2 This describes a possible example of Wizard-led configuration for a type of system like the one shown in the figure, with 2 suction lines and part in high pressure (gas cooler and HPV, RPRV valves) on 3 different control boards: pLAN 1 address Fig. 4.a Important: after having configured the system, power down the controller and power up again. pLAN 2 address Fig. 4.c 27 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Answer YES to the next question which asks if a dedicated pRack board is present; this way the pRack pR300T software is ready to configure the board with address 2 in pLAN: The preliminary operations to be performed before configuration are: 1. with the boards not connect to the pLAN, power up the second and third pRack board and set the pLAN address to 2 and 3 (for details, refer to Appendix A.1) 2. remove power and connect the boards and any terminal to the pLAN as described in paragraph 3.7. 3. power the board and wait for the Wizard selection to appear Wizard Ib45 Compressor config. Dedicated pRack board for suction line: At this point, select the type of installation as SUCTION+CONDENSER: Wizard Ib01 YES Type of Installation: Fig. 4.i SUCTION & CONDENSER Fig. 4.d After having answered the question to configure the second suction line, the software asks if there is a dedicated pLAN board for condensing line 1 In this example, answer YES. Set the type of compressors and regulation of suction line 1 by answering the questions asked by the pRack pR300T software, for example: Wizard Ib90 Condenser config. Wizard Ib03 Compressor config. Dedicated pRack board for condensing line: Compressor type: RECIPROCATING YES Fig. 4.j Compressor number: 3 Wizard Fig. 4.e Wizard Ib40 Compressor config. Regulation by: PRESSURE Measure unit: barg Refrigerant: Ib99 Gas cooler config. EEVS Managemant HPU valve: ENABLE RPRV valve: ENABLE Valves routing: TWIN A->HPV,B->RPRV Status: Connected R744 (*) (*) Fig. 4.k Note: (*) ENABLE, for valves driven directly by Carel driver, if you need 0-10V Fig. 4.f (as described in page 49, paragraph 6.15.1...), please set DISABLE Wizard Ib41 Compressor config. Regulation type: PROPORTIONAL BAND After having configured condensing line 1, the software asks if there is a condensing line 2; answer NO to this question: Wizard Enable integral time action: YES Ib98 Configure another condensing line: Fig. 4.g NO After having configured suction line 1, the unit asks if another suction line needs to be configured, which must be answered YES: Fig. 4.l Wizard Ib43 Compressor config. At this point, the software asks if you wish to view a report of the settings performed: Configure another suction line: Wizard Ib2a Enable I/O config: YES Visualize Wizard report: NO (Push (DOWN) to continue) YES Fig. 4.h Fig. 4.m pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 28 ENG If the settings are correct, you can proceed to install the set values: Wizard Board necessary 1 3 4.4.1 Associating the inputs and outputs When using pre-configurations and the wizard, pRack PR300T can automatically associate the board’s inputs and outputs with the various functions. Ib3a For the wizard only, after having configured the lines, automatic association can be chosen as an option. If choosing not to use this function, the I/Os need to be configured manually, according to requirements. 2 All boards present (ENTER) to continue The criteria applied for automatic association are described below. Fig. 4.n Digital outputs pRack PR300T assigns in order: • Compressor outputs • Fan outputs • Global alarm. After a few seconds, the unit can be started. Wizard Successfully complete Digital inputs pRack PR300T assigns in order: • High and low pressure switches (HP and LP) • Compressor alarms • Fan alarms Press (ENTER) to continue Fig. 4.o Note: pRack PR300T can also use certain analogue inputs as digital inputs, nonetheless the common HP and LP pressure switches are always associated with actual digital inputs. Note: after having configured pRack pR300T, the power must be turned off and back on in order to confirm that the data is saved. Analogue inputs pRack PR300T assigns in order: • Pressure or temperature control probes for 1 or 2 lines, according to the settings made. The types of probe asSigned as default are 4…20 mA or 0 to 5 V (first 4…20 mA, then 0 to 5 V if necessary) for the pressure probes, NTC for the suction temperature probes and HTNTC for the condensing temperature probes; • Suction temperature probe on line 1: if possible this is associated with input B3, otherwise the first free input; • Discharge temperature probe on line 1; • Suction temperature probe on line 2; • Discharge temperature probe on line 2. 4.4 Advanced configuration Start up Select Config.Item: ADVANCED CONFIGURATION It only defines the structure of the plant For very expert users Fig. 4.p Analogue outputs pRack PR300T assigns in order: • Compressor inverters for 1 or 2 lines; • Fan modulating devices. This solution allows you to establish the configuration for the pLAN structure needed for correct operation of the system. Once the procedure for choosing the various factors that influence the final configuration is completed, the pRack pR300T software verifies if the pLAN configuration is exact and shows the user interface for configuring the parameters that must be manually performed by the user. Attention: this configuration method is recommended only for expert users, since all system parameters must be manually configured. 29 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG 5. USER INTERFACE Menu screen An example of a menu screen is shown in the figure below: 5.1 Graphic terminal The pRack PR300T user interface is represented by the pGDE terminal, panel or built-in versions. The functions associated with the 6 buttons on the pGDE terminal are the same on all the screens and are described in the table below. Main menu D.Condensers Functions of the 6 buttons Button E.Other functions Function associated displays the list of active alarms and accesses the alarm (ALARM) log F.Settings used to enter the main menu tree Fig. 5.b returns to the higher level screen scrolls a list upwards or increases the value highlighted by the cursor scrolls a list downwards or decreases the value (DOWN) highlighted by the cursor The top right corner shows the selected item and the current password level (for details see the following paragraph). The and buttons are used to select the desired menu item, while accesses the selected item. (UP) (ENTER) enters the selected submenu or confirms the set value. Tab. 5.a The LEDs associated with the buttons have the following meanings. Screen for displaying/setting the parameters An example of a screen for displaying/setting the parameters is shown in the figure, also highlighting the fields and icons used: Meaning of LEDs LED Red Button 1 Meaning Flashing: active alarms present and not acknowledged Steady: alarms present and acknowledged Yellow pRack PR300T on Green pRack PR300T powered 5/9= 3 Tab. 5.b L1-AI Status Bab01 Suction press.probe PLB1 B1 4-20mA 2 24.39barg Upper value: 44.8barg Lower value: 0.0barg Calibration: 0.0barg 5.2 Description of the display Fig. 5.c 1 2 3 There are three fundamental types of screens shown to the user: • Main screen • Menu screen • Screen for displaying/setting the parameters Menu branch identifier Screen identifier Parameter Main screen The main screen is the screen that the software on board pRack PR300T automatically returns to 5 minutes after the last button was pressed. The screen identifier uniquely identifies the menu branch and the screen: the first characters indicate the menu branch, while the last two alphanumeric digits identify the order of the screen inside the menu, for example screen Bab01 is the first screen in menu B.a.b. An example of the main screen is shown in the figure, highlighting the fields and icons used: Note: The information on the screens may vary according to the password level used to access the menu. 1 2 3 pRack 14:30 20/01/10 Suction: L1: 26.16barg L2: 12.06barg Gas Cooler: 64.44barg Unit OFF by keyboard 5.3 Password pRack PR300T manages three levels of password: • User • Maintenance • Manufacturer 4 5 Each level includes the same rights as the lower levels, that is, the Manufacturer can access all the screens and parameters, the Maintenance can access the screens and parameters available in the Maintenance and User levels, while the User can only access the screens and parameters available in the User level. Fig. 5.a 1 2 3 4 5 Time and date Main values. Unit status (unit off ) or compressor and fan status (unit on) Active alarm Signal and manual operation Access further information screens (menu branch A.a) by pressing button Note: All levels display the main screens and the other information screens. When pressing a prompt is shown to enter the password, which remains active for 5 minutes after the last button is pressed. . Note: The information shown on the main screen varies according to the system configuration (one line, two lines, two lines with shared condenser) and the type of control value used (pressure or temperature). For two line systems, a parameter is used to select which line is shown first. The menu screens show their own password level using an icon at the top right: 1 line: user, 2 lines: maintenance, 3 lines: manufacturer. Note: The other information shown in menu branch A.a. varies according to the system configuration. For two line systems, pressing from the main screen accesses a different screen based on the starting point (line 1, line 2). pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 The password level can be changed from menu branch F.c. at any time. The password can also be changed in the corresponding menu branch. 30 ENG 5.4 Menu description A.Unit status B.In/Out a.Main info b.Set point c.On/Off a.Status C.Compressors a.Line 1 (*) D.Condensers b.Line 2 (*) a.Line 1 (*) E.Other func. b.Line 2 (*) a.Oil a.Digital in b.Analog in c.Digital out d.Analog out a.Digital out b.Analog out a.Digital out b.Analog out a.I/O status b.Control c.Op. hours d.Energy saving e.Alarms f.Konfig. g.Advanced …. a.I/O status b.Control c.EEV d.Energy saving e.Alarms f.Konfig. g.Advanced …. a.Line 1 (*) b.Subcool b.Line 2 (*) a.Line 1 (*) c.Economiser b.Line 2 (*) a.Line 1 (*) d.Liquid inj. b.Line 2 (*) a.Line 1 (*) e.Heat recovery b.Line 2 (*) a.Line 1 (*) b.Manual op. c.Test f.Generic func. g.ChillBooster h.DSS (*) F.Settings. a.Clock b.Languages c.BMS G.Safety d.Password a.Log b.Prevent c.Alarm Konfig. H.Info I.Setup b.Line 2 (*) a.Stages b.Modulation c.Alarms d.Time bands e.I/O status a.Line 1 (*) b.Line 2 (*) a.I/O status b.Settings aTime bands b.Adjust a.I/O status b.Settings …. a.I/O status b.Settings c.EEV …. a.I/O status b.Settings c.EEV …. a.I/O status b.Settings …. a.I/O status b.Settings …. a.I/O status b.Settings. …. a.Line 1 (*) b.Line 2 (*) a.Line b.Line a.Line b.Line 1 2 1 2 (*) (*) (*) (*) a.Pre-configurations b.Wizard c.Advanced Konfig. d.Default b.Wizard c.Config.avanzata d.Default (*) this menu level is only visible for system configurations with two lines. Note: • The figure illustrates the maximum menu configuration visible with the Manufacturer password. If accessing with the User or Maintenance password, only the menu items available are visible • For some menu items, access is possible with different password levels (e.g. I/O status), but the information available on the screens changes. 31 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG 6. FUNCTIONS Configuration 2: 1 a pRack pR300T board for each suction line and 1 pRack pR300T board for control of the high pressure part (gas cooler and HPV, RPRV valves): 6.1 Schematic diagram and system configurations used The schematic diagram of a transcritical system is shown in the figure: pLAN 3 address pLAN 1 address RPRV P T P T HPV pLAN 2 address P T P T Fig. 6.c Fig. 6.a Configuration 3: a pRack pR300T board to manage the medium temperature suction line and control of the high pressure part and a board for managing the low temperature suction line: This shows the two medium and low temperature lines, the HPV valve, which separates the high pressure part of the circuit from the medium pressure part, and the RPRV valve which regulates the pressure in the receiver. Both valves can be managed directly by the controller with builtin driver (PRK30TD*). Management of the system can be performed using one of the system configurations described hereafter. Configuration 1: a pRack pR300T board for managing both suction lines and control of the high pressure part (this configuration can be used also as a backup controller): pLAN 1 address pLAN 2 address pLAN 1 address Fig. 6.d Fig. 6.b pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 32 ENG 6.3 Control Configuration 4: a pRack pR300T board for managing the two suction lines and a board for control of the high pressure part: pRack PR300T can manage two types of control: • Proportional band (P, P+I); • Neutral zone (fixed times, variable times). Both types of control can be applied to both compressors and condensers, according to the settings defined during start-up or in main menu branches C.a.b/C.b.b and D.a.b/D.b.b. pLAN 3 address The type of control chosen is independent for each line present, either suction or condenser. pLAN 1 address In addition, pRack PR300T can use as the reference for control either the pressure or the converted temperature, or the temperature read by probe if there is no pressure probe, even if reference is only made to pressure below. The control set point can be compensated by an offset linked to digital inputs, probes, supervisor or time bands, for details see paragraph 6.5 relating to compressor and fan energy saving. Both types of control are described below, and are valid for both control of suction pressure and condensing pressure, and operation with backup probes and/or probes not working. 6.3.1 Proportional band The operating principle is normal proportional or proportional + integral control (P, P+I). Fig. 6.e The control set point is central, consequently - for proportional control only - operation is schematised in the following figure: 6.2 Unit On-Off Regulation request The unit can be switched on and off from: • User terminal • Supervisor • Digital input 100% On-off from the user terminal and the configuration parameters are available under the main menu, branch A.c, and are differentiated based on the access level; the User password allows display only. On-off from the supervisor and from the digital input and start-up after a blackout (with specific delay, to avoid continuous starts and stops in the event of instability in the power supply) must be enabled using the parameters visible only with the Manufacturer password. Differential Differential Regulation probe value Setpoint On-off from the digital input is equivalent to an enabling Signal, that is, if the digital input is Off the unit cannot be switched on in any other way, while if is On, the unit can be switched on or off in any other way, with the same priority (the most recent control has precedence, whatever the origin), as shown in the figure: Fig. 6.g For example, for 4 devices with the same capacity and proportional only control, start-up occurs as shown in the figure: Devices activation Digital Input User interface C1 Supervisor Unit On/Off C2 Differential C3 C4 Differential Fig. 6.f Suction pressure Setpoint When there are two suction and condenser lines, on-off is independent for each line, while when there are two suction lines and one condenser line, it is independent for the suction lines, while the condenser line stops when both suction lines are off, and starts when at least one suction line is ON. Fig. 6.h Note: certain special conditions or functions in the pRack software cause the unit to shutdown: • Configuration of some parameters: e.g. inputs/outputs, configuration of compressors, inverter parameters. • Installation of default parameters • Manual management 33 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG With P+I control, added to the effect of the proportional action described above is the integral action, used to achieve a null control error in steady operation, as shown in the figure: For control in Neutral zone, the parameters shown in the figure must be set: NZ timings Decrease zone Regulation variable P+I Neutral zone Increase zone Max time 100% P Max time 0% Min time 0% Setpoint Min time 100% time Fig. 6.i Decr. Diff. The integral action depends on the time and the deviation from the set point. This modifies the request if the control value does not approach the set point for some time. The integral time setting represents how fast integral control is implemented: • low values determine fast and intense control action • high values determine slower and more stable control action It is recommended to not set a value that is too low for the integral time, to avoid instability. Incr. Diff. Regulation probe value Fig. 6.k As well as the decrease and increase differentials, 4 times need to be set, two for each zone, which represent the maximum and minimum time to reach the request, equal to 0% or 100%, for the decrease and increase respectively. Tutorial: the decrease/increase times (minimum and maximum) represent the time needed to change from maximum to minimum capacity and vice-versa, and not the time between the deactivation/ activation of the individual device. For example, in the case of 4 devices with the same capacity, an increase time of 180 s means that one device is activated every 45 s. 6.3.2 Neutral zone The operating principle is schematised in the following figure: In the situation shown in the figure, the request sent by the controller decreases/increases slowly as soon as the controlled value is outside of the Neutral zone, while it decreases/increases quickly the further the controlled value moves away from the Neutral zone; in this way the response of the system is faster when further from steady conditions. Regulation request Neutral zone Diff. Setpoint Note: the set point is in the centre of the activation band, therefore when reaching the set point some devices are on, even with purely proportional control. Decrease zone Diff. Increase zone Note: When using fixed times, the maximum and minimum must be set to the same value. In this case, the request sent by the controller decreases/increases constantly inside the deactivation/ activation differential. 100% 6.3.3 Modulation in Neutral zone Force off Diff. Diff. pRack PR300T can activate a specific function inside the Neutral zone if modulating devices are used (e.g.: inverters). Regulation probe value This function can be enabled in main menu branch C.a.g/C.b.g or D.a.g/ D.b.g. Setpoint Modulation in Neutral zone is used to vary the request sent by the controller inside the Neutral zone proportionally so as to enter the decrease zone with the minimum request and the increase zone with the maximum request, meaning a device can be immediately deactivated/ activated when exiting the Neutral zone. This makes it possible to remain longer inside the neutral zone without starting or stopping any device. An example of this operation is shown in the figure: Fig. 6.j Inside the neutral zone the capacity request sent by the controller is constant (except when there is a modulation device and modulation is enabled inside the neutral zone, as described in the following paragraph) and the value satisfies the temperature control request in those specific operating conditions, therefore within this zone no device is stopped or started. Regulation request In the decrease zone, the request also decreases at a rate that depends on the deviation from the set point, and vice-versa in the increase zone the request increases proportionally to the deviation. Neutral zone 100% For the increase and decrease zones, the following can be used: • Fixed times: the request decreases or increases constantly as time elapses. • Variable times: the request decreases or increases more quickly (according to the settings) as the deviation from the set point increases. P1 Note: The previous figure shows the increase and decrease with fixed times. Regulation probe value Fig. 6.l pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 34 ENG When entering the Neutral zone, the pRack PR300T software calculates how the request needs to change in order to exit the Neutral zone at minimum or maximum output, and applies one of the two values according to the trend in variation in the control variable. For example, at point P1 in the figure, the trend of the two requests is represented by the segments with thin lines, and the request ‘reverses’ because at that point the control variable has started increasing in value again. The compressor size refers to its capacity and number of load stages or to the inverter presence, therefore different sizes need to be defined for compressors with the same capacity yet a different number of load stages. The inverter is always associated to size 1. Note: When exiting the Neutral zone, it is possible that the request is not at the minimum or maximum value, where limitation is enabled for of the modulating device variation speed. • • 6.3.4 Control with backup probes and/or probes not working • pRack PR300T can use backup control probes that are activated when the normal control probes are not working. • Tutorial: below is one example of some possible configurations: • One line, 4 reciprocating compressors with the same capacity, the first with inverter (2 sizes). One line, 4 scroll compressors with the same capacity, the first Digital Scroll™ (1 sizes). One line, 4 reciprocating compressors with the same capacity, the first two with 4 load stages, the other two not capacity-controlled (2 sizes). One line, 4 reciprocating compressors with the same capacity and 4 load stages each (1 size). Two lines, line 1 with 4 scroll compressors, the first Digital Scroll™, line 2 with 4 reciprocating compressors, the first with inverter (1 size line 1, 2 sizes line 2). The backup probes must be enabled in main menu branch C.a.g/C.b.g or D.a.g/D.b.g. 6.4.2 Rotation When different pRack boards are used to manage the suction and condenser lines, the backup suction pressure probe must be connected to the board that manages the suction line, while the backup condensing pressure probe can be connected either to the board that manages the suction line or the board that manages the condenser line. pRack PR300T can manage 4 different types of device rotation: • FIFO (First In First Out): the first device to start is also the first to stop • LIFO (Last In First Out): the last device to start is the first to stop • By time: the device with the least number of operating hours starts and the device with highest number of operating hours stops • Custom: the on/off sequences are defined by the user If the main control probes are not working and no backup probes are fitted, or the backup probes are also not working, or the corresponding temperature probes are also not working, fixed values are used for the control request, set in main menu branch C.a.g/C.b.g or D.a.g/D.b.g. NB: Different Sizes of compressors can only be managed with Custom rotation. The type of rotation is selected and the corresponding parameters set during the start-up procedure or in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f. The activation thresholds are calculated differently depending on whether FIFO, LIFO, time or Custom rotation is used: 6.4 Compressors pRack PR300T can manage up to 2 suction lines with different types of compressors and capacity modulation devices, applying common types of device rotation and controlling both the start mode and the safety times for each type of compressor, as well as a number of accessory functions. Device activation threshold calculation Rotation FIFO LIFO By time The compressor functions and related parameter settings are enabled from main menu branch C.a/C.b. Custom These features and functions are described in detail in the following paragraphs. Threshold calculation Static: the range of variation of the control request is divided equally between the number of stages available Dynamic: the thresholds are calculated depending on the capacity effectively available Tab. 6.c Example 1: FIFO rotation, 4 compressors of the same capacity without load stages. 6.4.1 Possible compressor configurations The activation thresholds are 25, 50, 75 and 100 %. pRack PR300T can manage different types of compressors: • Reciprocating • Scroll Moreover, a capacity modulation device is allowed for each suction line, which may be one of the following, according to the type of compressor: C1 C2 C3 C4 Compressors and modulation devices Compressors Reciprocating modulation devices Inverter Inverter Digital Scroll™ Scroll 25% 50% 75% 100% Regulation request Fig. 6.m Tab. 6.a Example 2: Custom rotation, 4 compressors with capacities of 10, 20, 30 and 40 kW. The activation thresholds with all the compressors available are 10, 30, 60, 100 %. Note: The same modulation device is used on each line. The maximum number of compressors and load stages per line varied according to the type of compressor: Compressors and modulation devices Compressors Reciprocating Scroll Maximum No. 12 12 Load stages 24 total 24 total C1 C2 C3 C4 Tab. 6.b 10% 30% 60% 100% Regulation request Fig. 6.n 35 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG If an alarm is active on compressor 3, the recalculated activation thresholds are 10, 30, 70 %. C2 10% Example 1: range of modulating device capacity variation higher than the capacity of the compressors: Two compressors without capacity control, with the same capacity, 20 kW each, modulating device with variable capacity between 30 and 60 kW. The figure shows the trend when the request sent by the controller increases and then decreases continuously between 0 and 100 %. It can be seen that the capacity delivered exactly follows the required capacity, except when below the minimum capacity of the modulating device. C4 30% 70% Regulation request Actual capacity (kW) Fig. 6.o 100 Activation of the compressors and load stages may be: • Grouped (CpppCppp): first all the load stages are activated on one compressor before starting the next one • Balanced (CCpppppp): first all the compressors are started at minimum capacity and then the corresponding load stages are activated, one for each compressor, in sequence. 80 60 40 20 6.4.3 Rotation with modulation devices pRack PR300T can also manage compressor rotation when a capacity modulation device is fitted (inverter, Digital Scroll™ or continuous control). The type of modulating device is selected and the corresponding parameters set during the start-up procedure or in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f and C.a.g/C.b.g Regulation request Step compressors capacity Inverter capacity Total capacity Fig. 6.p Example 2: range of modulating device capacity variation lower than the capacity of the compressors: two compressors without capacity control, with the same capacity, 30 kW each, modulating device with variable capacity between 20 and 40 kW. It can be seen that the capacity delivered does not exactly follow the required capacity, rather acts in steps, so as to avoid swings. The modulating device is always the first to start and the last to stop irrespective of the type of rotation, the other devices start or stop according to the type of rotation selected. Note: The compressor with modulation device is also assumed to be the first. Actual capacity (kW) The trend in capacity delivered by the modulation device depends on the capacity of the compressor with the modulating device compared to the other compressors available. 100 80 Three cases can be identified: • compressors all with the same capacity and range of capacity variation of the modulating device greater than or equal to the capacity of the compressors • compressors all with the same capacity and range of capacity variation of the modulating device less than the capacity of the compressors • compressors with different capacities 60 40 20 In the first case, the modulating device manages to continuously cover the range of variation of the control request, while in the second case some discontinuous variations remain. The behaviour in the third case varies according to the capacities involved, and in any case reflects one of the two previous cases. To configure the compressor capacity when an inverter is used, the minimum and maximum operating frequencies need to be set relating to the minimum and maximum value of the analogue output and the rated capacity delivered at rated frequency (50 Hz), so that the pRack PR300T software can calculate the capacity the compressor can deliver with the inverter and use this value for control. In addition, for inverters the variation in capacity delivered can be limited by setting the increase and decrease times. If these times have already been configured on the inverter, the higher time set has priority. Regulation request Step compressors capacity Inverter capacity Total capacity Fig. 6.q Example 3: range of modulating device capacity variation in between the capacity of the compressors, all different sizes: two compressors without capacity control, capacities 15 kW and 25 kW, modulating device with variable capacity between 10 and 30 kW. Actual capacity (kW) 70 50 30 10 Regulation request Step compressors capacity Inverter capacity Total capacity Fig. 6.r pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 36 ENG 6.4.4 Starting 6.4.7 Economizer pRack PR300T can manage different types of compressor starting: • Direct • Part-winding • Star/delta pRack PR300T can activate the economizer function to boost compressor efficiency by injecting vapour. Some of the liquid is taken from the condenser, expanded through a valve and then sent to a heat exchanger to cool the liquid leaving the condenser. The resulting superheated vapour is injected into a special section of the compressor. The type of starting can be selected and the related parameters set in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f. The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main menu branch E.c.a.b. For part-winding starting, the delay in activating the digital output that controls the second winding needs to be set: The economizer is only efficient for high compressor activation capacities, typically over 75 %, therefore the economizer function control valve is only activated when exceeding a set threshold. As the economizer tends to increase the condensing pressure, this needs to be controlled to ensure the high condensing pressure alarm is not generated. In addition, the injection of vapour decreases the discharge temperature and so this value also needs to be monitored. Consequently, the three conditions for activation of the economizer function are: • Capacity above a set threshold • Condensing pressure below a set threshold (with reset differential) • Discharge temperature above a set threshold (with reset differential) Compressor request Line Part-winding Delay Fig. 6.s Note: the function can be activated on a maximum of 6 compressors. For star/delta starting, the star time, the delay between the activation of the line and star digital input, and between the delta and star digital input all need to be set, as shown in the figure: 6.4.8 Liquid injection As an alternative to the economizer, pRack PR300T can manage the injection of liquid into the compressors (the two functions are alternative, as the point of vapour injection into the compressor is the same). Compressor request Line The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main menu branch E.d.a.b/E.d.b.b. Part-winding Liquid injection is used to protect the compressor, and in fact decreases the discharge temperature. Operation is Similar to the economizer function, with the difference that the expanded liquid is not sent to a heat exchanger, but rather directly into the compressor. The function is only activated when the compressor is on and the discharge temperature exceeds a set threshold (with differential). Delta Star-line delay Delay Start-delta delay Fig. 6.t Note: the function can be activated on a maximum of 6 compressors. 6.4.5 Safety times pRack PR300T can manage common safety times for each compressor: • Minimum on time • Minimum off time • Minimum time between consecutive starts 6.4.9 Manual operation pRack PR300T can manage 3 different compressor manual operating modes: • Enabling / disabling • Manual management • Output test The related parameters can be set in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f. Note: for two lines, a further delay can be set between starts of the compressors on different lines, so as to avoid Simultaneous starts. See paragraph 6.6.6 for the detailed description of the synchronisation function for two lines (DSS). Enabling / disabling is managed in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f., while manual management and the output test can be activated in main menu branch B.b or B.c. Enabling / disabling is used to temporarily exclude the compressors from operation, to allow, for example, repair or replacement. The disabled compressors are also excluded from rotation. 6.4.6 Balancing pRack PR300T can control any balance valves in parallel with the compressors. This function can be used to activate a communicating solenoid valve between compressor suction and discharge, for a set time, before each individual compressor starts. In this way, the suction and discharge pressure can be balanced and the compressor can be started in more favourable conditions. Note: enabling is the only compressor manual operating mode that can be activated when the unit is on. Both manual management and the output test are enabled by parameter and remain active for a set time after the last button is pressed, after which the unit returns to normal operating mode. Manual management is used to switch the compressors on or off without observing the control needs, however still considering any safety devices (alarms, safety times, starting procedures) and respecting the set configuration of the inputs/outputs. The balancing function can be enabled and the related activation time set in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f. 37 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Fixed cycle time The compressor ON time is calculated as the percentage of the cycle time corresponding to the required capacity: The activation screen resembles the one shown in the figure and is used to override the outputs relating to the operation of the selected device, e.g. compressor 1: Manual mng. TON= % Richiesta * Tempo di ciclo Bba02 The cycle time can be set to the optimum value suggested by the manufacturer to achieve maximum COP, or to a higher value to increase resolution of the capacity delivered (a higher cycle time implies greater continuity in the effective capacity that can be delivered). Digital output board1 Compressor 1 Force to: OFF Variable cycle time The compressor ON time is set to 2 s and the cycle time is calculated based on the required capacity: Fig. 6.u The output test is used to activate or deactivate the outputs (where necessary setting an output percentage for the analogue outputs), without observing any type of safety feature. The activation screen resembles the one shown in the figure and is used to override the outputs on the pRack boards, in the order they physically appear on the board (without links to the devices): Test DO TCICLO= TON /% Richiesta Optimised cycle time The compressor ON time is set to 2 s and the cycle time is calculated based on the required capacity for capacities less than 17 %, after which the cycle time is set to 12 s and the ON time varies. In essence, this mode is a combination of the previous two. This guarantees the maximum possible COP and control rate (obtained with the 12 s cycle time) and the maximum control range (starting from 10 %). Bca10 Digital output board1 D01 NO OFF D02 NO OFF Note: the minimum capacity that can be delivered by Digital Scroll™ compressors is Minimum ON time/Maximum cycle time = 2/30 = 6.7 %, which also depends on the selected control mode (for example, in the first case shown in the figure the minimum capacity delivered is Minimum ON time/Cycle time = 2/15 = 13%). Fig. 6.v Important: manual mode and the output test can only be activated with the unit off. Both manual mode and above all the output test must be used with special care and by expert personnel to avoid damage to the devices. Note: if high pressure prevention is enabled with activation/ deactivation of the devices, the Digital Scroll™ compressor delivers the minimum possible capacity. Digital Scroll™ compressors Starting procedure pRack PR300T can manage the specific starting procedure for Digital Scroll™ compressors, as represented as in the following figure: pRack PR300T can use a Digital Scroll™ compressorä as the modulating device for suction lines (one for each line). This type of compressor features special operation, and is controlled by pRack PR300T as follows. The related parameters can be set in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f. 4s The capacity is modulated by opening/closing a valve with PWM; when the valve is ON the compressor delivers minimum capacity, while when the valve is off the compressor delivers maximum capacity. In the following description and figure, ON and OFF refer to the status of the compressor, while operation of the valve is the exact opposite: 10% 2s 13s 10s 15s 2s 18s There are three stages: 1. balance: the PWM valve is activated for 4 s, so that the compressor delivers minimum capacity; 2. compressor activation with 50 % capacity for 3 minutes; 3. forced operation at 100 % for 1 minute. 5s 8s 5s During the starting procedure, the request sent by the controller is ignored and only at the end of the procedure does the capacity delivered start reflecting the request. If the request is cancelled during the starting procedure, the compressor stops at the end, then the minimum ON time for these types of compressors is set to 244 s. 4s 12s The starting procedure is performed when the compressor is started, while it can be disabled for a set time by parameter for subsequent starts, if the compressor has not remained off for a minimum set time. After this time has elapsed the procedure is performed again during the following start. Fig. 6.w The following data are provided by the manufacturer of the compressor: • minimum ON time 2 s • maximum cycle time 20 s • optimum cycle time 12 s Note: the safety times for Digital Scroll™ compressors are established by the manufacturer, and are as follows: • Minimum ON time: 244 s (starting procedure) • Minimum OFF time: 180 s • Minimum time between restarts: 360 s There are three possible operating modes: • Fixed cycle time • Variable cycle time • Optimised cycle time Based on the operating mode selected, pRack PR300T calculates the valve activation percentage that satisfies the required capacity. pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 time Fig. 6.x 15s 20s 100s Startup 67% Variable cycle time ON OFF 50s Compressor Fixed cycle time ON OFF 60s Valve Compressor power request Compressor PWM modulation 180s Request 38 ENG Alarms pRack PR300T can manage, in addition to the common alarms for all types of compressors (see chapter 8 for details), some specific alarms for Digital Scroll™ compressors: • high oil temperature • oil dilution • high discharge temperature These alarms are managed as specified by the manufacturer of the compressor, and therefore pRack PR300T can only enable or disable them. Activation of these alarms requires an oil temperature probe, which can also be the common probe (see the paragraph relating to oil management) and the compressor discharge temperature probe. Example 2: minimum modulating output value 0 V, maximum value 10 V, minimum modulating device capacity 60 %, maximum 100 %. Analog output Max capacity = 100 % Max output value = 10 V Min output value = 0 V Min capacity = 60 % Setpoint Differential Differential Note: pRack PR300T does not manages the envelope for Digital Scroll™ compressors and consequently there is no corresponding alarm when operating outside the envelope. Regulation probe value Fig. 6.z Example 3: minimum modulating output value 2 V, maximum value 10 V, minimum modulating device capacity 60 %, maximum 100 %. 6.5 Gas cooler Analog output Max capacity = 100 % pRack pR300T manages the gas cooler in a manner that is completely similar to the pRack PR300T for the condensers, with the only difference being that in transcritical condition, since correspondence between the pressure and saturated temperature is lost, the regulation is always in temperature. The regulation variable, therefore, is the output temperature from the gas cooler. Up to 16 fans can be managed, also with inverter modulation. In the event of modulation, the modulating output 0...10 V is unique while an input can be managed for each fan for signalling the alarms. The functionalities can be enabled and the relative parameters can be set from main menu branch D.a/D.b. Max output value = 10 V Min capacity = 60 % Min output value = 2 V Setpoint Differential Differential Regulation probe value Fig. 6.aa 6.5.1 Control Cut-off pRack PR300T manages a control cut-off for the fans; functions and related parameter settings can be enabled from main menu branch D.a.b/D.b.b. The operating principle of the cut-off function is shown in the figure: pRack PR300T can manage proportional band and Neutral zone control, by pressure or temperature. For details on the control modes, see the corresponding paragraph, while below is the description only of the features relating to the fans. Fan operation depending on the compressors The operation of the fans can be bound to the operation of the compressors by setting a parameter in main menu branch D.a.b/D.b.b, in this case the fans only start if at least one compressor is on. This setting is ignored if the fans are controlled by a dedicated pRack PR300T board and the pLAN network is disconnected. Max output value Regulation request Cut-Off value of request Min output value Fan operation with modulating device If the fans are controlled by a modulating device, the meaning of the parameters that associate the minimum and maximum values of the device’s modulating output and the minimum and maximum capacity of the modulating device on screens Dag02 and Dbg02 is illustrated in the following examples. Cut-Off setpoint Regulation setpoint Differential Differential Regulation probe value Fig. 6.ab Example 1: minimum modulating output value 0 V, maximum value 10 V, minimum modulating device capacity 0 %, maximum 100 %. A percentage of the control request and a cut-off set point can be set. When the control request reaches the set cut-off value, this value is kept constant until the control value falls below the cut-off set point, after which it falls to 0 % and remains there until the request exceeds the cutoff value again. Analog output Max capacity = 100 % Max output value = 10 V Min capacity = 0 % Min output value = 0 V Setpoint Differential Differential Regulation probe value Fig. 6.y 39 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG 6.5.2 Rotation Note: pRack PR300T can manage rotation of the fans, much in the same way as described for the compressors, therefore: • LIFO, FIFO, time, Custom rotation • Management of a modulation device on each line • the split condenser function can be disabled by parameter if the high pressure prevention function is activated. If split condenser is disabled due to activation of the high pressure prevention function, it remains disabled for a set time, after which it is reactivated. • split condenser cannot be enabled if there is a speed modulation device that controls all the fans. The substantial difference compared to the compressors concerns the possibility to manage different capacities and load stages, which are obviously not featured for the fans. In addition, pRack PR300T can specially manage inverter driven fans. In fact, a multiple number of inverter driven fans can be set. If there is more than one fan, however the number of inverter driven fans is set to 1, the fans are started and stopped at the same time, and the fans will always all be at the same power. 6.5.6 Manual operation pRack PR300T can also manage the same three manual operating modes for the fans as described for the compressors: • Enabling • Manual management • Output test If there is more than one inverter driven fan, as well as being able to use an alarm digital input for each, it is assumed that the weight of the modulating device is proportional to the number of fans, therefore the first case is applied, as described previously: fans all with the same power and modulating device power variation range greater than or equal to the capacity of the other devices. Enabling is managed in main menu branch D.a.f/D.b.f., while manual management and the output test can be activated in main menu branch B.b or B.c. For the detailed description of the three modes, see paragr. 6.3.9. 6.5.7 Alarms pRack PR300T can manage both a common alarm for the fans and separate alarms for each fan. When the common alarm is active the alarm is signalled, but no fan is stopped, while for separate alarms the fan that the alarm refers to is stopped. Example 1: 4 fans all controlled by the same inverter correspond to 1 fan with four times the power. Note: some fans can be excluded from the rotation, for example in the winter; to do this use the split condenser function. 6.6 HPV valve management 6.5.3 Fast start (speed up) Management of the HPV valves, which separates the high pressure part of the system from the medium pressure part, determines the transcritical and subcritical operation mode of the unit. In transcritical mode, valve regulation is done to obtain maximum yield while in subcritical mode, regulation controls the subcooling. pRack PR300T can manage the fast start function (speed up), used to overcome the initial inertia of the fans. The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main menu branch D.a.g/D.b.g If speed up is enabled, a start time can be set in which the fan speed is forced to 100%. If the outside temperature sensor is used, moreover, a threshold can be set (with reset differential) below which speed up is disabled, so as to not drastically lower the condensing pressure at start-up. The HPV valve has a proportional + integral (PI) type of regulation which uses an optimal pressure value of the gas cooler calculated on the basis of the gas cooler pressure and temperature as a regulation setpoint, as described hereafter. Enabling HPV valve management coincides with enabling the transcritical system management mode. Note: speed up has lower priority than the Silencer function (see the following paragraph for the details), therefore if the Silencer function is active, this is disabled. The HPV valve can be managed directly by pRack pR300T with builtin driver (PRK30TD***) or with external EVD EVO driver. Both solutions are compatible with the majority of valves available on the market. Direct control via serial connection is enabled under EEVS (electronic expansion valve settings), accessible from the main menu, branch E.i.c. The configuration parameters, on the other hand, are accessible from the main menu, branch E.i. 6.5.4 Silencer pRack PR300T can manage the Silencer function, used to limit fan speed at certain times of the day or in specific conditions, enabled by digital input. The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main menu branch D.a.g/D.b.g. The algorithm for calculating the regulation setpoint of the HPV valve can be optimized or customized by the user according to what was set by the parameter. Enabling fan speed limitation from the digital input or based on time bands is independent, consequently the speed is limited to the set value when at least one of the two conditions is active. Up to 4 activation bands can be set for each day of the week. Calculation of the optimized setpoint The calculation of the optimized setpoint is illustrated in the figure. UPPER PROPORTIONAL ZONE Tmin Split condenser can be used to exclude from rotation fans whose index is: • even • odd • higher than a settable value • lower than a settable value HPV OPENING ZONE The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main menu branch D.a.g/D.b.g. T₁₀₀% Pressure (Bar) pRack PR300T can manage the possibility to exclude some fans from operation, for example to reduce gas cooler operation in winter, using the split condenser function. LOWER PROPORTIONAL ZONE A 6.5.5 Split condenser TRANSCRITICAL ZONE T₁₂ B T₂₃ C INTERMEDIATE ZONE SUBCRITICAL ZONE D HPV CLOSING ZONE The function can be activated by: • time bands (winter/summer seasons) • digital input • supervisor • outside temperature (set threshold and differential) pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 P₁₀₀% Pmax Enthalpy (KJ/Kg) Fig. 6.ac 40 ENG The HPV valve is managed according to the zone identified based on the output temperature and gas cooler pressure. 6.6.8 ControlofthereceiverpressurethroughtheHPVvalve If the pressure in the receiver goes below the minimum work pressure set, the dynamic calculated setpoint for the HPV valve can be changed in order to increase the pressure in the receiver. In order to define the zones, it is necessary to set the two pressure values P100% and Pmax, the two temperatures T12, T23 related to points B and C in the figure and the two temperatures Tmin and T100%. In the following, with Tgc and Pgc, the temperature and pressure of the gas cooler will be indicated. An offset in proportion to the distance from the minimum threshold is subtracted from the calculated setpoint so that the greater opening of the HPV valve contributes to increasing the pressure in the receiver. The behaviour of the HPV valve in the various zones is as follows: • Transcritical zone, identified by Tgc ≥ T12 and Pgc ≤ Pmax: the valve works with proportional + integral (PI) type integration in order to maintain the maximum COP given by the optimal pressure Popt calculated as a function of the output temperature from the gas cooler Togc. • Subcritical zone, identified by Tmin ≤ Tgc ≤ T23: the valve works with PI regulation in order to maintain constant subcooling. • Transition zone, identified by T23 ≤ Tgc ≤ T12: the valve works with PI regulation with a pressure setpoint identified as the conjunction of points B and C in the figure, obtained by calculating the optimal pressure at the limit of the transcritical and subcritical zones. The purpose of this zone is to avoid discontinuity in passing between the two zones. • Upper proportional zone, defined by Pmax< Pgc< P100%: the valve works with only proportional regulation between the opening value reached at pressure Pmax and the maximum opening value at pressure P100%. If the pressure decreases, the opening value of the HPV valve remains constant until it enters the transcritical zone, in which the regulation restarts as previously described. • Lower proportional zone, defined by T100%< Tgc< Tmin: the valve works with only proportional regulation between the opening value reached at temperature Tmin and the maximum opening value at temperature T100%. If the pressure increases, the opening value of the HPV valve remains constant until it enters the subcritical zone, in which the regulation restarts as previously described. It is possible to disable operation according to this mode by parameter. The offset is directly proportional to the distance from the minimum work threshold, as illustrated in the figure: OFF. MAX Setpoint HPV Pmin Prec min Fig. 6.ad On the other hand, if the pressure in the receiver goes above the maximum work pressure set, the dynamic calculated setpoint for the HPV valve can be changed in order to decrease the pressure in the receiver. An offset in proportion to the distance from the maximum threshold is added to the calculated setpoint so that the lesser opening of the HPV valve contributes to decreasing the pressure in the receiver. Calculation of the customized setpoint (custom) The customized calculation differs from the optimized control due to the fact that the curve in the subcritical phase is rectilinear and defined by the user, therefore the definition of the bands and the calculation of the setpoint can be customized by the user. Behaviour in the remaining bands is as described for the optimized algorithm. The offset is directly proportional to the distance from the maximum work threshold, as illustrated in the figure: Setpoint HPV HPV valve accessory functions HPV valve management includes some accessory functions: OFFS • Pre-positioning: entering the unit ON status, the HPV valve remains at a fixed position that can be set by a parameter for a fixed time, which is also settable by a parameter, in order to be able to quickly raise the pressure in the tank. This procedure is reactivated whenever the unit goes into the OFF status or the HPV valve moves into the minimum position due to all of the compressors being turned off (optional). • Valve closure with compressors off: if all compressors in the medium temperature unit are turned off, the HPV valve can be positioned at the minimum opening value in the OFF status, which can be set by a parameter. When a compressor is restarted, the valve restarts the regulation with the pre-positioning procedure described in the previous point. • Minimum and maximum opening values: the minimum opening value in Off status and in ON status can be differentiated (by keypad, digital input or supervisor) which the maximum opening value is unique. • Maximum percentage variation: the movement of the valve cannot exceed the maximum set percentage variation per second. • Filter on setpoint: the calculation of the regulation setpoint of the HPV valve can be done by taking into account the averages of the last n samples (maximum 99) to avoid sudden variations due to high variability of the output temperature of the gas cooler. • Minimum setpoint: a minimum value can be set for the HPV valve setpoint, below which the setpoint can never go regardless of the parameters entered, in order to preserve the operation of the compressors. • Setpoint distance alarm: if the gas cooler pressure is too far from the calculated setpoint for too long (threshold and delay can be set), an alarm can be triggered. PREC max PREC Fig. 6.ae 41 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG 6.6.9 Summary of inputs, outputs and HPV valve par. 6.7 RPRV valve management The following is a summary table of the inputs/outputs used and the parameters with indications of the related configuration screens. For details, refer to Appendix A.1. Management of the RPRV valve, which is a PI regulation, is to maintain the pressure inside the CO2 receiver equal to the setpoint. The RPRV valve can be managed directly by pRack pR300T with builtin driver (PRK30TD***) or with external EVD EVO driver. Both solutions are compatible with the majority of valves available on the market. Direct control via serial connection is enabled under EEVS (electronic expansion valve settings), accessible from the main menu, branch E.i.c. The configuration parameters, on the other hand, are accessible from the main menu, branch E.i. Summary of inputs/outputs and HPV valve parameters Analog inputs Digital inputs Analog outputs Digital outputs Mask Bab04, Daa39 Bab61, Daa43 Bab09, Daa40 Bab62, Daa44 Baade, Eia04 Bad14, Eia06 --- Description Gas cooler pressure Gas cooler output temperature Gas cooler backup pressure Gas cooler output backup temperature HPV valve alarm HPV valve output --- 6.7.1 RPRV valve accessory functions RPRV valve management includes some accessory functions: • Pre-positioning: entering the unit ON status, the RPRV valve remains at a fixed position that can be set by a parameter for a fixed time, also settable by a parameter, in order to be able to quickly raise the pressure in the tank. This procedure is reactivated whenever the unit goes into the OFF status or the RPRV valve moves into the minimum position due to all of the compressors being turned off (optional). • Valve closure with compressors off: if all compressors in the medium temperature unit are turned off, the RPRV valve can be positioned at the minimum opening value in the ON status, which can be set by a parameter. When a compressor is restarted, the valve restarts the regulation with the pre-positioning procedure described in the previous point. • Minimum and maximum opening values: the minimum opening value in Off status and in ON status can be differentiated (by keypad, digital input or supervisor) while the maximum opening value is unique. • Maximum percentage variation: the movement of the valve cannot exceed the maximum set percentage variation per second. • Maximum receiver pressure: a maximum value can be set for the receiver pressure, above which an alarm is triggered and unit operation can be blocked. The block is optional and can be enabled by a parameter. Parameters Settings Eib01 Zone definition Eib05 Eib06 Regulation Eib07 Eib16 Safeties Eib02 Eib03 Eib08 Eib09 Eib10 Eib11 Safeties Eib12 Eib13 Eib14 Eib15 Eib17 Eib32 Eib28 HPV valve management enabled, or transcritical operation mode enabled Selecting the type of algorithm to apply to the calculation of the pressure setpoint P100% upper pressure limit Pmax pressure for defining the upper proportional zone Pcritic optimal pressure calculated at the passage temperature between the intermediate zone and transcritical zone T12 temperature limit between the transcritical zone and intermediate zone T23 temperature limit between the intermediate zone and subcritical zone Tmin temperature for defining the lower proportional zone T100% temperature for defining the complete opening zone of the valve Subcooling delta for optimized regulation Coefficient for determining the customized line Proportional gain for the proportional + integral regulation of the HPV valve Integral time for the proportional + integral regulation of the HPV valve Proportional gain for the proportional + integral regulation of the HPV valve with heat recovery Integral time for the proportional + integral regulation of the HPV valve with heat recovery Enabling the regulation of the gas cooler in the subcritical zone Min. opening of the HPV valve with the unit OFF Min. opening of the HPV valve with the unit ON Opening of the HPV valve at start-up during prepositioning Pre-positioning duration Enabling of the filter action on the HPV valve setpoint Number of samples Enabling of different management of the HPV valve during heat recovery activation Setpoint regulation of the HPV valve during heat recovery Time scale for the setpoint reset procedure after heat recovery Pressure scale for the setpoint reset procedure after heat recovery HPV valve safety position Offset to be applied to the external temperature in the event of gas cooler temperature probe error HPV valve safety procedure enabling Receiver high pressure threshold Maximum allowed receiver pressure Maximum offset to add to the HPV setpoint when the receiver pressure exceeds the high pressure threshold Receiver low pressure threshold Minimum allowed receiver pressure Maximum offset to subtract from the HPV setpoint when the receiver pressure goes below the low pressure threshold Enable HPV valve closure when all compressors on line 1 are off Delay HPV valve closure when all compressors on line 1 are off Enable warning function when the gas cooler pressure is too far from the setpoint for the set time Difference between the gas cooler pressure and the setpoint which generates the warning Delay time before generating the warning Maximum opening of the HPV valve Maximum variation per second allowed for the HPV valve output Minimum HPV valve regulation setpoint Enable low temp. control (lower proportional zone) 6.7.2 Summary of inputs, outputs and RPRV valve parameters The following is a summary table of the inputs/outputs used and the parameters with indications of the related configuration screens. For details, refer to Chapter 6 and Appendix A.1. Summary of inputs/outputs and RPRV valve parameters Analog inputs Digital inputs Analog outputs Digital outputs Parameters Settings Mask Bab66, Eia01 Baadf, Eia05 Bad15, Eia07 --- Description RPRV receiver pressure probe RPRV valve alarm RPRV valve output --- Eib18 Regulation Eib22 Enable RPRV valve management Regulation setpoint for the CO2 receiver pressure Proportional gain for the proportional + integral regulation of the RPRV valve Integral time for the proportional + integral regulation of the RPRV valve Minimum opening of the RPRV valve with the unit OFF Minimum opening of the RPRV valve with the unit ON Opening of the RPRV valve at start-up during pre-positioning Pre-positioning duration Maximum opening of the RPRV valve Maximum variation per second allowed for the RPRV valve output HPV valve safety position Enable RPRV valve closure when all compressors on line 1 are off RPRV valve closure delay when all compressors on line 1 are off Receiver high pressure threshold alarm Receiver high pressure differential alarm Receiver high pressure alarm delay Receiver high pressure alarm reset type Enable compressor shutoff with receiver high pressure alarm Eib19 Eib20 Eib21 Safeties Eib23 Eib24 Eib25 Tab. 6.d pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 42 ENG 6.8 Energy saving 6.8.2 Floating suction set point pRack PR300T can activate energy saving functions by adjusting the suction and condensing pressure set points. The suction and condensing pressure set points can be applied with two different offsets, one for the closing period and one for the winter period, activated by: • Digital input • Time band • Supervisor For the suction line, the floating set point is managed by the supervisor. The suction pressure set point set by the user is changed by the supervisor in range between a settable minimum and maximum. The operation is illustrated in the following figure: Floating setpoint Max Real variation In addition, the suction pressure set point can be modified from analogue input, applying a linearly variable offset based on the value read by a probe. As well as set point compensation from digital input, scheduler, supervisor or analogue input, two further energy saving functions are available, floating suction and condensing pressure set point. The functions can be enabled and the related parameters set in main menu branch C.a.d/C.b.d and D.a.d/D.b.d. Max variation Min 6.8.1 Set point compensation Sampling time Compensation from digital input, scheduler or supervisor is similar for suction and condensing pressure set points, consequently the following description applies to both. Two different offsets can be defined, which apply to: • Closing periods, defined by the scheduler, activation of a digital input or supervisor • Winter period, defined by the scheduler The two offsets add to the set point defined by the user when the corresponding condition is active. time Fig. 6.ah The set point is calculated by the supervisor and acquired by the pRack PR300T controller at set intervals, the maximum variation allowed for the set point in each sampling period can also be set; if the value acquired differs from the previous value by more than the maximum variation allowed, the variation is limited to the maximum value. If the supervisor is disconnected, after 10 minutes (fixed) the pRack PR300T controller starts decreasing the set point with variations equal to the maximum variation allowed each sampling period, until reaching the minimum set point allowed with floating suction pressure. Example 1: closing offset 0.3 barg, winter offset 0.2 barg, suction pressure compensation from scheduler and from digital input activated. When the digital input is activated, for example with a day/ night function, 0.3 barg is added to the operating set point, and when the winter period is in progress a further 0.2 barg is added. The operation can be schematised in the following figure: Note: if set point compensation from scheduler, digital input or supervisor is also active, the offset is added to the minimum and maximum limits for the floating set point. Digital Input ex.: day/night 6.8.3 Floating condensing set point For the condenser line, the floating set point is based on the outside temperature. The floating condensing pressure set point is achieved by adding a constant programmable value to the outside temperature and limiting the resulting value between a settable minimum and maximum, as shown in the figure: Summer/Winter Setpoint User setpoint +0,5 barg Floating setpoint Max time Fig. 6.af offset Note: the same digital input is used for set point compensation on each line, so if suction and condensing pressure set point compensation is activated by digital input, both compensation functions are active at the same time. Min If compensation from analogue input is enabled, a offset that is linearly variable to the value read by a dedicated probe can be applied to the suction pressure set point, as shown in the figure. external temperature time Fig. 6.ai Note: if set point compensation from scheduler, digital input or supervisor is also active, the offset is added to the minimum and maximum limits for the floating set point. Offset Offset max 6.9 Accessory functions pRack PR300T can manage several accessory functions. Of these, the economizer and liquid injection have already been described in paragraph 6.3 on compressor operation, while the others are described below. Offset min Probe value Lower value Upper value Fig. 6.ag Compensation from analogue input applies to setpoint: • suction • gas cooler • HPV minimum. These compensations can be enabled separately. 43 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG 6.10 Oil management Gestione olio comune da livello minimo pRack pR300T allows some additional functionalities for oil management, per individual compressor or per line: • Individual compressor: oil cooling, oil injection. • Line: common oil receiver The functionalities can be enabled and the relative parameters can be set from main menu branch E.a.a/E.a.b. NOT ACTIVE MIN ACTIVE 6.10.1 Individual compressor oil management OPEN Oil cooler An oil cooler can be managed for the first 6 compressors in line 1, in order to keep the oil temperature under constant control. For each compressor, based on the value read by the oil temperature probe, an oil cooler digital output can be activated with a settable threshold and differential, as shown in the figure. CLOSE Fig. 6.al If two levels are present, activation of the solenoid valve occurs when the maximum level is activated and remains activated in intermittent mode, with settable opening and closing times, for the entire time in which the minimum level is not active. If the minimum level signal is activated, the valve remains deactivated until the maximum level is reactivated again, as shown in the figure: Oil cooler Minimum oil level active Minimum oil level not active Maximum oil level active Oil temperature Differential Setpoint Maximum oil level not active Fig. 6.aj Common oil solenoid ACTIVE For each compressor, two alarms can also be managed for high or low oil temperature, setting the threshold, differential and delay. Common oil solenoid NOT ACTIVE Fig. 6.am Oil injection An oil injection valve can be managed for each of the first 6 compressors in each line as shown schematically for three compressors in Fig. 6.ah. Valve activation is performed when the corresponding oil level digital input is active. The valve is opened in intermittent mode with settable opening and closing times, for a total time that is also settable. Once exceeded, if the digital input is still active a low oil alarm is generated. When the oil level digital input is not active, the valve is activated with opening and closing times which can be set at a different value, in order to allow the passage of a certain quantity of oil. Gestione olio comune da livello minimo e massimo ACTIVE MAX NOT ACTIVE NOT ACTIVE MIN ACTIVE 6.10.2 Oil management per line A solenoid valve can be managed which connects the oil separator to the receiver based on the digital input reading of the oil level, which can be only minimum level or minimum and maximum level. Separator, receiver and valve are illustrated schematically in Fig. 5.a. If no oil level input is present, the solenoid valve can still be activated by connecting its operation to the status of the compressors. If only the minimum level is present, activation of the solenoid valve occurs intermittently for the entire time in which the minimum level is not active. The opening and closing times of the valve during activation can be set by a parameter. If the minimum level signal deactivates again, the valve remains deactivated for at least a minimum set closure time, as shown in the figure: OPEN OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE CLOSE Fig. 6.an If no oil level input is present, activation of the solenoid valve occurs intermittently for the entire time in which at least one compressor is active. The opening and closing times of the valve during activation can be set by a parameter. In any case, if the pressure difference between the oil receiver and suction is less than a settable threshold for at least a settable time, the solenoid can be forced in intermittent mode with settable times. It is also possible to set different delay times, to be applied during normal operation, or when the pressure difference exceeds the threshold, in order to ensure pressurization of the receiver. Minimum off time oil solenoid It is also possible to configure a Oil Receiver Pressure probe in "Inputs/ Outputs" menu: Inputs/Outputs Æ Status ÆAnalo Inputs Æ Mask Bab63 and a digital output called Oil Reserve" following the same path: Inputs/Outputs Æ Status Æ Digital Outputs Æ Mask Bac71 for controlling the solenoid valve between separator and oil receiver looking at this oil receiver pressure. Minimum oil level active Minimum oil level not active Once that this probe is enabled, it is possible to set a Differential Threshold between this probe pressure value and the suction pressure value in the "Other functions" menu: Other functions Æ Oil Æ Settings Æ Mask Eaab14 If the pressure difference between the oil receiver and suction is less than this threshold the solenoid can be forced to open. It is also possible to set a delay to be applied when the pressure difference exceeds the threshold, the valve will be closed as soon as the pressures difference has been restored. Common oil solenoid ACTIVE Common oil solenoid NOT ACTIVE Fig. 6.ak pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 44 ENG Summary of inputs/outputs and oil receiver level parameters 6.10.3 Summary of inputs, outputs and oil parameters The following are summary tables of the inputs/outputs used and the parameters with indications of the related configuration screens. For details, refer to Appendix A.1. Mask Bab63 Analog inputs Bab65 Summary of inputs/outputs and oil cooling parameters Mask Bab41, Eaaa05 Bab42, Eaaa06 Bab43, Eaaa07 Analog inputs Bab44, Eaaa08 Bab45, Eaaa09 Bab46, Eaaa10 Digital inputs --Analog outputs --Eaaa16 Eaaa19 Eaaa22 Digital outputs Eaaa25 Eaaa28 Eaaa31 Eaab15 Eaab08 Parameters Eaab16 Eaab20 Digital inputs Analog outputs Description Oil temperature probe compressor 1 line 1 Oil temperature probe compressor 2 line 1 Oil temperature probe compressor 3 line 1 Oil temperature probe compressor 4 line 1 Oil temperature probe compressor 5 line 1 Oil temperature probe compressor 6 line 1 ----Oil cooling compressor 1 line 1 Oil cooling compressor 2 line 1 Oil cooling compressor 3 line 1 Oil cooling compressor 4 line 1 Oil cooling compressor 5 line 1 Oil cooling compressor 6 line 1 Enable oil cooling compressors (line 1) Oil cooling functioning only when compressor functioning Oil temperature setpoint (line 1) Oil temperature differential (line 1) Fan startup time in case of oil probe error (line 1) Fan shutdown time in case of oil probe error (line 1) Oil cooler high temperature alarm threshold (line 1) Oil cooler high temperature alarm differential (line 1) Oil cooler high temperature alarm delay (line 1) Oil cooler low temperature alarm threshold (line 1) Oil cooler low temperat. alarm differential (line 1) Oil cooler low temperature alarm delay (line 1) Digital outputs Eaab12 Parameters Eaab13 Eaab15 Tab. 6.g Tab. 6.e 6.11 Subcooling Summary of inputs/outputs and oil injection parameters Analog inputs Digital inputs Analog outputs Digital outputs Mask Bab62 Bab66 Eaaa57 Eaaa58 Eaaa59 Eaaa60 Eaaa61 Eaaa62 Eaba17 Eaba18 Eaba19 Eaba20 Eaba21 Eaba22 --Eaaa40 Eaaa41 Eaaa42 Eaaa43 Eaaa44 Eaaa45 Eaba40 Eaba41 Eaba42 Eaba43 Eaba44 Eaba45 Eaab10 Eaab11 Parameters Eabb10 Eabb11 ----Bac71 Baceo Description Oil separator differential pressure probe line 1 Oil separator differential pressure probe line 2 ----Oil separator line 1 Oil separator line 2 Type of oil level separator control: with minimum level only, with minimum and maximum level and with compressor status (line 1) Minimum separator valve closing time (line 1) Minimum oil level detection delay (line 1) Valve opening time during oil level reset (line 1) Valve closing time during oil level reset (line 1) Valve opening time with correct oil level (line 1) Valve closing time with correct oil level (line 1) Oil receiver differential pressure threshold (line 1) Oil receiver differential pressure (line 1) Oil receiver differential pressure delay (line 1) pRack PR300T can control subcooling in two different ways: • with the condensing temperature and the liquid temperature • with the liquid temperature only Description Oil differential pressure probe 1 line 1 Oil differential pressure probe 1 line 2 Oil level compressor 1 line 1 Oil level compressor 2 line 1 Oil level compressor 3 line 1 Oil level compressor 4 line 1 Oil level compressor 5 line 1 Oil level compressor 6 line 1 Oil level compressor 1 line 2 Oil level compressor 2 line 2 Oil level compressor 3 line 2 Oil level compressor 4 line 2 Oil level compressor 5 line 2 Oil level compressor 6 line 2 --Oil level valve compressor 1 line 1 Oil level valve compressor 2 line 1 Oil level valve compressor 3 line 1 Oil level valve compressor 4 line 1 Oil level valve compressor 5 line 1 Oil level valve compressor 6 line 1 Oil level valve compressor 1 line 2 Oil level valve compressor 2 line 2 Oil level valve compressor 3 line 2 Oil level valve compressor 4 line 2 Oil level valve compressor 5 line 2 Oil level valve compressor 6 line 2 Enable oil level management (line 1) Number of compressor alarms associated with the oil level (line 1) Oil level valve opening time (line 1) Oil level valve closing time (line 1) Delay for oil level valve pulsing at startup (line 1) Maximum pulsing time for the oil level valve (line 1) Enable oil level management (line 2) Number of compressor alarms associated to the oil level (line 2) Oil level valve opening time (line 2) Oil level valve closing time (line 2) Delay for oil level valve pulsing at startup (line 2) Maximum pulsing time for the oil level valve (line 2) In the first case, subcooling is calculated as the difference between the condensing temperature (obtained by converting the condensing pressure) and the liquid temperature measured after the exchanger. The corresponding output is activated below a set threshold, with fixed differential. Digital output 1°C/°F Threshold Tcond. - Tliq. Fig. 6.ao In the second case, the output is active for liquid temperature values greater than a threshold, with fixed differential. Digital output 1°C/°F Threshold Tliq. Fig. 6.ap The subcooling function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main menu branch E.b.a/E.b.b. Tab. 6.f Note: the subcooling function is active when at least one compressor is on. 45 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG 6.12 Heat recovery THR1I T F FHW T THR1O THR2I 3WHRI FHW T THR2O 3WHR2 T Tdisch T F 3WGC T HR1 Tdisch HR2 TGC T T TING GC HR2 TGC by passed T PGC HPV P ExV GAS cooler Fig. 6.aq pRack pR300T manages up to two heat recovery functions at the same time. The related parameters can be set from the main menu, branch E.e.a.b.01. If the HPV valve set point calculated based on the Gas Cooler temperature exceeds the minimum set point modified by the heat recovery function, the controller will use the calculated set point. Activation and control of each heat recovery function will reflect the percentage of heat demand calculated based on one of the following: • digital input • temperature probe • external analogue signal Request (%) In the last two cases, a digital input can still be used to enable the function. Min. request activation 100% Once active, heat recovery control can act on the HPV valve set point and on the effective Gas Cooler set point, in both simultaneous mode (acting on both at the same time) and in sequential mode, based on thresholds (first acting on the HPV and then the Gas Cooler, when exceeding a certain heat demand threshold): • action on HPV set point (in barg/psig) • action on GC set point °C/°F) Status (0-1) 1 Heat recovery status 0 Pressure (barg) 85.0 barg Max HPV set point (heat recovery ON) When acting on the HPV valve set point, the heat recovery function modifies the “Minimum HPV valve control set point” parameter (screen Eib28), whose default value is 40.0 barg and used as a lower limit for calculating the dynamic pressure set point for controlling the high pressure valve. 75.0 barg Min HPV set point (heat recovery ON) 40.0 barg Min HPV set point (heat recovery OFF) Increasing this minimum set point from its default value (40.0 barg) to a new minimum set point (e.g. 75.0 barg) causes the system to operate in transcritical conditions, even when the Gas Cooler outlet temperature is between Tmin and T23 (see the control parameters, screen Eib05); in this zone, defined as subcritical, the HPV set point would be calculated based on subcooling. Time (*) Different activation's delays are not considered in this graph Min. set-point HPV Fig. 6.ar This minimum set point can be increased further (screen Eeab28) in proportion to the heat recovery demand, up to a settable maximum limit value (e.g. 85.0 barg). pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 Heat recovery request 0% When acting on the on the Gas Cooler set point, the Gas Cooler fan temperature set point can be increased gradually to the maximum limit. This limit is equal to the maximum allowable set point (screen Dab06) when operating in simultaneous mode, or the value set on screen Eeab29 in sequential mode. In simultaneous mode, the increase will start at the same time as the action on the HPV valve set point, while in sequential mode the increase will start after having exceeded a settable heat demand percentage limit threshold (Eeab29). 46 ENG Stages pRack pR300T can manage up to 5 stage functions, with either direct or reverse operation. In both cases a setpoint and differential can be set and the operation of the related output is illustrated in the figure for both cases: If the floating condensing function is active (branch D.a.d), this can be disabled when heat recovery is active (Eeab04), however if it is enabled while heat recovery is active, the Gas Cooler set point increase can be added directly to the outside temperature. • CFloating condensing without heat recovery: SP=Tout+ΔT (screen Dad06) • Floating condensing during heat recovery (acting on GC): SP=Tout+OffsetGC; where OffsetGC> ΔT • As the last step of the heat recovery function, the Gas Cooler can be bypassed when the following conditions are true: • bypass is enabled (screen Eeab) • the heat demand percentage exceeds a settable limit value (e.g. 90%) • the bypassed gas temperature cooler is lower than a certain settable limit value (e.g. 20°C) Direct stage Diff. Diff. Regulation variable Setpoint Reverse stage When these conditions are true, the bypass valve will start modulating, with its set point being calculated based on the bypassed Gas Cooler temperature, until the Gas Cooler is completely bypassed when the temperature allows. Diff. When heat recovery is deactivated, the HPV valve set point gradually returns to the calculated value, over a settable time. The same is also true for the condenser control set point. Diff. Regulation variable Setpoint Fig. 6.as If an enabling value is set, the output connected to the stage is active if the enabling is also active. For each stage, a high alarm and low alarm threshold can be enabled and they are absolute. For each alarm, the activation delay and priority can be set. See Chapter 8 for details on the alarms. An example of using the generic stage functions may be the activation of the fans on the room units based on the temperature. 6.13 Generic functions pRack pR300T allows the use of free inputs/outputs and some internal variables for generic functions. Attention: generic functions are available on the pRack pR300T boards with pLAN address from 1 to 4, or on all boards that manage a suction or condensing line, however only the parameters related to the functions managed by boards 1 and 2 are sent to the supervisor system. Modulation pRack pR300T can manage up to 2 modulation functions, with either direct or reverse operation. In both cases a setpoint and differential can be set and the operation of the related output is illustrated in the figure for the direct mode, where the cut-off function is also enabled: The generic functions available for each board are: • 5 stages • 2 modulations • 2 alarms • 1 scheduler Each function can be enabled/disabled by digital input or user interface. Direct modulation MAX The functionalities can be enabled and the relative parameters can be set from main menu branch E.f. MIN (Cut-off Value) To be able to use the free inputs they must be configured as generic probes from A to E (analog inputs) and generic inputs from F to J (digital inputs), so a maximum of 5 analog and 5 digital inputs can be used. After having configured the generic probes, the variables associated with them can be used as regulation variables and the digital inputs as enabling variables. Besides the probes and generic inputs, internal variables in the pRack pR300T software can be used, which depend upon the configuration of the system. Some examples, for analog variables, are: • Suction pressure • Gas cooler pressure • Saturated suction temperature • Gas cooler temperature • Suction temperature • Discharge temperature • % of compressors active • % of fans active • Superheating • Subcooling • Liquid temperature • % requested compressors • % requested fans Setpoint Hyster. Cutoff differential Differential Regulation variable Differential Fig. 6.at If an enabling value is set, the output connected to the stage is active if the enabling is also active. For each modulation, a high alarm and low alarm threshold can be enabled and they are absolute. For each alarm, the activation delay and priority can be set. See Chapter 8 for details on the alarms. For modulation, a minimum and maximum value can also be set for the output and the cut-off function can be enabled, which operates as shown in the previous figure. Alarms pRack pR300T can manage up to 2 alarm functions, for which a digital variable to be monitored, activation delay, priority and any description can be set. A digital output can be associated to each general alarm function for the activation of external devices when the alarm is triggered. One example of use of the generic alarm functions is the detection of gas leaks. Scheduler pRack pR300T can manage a generic scheduler which activates a digital output in certain time bands. Up to 4 daily time bands can be set for each day of the week. Operation of the generic scheduler can also be linked to the common scheduler and the output activated based on: • summer/winter • up to 5 closing periods • up to 10 special days See Paragraph 6.7.2 in the pRack PR300T manual code +0300011EN for details on the time bands. for digital variables: • High suction pressure alarm • Low suction pressure alarm • High gas cooler pressure alarm • Low gas cooler pressure alarm • Sign of life • Prevent active A unit of measure and description can be associated to each generic function. The following shows the operation of 4 types of generic functions. 47 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Forcing the medium temperature line Forcing the medium temperature line can be useful for cascading system configuration and, once enabled, can force the startup at minimum power of at least one compressor in the medium temperature L1 line if at least one compressor in the low temperature L2 line is on. This means that before turning on the low temperature line, the DSS forces at least one of the compressors in the medium temperature L1 line to turn on at minimum power. The low temperature L2 line thus has greater priority in relation to the request coming from the regulation for the medium temperature L1 line. 6.13.1 ChillBooster pRack PR300T can control the Carel ChillBooster, device used for evaporative cooling of the air that flows through the condenser. ChillBooster can be enabled and the related parameters set in main menu branch E.g. ChillBooster is activated when two conditions exist: • the outside temperature exceeds a set threshold • the fan control request is at the maximum for at least a settable number of minutes The maximum request time starts counting again whenever the request decreases, therefore the request must remain at the maximum for at least the set time. Activation ends when the request falls below a set threshold. Turning off the low temperature line Turning off the low temperature line is forced by the DSS if a serious alarm occurs which turns off all of the alarms in the medium temperature line or, in general, if the medium temperature line is OFF. pRack PR300T can manage an alarm digital input from ChillBooster, the effect of which is to deactivate the device. Enable pump-down on medium temperature line During normal compressor rack operation, when at least one compressor on the low temperature line is running, the medium temperature compressor control will enable pump-down. If there is demand, the minimum capacity step will be guaranteed, only if the medium temperature line suction pressure is below a set threshold. As the number of operating hours of ChillBooster is critical as regards formation of scale on the condenser, pRack PR300T can manage the operating hour threshold, which should be set to 200 hours. Hygiene procedure To avoid water stagnation in the pipes, a hygiene procedure can be enabled that activates ChillBooster every day for a set time, if the outside temperature is greater than a threshold. Note: in the event of failure of the pLAN network, the DSS is disabled Note: if the outside temperature probe is not configured or is configured but is not working, ChillBooster operates based solely on the control request, and the hygiene procedure can still be activated. The only difference between probe not configured and probe not working concerns the ChillBooster operating without temperature probe alarm, which is only generated when the probe is configured but not working. 6.15 EEVS: Electronic Expansion Valve Synchronization The new software for managing transcritical systems features the possibility to manage the 2 stepper valves for high pressure and flash gas control directly from the pRack controller. The built-in driver on PRK30TD*** controllers or the external driver (EVD) is controlled via fieldbus. Direct communication between controller and driver is used to synchronise compressor rack operation and electronic expansion valve control. Communication is managed inside the controller (on PRK30TD*** codes) or via RS485 serial for external drivers. One single interface (pRack) can thus be used to monitor / set the main parameters for the EVDEVO and view them via the supervisor (Modbus communication). The FIELDBUS DRIVER offers the possibility to use 4 additional analogue inputs (S1, S2, S3 and S4) directly from pRack. Where: S1 Probe 1 (pressure) or external 4 to 20 mA signal S2 Probe 2 (temperature) or external 0 to 10 V signal (*) S3 Probe 3 (pressure) S4 Probe 4 (temperature) ChillBooster as the first stage in high pressure prevention ChillBooster can be used to prevent high condensing pressure. The parameters relating to this function can be set in branch G.b.a/G.b.b in the main menu, after having enabled the ChillBooster function. For details on the prevent function see paragraph 8.3.3. Operation of ChillBooster as the first stage in high pressure prevention is Similar to the heat recovery function described in paragraph 6.6.3. The function must be enabled and an offset must be set in relation to the prevent. 6.14 Double line synchronization (DSS) pRack pR300T can manage some synchronization functions between the two lines: • Inhibition of contemporary compressor starts • Forcing the medium temperature line if the low temperature line is activated • Turning off the low temperature line if the medium temperature line is in a serious alarm condition The three DSS functions can be enabled independently 6.15.1 HPV and RPRV valve connection Attention: in the pRack pR300T software, it is assumed that the medium temperature line is line L1 while the low temperature line is L2. ID18 ID17 GND U10 Y6 U9 GND Y5 J20 DC17 The HPV and RPRV valves can be connected: • directly, controlling the valves using a 0-10 V output on pRack pR300T DSS can be enabled and the relative parameters can be set from main menu branch E.f. Inhibition of the contemporary starts The inhibition of contemporary starts of the compressor can be useful for all system configurations with two separate lines and in cascading system configurations. The function that prevents contemporary starts can be enabled and a delay time can be set for compressor starts belonging to different lines. pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 Vout Vout Vout Vout 24 Vac/Vdc 0V Vout Vout Fig. 6.au (*): If one of the two valves is controlled by the driver Carel, while the other, just is controlled by a signal 0...10V, remember to disable the last one from the driver with mask Ib99 during Wizard operation or mask Eic01 if Wizard is completed. 48 ENG • via an EVD EVO driver configured as 0 to 10 V positioner to control Carel 6.15.5 Parallel compressor stepper valves (pressure less than 45 barg) or third party valves (fig. 2.f ) pRack pR300T can enable a line of compressors in parallel to the medium temperature suction line upstream of the RPRV valve. EVD + pRack pR300T connections: HR1 35 VA TRADRFE240 (dedicated) 2 4 AUX COMP NOA 3 COMA G G0 VBAT G G0 VBAT 2 AT 1 HR2 230 Vac 24 Vac EVD evolution Ultracap Technology DI1 DI2 S4 S1 VREF S2 S3 GND HPV FLASH GND Tx/Rx RECEIVER E2V Fig. 6.av • via a EVD EVO external driver (fig. 2.g) or integrated in PRK30TD*** E2V models, in both cases using fieldbus serial. EVD + pRack pR300T connections: via filedbus E2V 24 Vac 230 Vac E2V 35 VA TRADRFE240 (dedicated) shield 2 AT 2 4 NOA 3 COMA G G0 VBAT VBAT G G0 Fig. 6.ax 1 The line of compressors positioned in parallel is managed by an additional card based on the configuration rules and related restrictions as illustrated in the paragraphs on control 6.3 and compressors 6.4. This makes it possible to manage an inverter-controlled parallel compressor. The parallel compressor operates based on a pressure set point that must be set to the same value as the receiver pressure set point, the actions performed by the parallel compressor are synchronised with the opening of the RPRV valve. Ultracap Technology S4 DI1 DI2 S3 S1 VREF J26 FBus2 S2 GND 3 GND Tx/Rx The main variables that manage activation and control of the parallel compressor are: • Gas Cooler outlet temperature • RPRV valve opening percentage • Receiver pressure set point Fig. 6.aw 6.15.2 Unit of measure pRack PR300T can manage two units of measure, the international system and Imperial. The parallel compressor is activated when the following conditions occur: • Gas Cooler outlet temperature above a settable threshold • RPRV valve opening percentage above a settable threshold Note: the temperature and pressure units of measure can be changed from °C, barg to °F, psig only during start-up; mixed configurations are not allowed, for example °F and barg. At the same time as the parallel compressor is activated, the receiver pressure set point will be increased by a settable offset in a settable time. 6.15.3 Sign of life pRack PR300T can manage a digital output acting as a sign of life, activated when pRack PR300T is powered up. This output remains active while the controller is working correctly and highlights any hardware faults. The Signal can be configured in main menu branch B.a.c. T Gas Cooler > Settable TH RPRV Opening > Settable TH AUX Comp Activation 6.15.4 Liquid non-return pRack PR300T can manage a digital output with the meaning of liquid non-return. This normally active output is deactivated when all the compressors are off and no compressor can be started due to alarms or time settings, despite the control request, or when the unit is OFF. As soon as at least one compressor is enabled to start, the output is deactivated, allowing management of a liquid non-return valve. The function can be configured in main menu branch C.a.g/C.b.g. Receiver Setpoint Increase Fig. 6.ay 49 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Increasing the receiver set point results in the flash gas valve (RPRV) closing. The parallel compressor is not affected by a decrease in the opening of the RPRV valve, however remains active until parallel compressor control reaches the set point (depending on how the controller is configured) For example, if the weekly scheduler requires activation of a function, yet a closing period is in progress, and requires deactivation of the same function, then the function is deactivated. The following functions allow the setting of time bands: • Split-condenser: the function is active only based on the operating seasons, and consequently special days, closing periods and daily time bands are ignored. • Silencer: the function is only active with daily time bands, there is no link to operating seasons, special days and closing periods • Heat recovery: the function is active with daily time bands, special days and closing periods, no link to operating seasons. The link to the general scheduler can be disabled, considering the time bands only. • Set point compensation: active with operating seasons, special days, closing periods and daily time bands (two different offsets). • Generic functions: the generic scheduling function is active with the operating seasons, special days, closing periods and daily time bands. Operation of the generic functions can be separated from the generic scheduler, considering the daily time bands only. For details on the functions that use time bands, see the corresponding paragraphs. T Gas Cooler > Settable TH RPRV Opening > Settable TH AUX Comp Activation Receiver Setpoint Increase Fig. 6.az If, on the other hand, the Gas Cooler outlet temperature falls below the activation threshold, the card that manages the parallel compressor no longer receives the enabling signal and thus switches off the parallel compressor: T Gas Cooler > Settable TH 6.17 Managing the default values RPRV Opening > Settable TH pRack PR300T can manage two different sets of default values: • user defaults • Carel defaults The two functions can be activated in main menu branch I.d. AUX Comp Activation Receiver Setpoint Increase Important: after having reset the default values, the pRack PR300T board need to be switched off and on again. Fig. 6.ba 6.17.1 Saving and resetting the user default values 6.16 Settings pRack PR300T can save the exact configuration set by the user inside the instrument, allowing it to be recalled at any time. 6.16.1 Clock All the set values are saved, therefore loading user defaults restores the exact same conditions that the pRack PR300T controller was in when the data were saved. pRack PR300T features an internal clock with backup battery that keeps the time and date for all related functions (see Chapter 2 for details relating to the hardware). Note: only one user default configuration can be saved, therefore when the data is next saved, this overwrites the previous data. The date on pRack PR300T can be set as follows: • day, month, year (dd/mm/yy) • month, day, year (mm/dd/yy) • year, month, day (yy/mm/dd) The current date and time can be set, the day of the week corresponding to set date displayed, plus changeover to daylight saving can be enabled by setting the changeover date and the deviation. Important: • the Carel default reset procedure totally deletes the pRack PR300T permanent memory, and consequently is an irreversible operation; • the user values cannot be reset after updating the software on the pRack PR300T (see Chapter 10). The related parameters can be set during start-up or in main menu branch F.a. Note: the date and time are managed on pRack boards with addresses 1 and 2; on power-up and whenever the pLAN network is reconnected, the software on pRack synchronises the settings on board 2, sending the date and time set on board 1. 6.17.2 Resetting the Carel default values The Carel default values are shown in the Parameters table. The values pre-set by Carel can be installed at any time, restoring the pRack PR300T default settings, and requiring the startup procedure described in Chapter 4 to be repeated. If the clock card is not operating, an alarm is generated and the functions relating to the time bands described in the following paragraph are not available. Important: the Carel default reset procedure totally deletes the pRack PR300T permanent memory, and consequently is an irreversible operation; nonetheless, the user settings can still be restored if these have already been saved. Given that pRack PR300T, following the installation of the Carel default values requires the startup procedure to be repeated, select the first pre-configuration and then restore the user defaults. 6.16.2 Time bands pRack PR300T allows the operating seasons, the closing periods and weekends to only be set once, and consequently these are common to all the system functions. As well as these settings, each function can be associated with a weekly scheduler, setting up to 4 different daily activation bands for each day of the week. For each time band, the start and end time can be set and settings made can be copied to the others days of the week. Note: to complete a new configuration procedure (reffer to Chapter 4), first restore the Carel default values. The priority of the schedulers, from lowest to highest, is: • weekly scheduler • closing periods • special days pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 50 ENG 7. TABLE MASKS 7.1 Parameter table "Mask index": indicates the unique address of each screen and therefore the path for reaching the parameters in that screen. For example, to reach the parameters related to the suction pressure probe with mask index Bab01, proceed as follows: Main Menù B.In./Out.Îa.StatusÎb.Analog.in. Below is the table of parameters that can be displayed on the terminal. The values indicated with '---' are not significant or are not set, while the values indicated with '...' may vary according to the configuration and the possible options are visible on the user terminal. A line of '...' means that there are a series of parameters similar to the previous ones. Note: not all of the screens and parameters in the table are always visible/settable, the visible/settable screens and parameters depend upon the configuration and access level. Mask index Display description Description Default UoM Values ----Suction Gas cool. Superheat Suc.Temp. Disch.Temp. Hour and minutes Date Suction pressure or temperature Gas cooler pressure or temperature Superheating Suction temperature Discharge temperature --------------- … … … … … … … Unit status (with unit OFF) --- --- Number compressors on (with unit ON) Compressor activation percentage (with unit ON) Number of fans on (with unit ON) Fan activation percentage (with unit ON) Hour and minutes Date Suction pressure or temperature (line 1) Gas cooler pressure or temperature (line 1) Superheating (line 1) Suction temperature (line 1) Discharge temperature (line 1) Unit status (with unit OFF) Number compressors on (with unit ON, line 1) Compressor activation percentage (with unit ON, line 1) Number of fans on (with unit ON, line 1) Fan activation percentage (with unit ON, line 1) Suction pressure or temperature (line 2) Condensing pressure or temperature (line 2) Superheating (line 2) Suction temperature (line 2) Discharge temperature (line 2) Unit status (with unit OFF) Number compressors on (with unit ON, line 2) Compressor activation percentage (with unit ON, line 2) Number of fans on (with unit ON, line 2) Fan activation percentage (with unit ON, line 2) Hour and minutes Date Suction pressure or temperature (line 1) Gas cooler pressure or temperature (line 1) Suction pressure or temperature (line 2) Condensing pressure or temperature (line 2) Suction temperature (line 1) Superheating (line 1) Suction temperature (line 2) Superheating (line 2) Discharge temperature (line 1) Discharge temperature (line 2) Unit status (with unit OFF) Compressor activation percentage (with unit ON, line 1) Compressor activation percentage (with unit ON, line 2) Fan activation percentage (with unit ON, line 1) Fan activation percentage (with unit ON, line 2) Hour and minutes Date ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- --% --% … … … … … … … ----% --% … … … … … ----% --% … … … … … … … … … … … … --% % % % … … … … …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) Unit OFF due to Alarms Unit OFF due to black out Unit OFF from supervisor Unit OFF from default Unit OFF from digital input Unit OFF from keypad Unit OFF from manual mode 0…12 0…100 0…16 0…100 … … …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) See individual line mask values 0…12 0…100 0…16 0…100 …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) See individual line mask values 0…12 0…100 0…16 0…100 … … …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) See individual line mask values 0…100 0…100 0 to 100 0…100 … … Suction pressure or temperature (line 1) --- … …(**) Suction pressure or temperature (line 2) Gas cooler pressure or temperature Suction temperature (line 1) Discharge temperature (line 1) Superheating (line 1) Suction temperature (line 2) Discharge temperature (line 2) Superheating (line 2) Unit status (with unit OFF) Compressor activation percentage (with unit ON, line 1) Compressor activation percentage (with unit ON, line 2) Fan activation percentage (with unit ON, line 1) ------------------------- … … … … … … … … --% % % …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) See individual line mask values 0…100 0…100 0…100 Tab. 7.a Main Mask Main mask for individual suction line and individual condensing line --(display only) ------------L1-Suction L1-Gas cool. L1-Superheat L1-Suc.Temp. L1-Disch.Temp. --Main mask for --double suction --line and double --condensing line, masks separated --L2-Suction per each line L2-Condens. (display only) L2-Superheat L2-Suc.Temp. L2-Disch.Temp. --------------L1-Suction L1-Gas cool. L2-Suction L2-Condens. Main mask for L1-Suc.Temp. double suction L1-Superheat line and double condensing line, L2-Suc.Temp. one mask for both L2-Superheat lines (display only) L1-Disch.Temp. L2-Disch.Temp. --------------Suction: L1 L2 Gas cooler Main mask for L1-Suc.Temp. double suction L1-Disch.Temp. line and individual condensing line, L1-Superheat L2-Suc.Temp. (display only) L2-Disch.Temp. L2-Superheat --------- 51 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Mask index Display description Description Default UoM Values Suction pressure (line 1) Suction saturated temperature (line 1) Actual setpoint for pressure regulation (with compensations applied, line 1) Regulation differential for pressure regulation (line 1) Suction pressure (line 1) Suction saturated temperature (line 1) Actual setpoint for temperature regulation (with compensations applied, line 1) Regulation differential for temperature regulation (line 1) Power delivered/Power requested per suction line (line 1) ------------------- … … … … … … … … % Reg. Status Regulation status (according to the type of regulation set, line 1) --- --- Reg. Type Compressor regulation type (line 1) --- --- Setpoint C01, C02, …C12 Actual suction setpoint (with compensations applied, line 1) Time remaining for next compressor startup (line 1) Power delivered from compressor 1 of line 1 (a "!" to the right of the value means that some form of compressor power forcing is active, e.g., safety times, alarms, startup procedure) … Power delivered from compressor 12 (line 1) Suction temperature (line 1) Superheating (line 1) Discharge temperature compressor 1 (line 1) … Discharge temperature compressor 6 (line 1) Oil temperature compressor 1 (line 1) … Oil temperature compressor 6 (line 1) Digital output number associated and liquid injection/economizer (*) status compressor 1 (line 1) … Digital output number associated and liquid injection/economizer (*) status compressor 6 (line 1) Discharge temperature Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 1) Capacity reduction Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 1) in progress Oil sump temperature Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 1) ----- … s … (**) … (**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) 0/0 …100/100 Stop Increase Functioning Decrease Timings Stand-by Alarms Proportional Band Dead Zone …(**) 0…32000 --- % 0…100 … --------… ----… --- … % … … … … … … … … … 0…100 …(**) …(**) …(**) … …(**) … (**) … … (**) --- … 0…29 … … … --- … 0…29 --- … --- … A. Unit status Pressure Sat.Temp. ActualSet Differen. Pressure Sat.Temp. Aa02 (display only) ActualSet Differen. Act/Req. Aa01 (display only) Aa03 (display only) Aa04 (display only) C01 … C12 Temperature Aa05 (display only) Superheat. Disch. 1 Aa11 (display only) … Disch. 6 Oil Temp 1 Aa12 (display only) … Oil Temp 6 In.liq.1: DO Aa13 (display only) … In.liq.6: DO ON/OFF Oil status Oil dilution status Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 1) Status Operational status Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 1) --- --- Safety time count Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 1) Status Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 1) Status Digital Scroll TM valve (line 1) Capacity requested Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 1) Actual capacity Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 1) Condensing pressure (line 1) Condensing saturated temperature (line 1) Actual setpoint for pressure regulation (with compensations applied, line 1) Regulation differential for pressure regulation (line 1) Condensing pressure (line 1) Condensing saturated temperature (line 1) Actual setpoint for temperature regulation (with compensations applied, line 1) Regulation differential for temperature regulation (line 1) Power delivered/Power requested per condensing line (line 1) ----------------------------- s ----% % … … … … … … … … % Reg. Status Regulation status (according to the type of regulation set, line 1) --- --- Reg. Type Gas cooler regulation type (line 1) --- --- Setpoint Actual setpoint gas cooler (line 1) Power delivered from fan 1 of line 1 (a "!" to the right of the value means that some form of power forcing is active) … Power delivered from fan 8 of line 1 (a "!" to the right of the value means that some form of power forcing is active) Power delivered from fan 9 of line 1 (a "!" to the right of the value means that some form of power forcing is active) … Power delivered from fan 16 of line 1 (a "!" to the right of the value means that some form of power forcing is active) Discharge temperature (line 1) External temperature (line 1) Suction pressure (line 2) Suction saturated temperature (line 2) Actual setpoint for pressure regulation (with compensations applied, line 2) Regulation differential for pressure regulation (line 2) Suction pressure (line 2) Suction saturated temperature (line 2) Actual setpoint for temperature regulation (with compensations applied, line 2) Regulation differential for temperature regulation (line 2) Power delivered/Power requested per suction line (line 2) --- … …(**) no / yes …(**) Ok Diluted Off Off for time Start On for time On Manual Mode Alarm In pump down 0…999 ON/OFF ON/OFF 0…100 0…100 … (**) … (**) … (**) … (**) … (**) … (**) … (**) … (**) 0/0 …100/100 Stop Functioning Increase Timings Decrease Alarms Stand-by Proportional Band Dead Zone …(**) --- % 0…100 … … … --- % 0…100 --- % 0…100 … … … --- % 0…100 ----------------------- … … … … … … … … … … % Reg. Status Regulation status (according to the type of regulation set, line 2) --- --- Reg. Type Compressor regulation type (line 2) --- --- Setpoint C01, C02, …C12 Actual suction setpoint (with compensations applied, line 2) Time remaining for next compressor startup (line 2) Power delivered from compressor 1 from line 2 (a "!" to the right of the value means that some form of compressor power forcing is active, e.g., safety times, alarms, startup procedure) … Power delivered from compressor 12 (line 2) ----- … s …(**) …(**) … (**) … (**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) 0/0 …100/100 Stop, Functioning Increase Timings Decrease, Alarms Stand-by Proportional Band Dead Zone …(**) 0…32000 --- % 0…100 … --- … % … 0…100 Discharge temperature Cap.Reduction Aa15 (display only) Oil sump T. Aa16 (display only) Count Compr. Valve Cap.Req. ActualCapac. Pressure Sat.Temp. Aa20 (display only) ActualSet Differen Pressure Sat.Temp. Aa21 (display only) ActualSet Differen. Act/Req Aa22 (display only) F1 Aa23 (display only) … F8 F9 Aa24 (display only) … F16 Discharge temperature Aa25 (display only) External temperature Pressure Sat.Temp. Aa31 (display only) ActualSet Differen. Pressure Sat.Temp. Aa32 (display only) ActualSet Differen. Act/Req. Aa33 (display only) Aa34 (display only) ON/OFF C01 … C12 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 52 ENG Mask index Display description Temperature Superheat. Disch. 1 Aa41 (display only) … Disch. 6 Discharge temperature Description Suction temperature (line 2) Superheating (line 2) Discharge temperature compressor 1 (line 2) … Discharge temperature compressor 6 (line 2) Digital output number associated and liquid injection status compressor 1 (line 2) … Digital output number associated and liquid injection status compressor 6 (line 2) Discharge temperature Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 2) Aa35 (display only) In.liq.1: DO Aa43 (display only) … In.liq.6: DO Aa45 (display only) Default ------… --- UoM … … … … … --- … 0…29 … … … --- … 0…29 --- … --- … ON/OFF Cap.Reduction Capacity reduction Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 2) in progress Oil sump T. Oil sump temperature Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 2) Oil status Oil dilution status Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 2) Status Operational status Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 2) --- --- ----------------------- s ----% % … … … … … … --- … …(**) Differen. Act/Req. Safety time count Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 2) Status Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 2) Status Digital Scroll TM valve (line 2) Capacity requested Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 2) Actual capacity Digital Scroll TM compressor (line 2) Condensing pressure (line 2) Condensing saturated temperature (line 2) Actual setpoint for pressure regulation (with compensations applied, line 2) Regulation differential for pressure regulation (line 2) Condensing pressure (line 2) Condensing saturated temperature (line 2) Actual setpoint for temperature regulation (with compensations applied, line 2) Regulation differential for temperature regulation (line 2) Power delivered/Power requested per condensing line (line 2) ----- … % Reg. Status Regulation status (according to the type of regulation set, line 2) --- --- Reg. Type Condenser regulation Type (line 2) --- --- Setpoint Actual condensing setpoint (with compensations applied, line 2) Power delivered from fan 1 of line 2 (a "!" to the right of the value means that some form of power forcing is active) … Power delivered from fan 8 of line 2 (a "!" to the right of the value means that some form of power forcing is active) Power delivered from fan 9 of line 2 (a "!" to the right of the value means that some form of power forcing is active) … Power delivered from fan 16 of line 2 (a "!" to the right of the value means that some form of power forcing is active) Discharge temperature (line 2) External temperature (line 2) Driver pressure probe S1 (driver connected in Fieldbus) Driver pressure probe S2 (driver connected in Fieldbus) Driver pressure probe S3 (driver connected in Fieldbus) Driver pressure probe S4 (driver connected in Fieldbus) Driver digital input 1 (driver connected in Fieldbus) Driver digital input 2 (driver connected in Fieldbus) Parallel compressor status Gas Cooler Outlet temperature RPRV valve opening RPRV Setpoint Percentage of heat reclaim used to activate different actions. It can refer to HR1 or HR2 or HR1+HR2 Detailed description of current running action Run actions presence Current minimum HPV setpoint Current temperature GC offset (to increase GC setpoint) HR configured as prevent and active Percentage of heat reclaim used to activate different actions. It can refer to HR1 or HR2 or HR1+HR2 Status of bypass allowed Current GC out temperature Current GC baypassed temperature Current regulation temperature: Tgc out if bypass off, Tgc byp if bypass on Opening percentage of bypass valve Value of the regulation variable for the generic function in stage 1 Status of the enabling variable for the generic function in stage 1 Regulation setpoint for the generic function in stage 1 Regulation differential for the generic function in stage 1 Regulation mode for the generic function in stage 1 (direct or reverse) Status of the generic function in stage 1 … Value of the regulation variable for the generic function in stage 5 Status of the enabling variable for the generic function in stage 5 Regulation setpoint for the generic function in stage 5 Regulation differential for the generic function in stage 5 Regulation mode for the generic function in stage 5 (direct or reverse) Status of the generic function in stage 5 Value of the regulation variable for generic modulating function 1 Status of the enabling variable for generic modulating function 1 Regulation setpoint for generic modulating function 1 Regulation differential for generic modulating function 1 Regulation mode for generic modulating function 1 (direct or reverse) Status of generic modulating function 1 --- … …(**) 0/0 …100/100 Stop Functioning Increase Timings Decrease Alarms Stand-by Proportional Band Dead Zone …(**) --- % 0…100 … … … --- % 0…100 Aa52 (display only) F1 Aa53 (display only) … F8 F9 Aa54 (display only) … F16 Discharge temperature External temperature S1 probe S2 probe Aa65 S3 probe S4 probe Digital input staus 1 Aa66 Digital input staus 2 Parallel compressor status: GC out.temp.: Aa77 (display only) RPRV opening: RPRV setp.: Aa55 (display only) HR Total Request: Status: Run actions: Min HPV set.: Offset GC: HR prevent: HR Total Request: Bypass Allowed GC out. Temp: GC byp. Temp: GC reg. temp: Gas Cooler byp: Reg.var. Enable Setpoint Aaan (display only) Differen. Mode Status … … Reg.var. Enable Setpoint Aaar (display only) Differen. Mode Status Reg.variab. Enable Setpoint Aaas (display only) Differen. Mode Status Aaa77 (display only) ON/OFF …(**) NO YES …(**) Ok Diluted Off Start On Alarm 0…999 ON/OFF ON/OFF 0…100 0…100 … (**) … (**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) Aa46 (display only) Count Compr. Valve Cap.Req. ActualCapac. Pressure Sat.Temp. Aa50 (display only) ActualSet Differen. Pressure Sat.Temp. Aa51 (display only) ActualSet Aaa76 (display only) Values …(**) …(**) …(**) … …(**) 53 --- % 0…100 … … … --- % 0…100 ----------------On/Off … … bar °C bar °C ----- …(**) …(**) -290…2900 -870…2900 -290…2900 -870…2900 Open/Close Open/Close On/Off, Not active Off for time On for time Manual Mode In pump down °C/°F % barg % Si/No 40 barg °C/°F On/Off % ------------… ------------------------- °C/°F °C/°F °C/°F % … --… … ----… … --… … ----… --… … --% …(**) Active/Not active …(**) …(**) D, R Active/Not active … …(**) Active/Not active …(**) …(**) D, R Active/Not active …(**) Active/Not active …(**) …(**) D, R 0.0…100.0 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Mask index Display description Reg.variab. Enable Setpoint Aaat (display only) Differen. Mode Status Reg.variab. Enable Aaau (display only) Type Delay Status Reg.variab. Enable Aaav (display only) Type Delay Status Day F1: --:-- -> --:-Aaaw (display only) … F4: --:-- -> --:-- Aaax (display only) Aaay (display only) Aaaz (display only) Aaba (display only) Aabb (display only) Aabc (display only) Status HR 1 Request: HR 1 Status: Water temp.: Valve: Pump: Pump An. Out: HR 2 Request: HR 2 Status: Water temp.: Valve: Pump: Pump An. Out: Status Ext.Temp. Thresh.est.t. F.Time100% Status Ext.Temp. Thresh.est.t. F.Time100% Cond.Temp. LiquidTemp Subcool Status Cond.Temp. LiquidTemp Subcool Status UserSetp. Ab01 (display only) ActualSetp. Diff. UserSetp. ActualSetp. Ab02 (display only) Dead zone Incr.Diff. Decr.Diff. UserSetp. Ab03 (display only) ActualSetp. Diff. UserSetp. ActualSetp. Ab04 (display only) Dead zone Incr.Diff. Decr.Diff. UserSetp. Ab05 (display only) ActualSetp. Diff. UserSetp. ActualSetp. Ab06 (display only) Dead zone Incr.Diff. Decr.Diff. UserSetp. Ab07 (display only) ActualSetp. Diff. Description Value of the regulation variable for generic modulating function 2 Status of the enabling variable for generic modulating function 2 Regulation setpoint for generic modulating function 2 Regulation differential for generic modulating function 2 Regulation mode for generic modulating function 2 (direct or reverse) Status of generic modulating function 2 Value of the regulation variable for generic alarm function 1 Status of the enabling variable for generic alarm function 1 Type of alarm for generic alarm function 1 Regulation differential for generic alarm function 1 Status of generic alarm function 1 Value of the regulation variable for generic alarm function 2 Status of the enabling variable for generic alarm function 2 Type of alarm for generic alarm function 2 Regulation differential for generic alarm function 2 Status of generic alarm function 2 Day of the week Enabling and definition of time band 1: start hour and minute, end hour and minute for the generic scheduling function … Enabling and definition of time band 4: start hour and minute, end hour and minute for the generic scheduling function Status of the general scheduling function Percentage of first heat reclaim request Status of first heat reclaim request Water temperature with HR1 regulated by temperature Status of first heat reclaim valve Status of first heat reclaim pump Running percentage of first heat reclaim pump Percentage of second heat reclaim request Status of second heat reclaim request Water temperature with HR2 regulated by temperature Status of second heat reclaim valve Status of second heat reclaim pump Running Percentage of second heat reclaim pump Status of the ChillBooster device (line 1) External temperature (line 1) Threshold for activating the ChillBooster device (line 1) Number of minutes passed with fan at 100/number of minutes allowed (line 1) Status of the ChillBooster device (line 2) External temperature (line 2) Threshold for activating the ChillBooster device (line 2) Number of minutes passed with fan at 100/number of minutes allowed (line 2) Condensing saturated temperature (line 1) Liquid temperature (line 1) Subcooling (line 1) Status of the subcooling function (line 1) Condensing saturated temperature (line 2) Liquid temperature (line 2) Subcooling (line 2) Status of the subcooling function (line 2) Setpoint set by the user for suction regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (line 1) Actual setpoint for suction regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (with compensations applied, line 1) Suction regulation under pressure differential, proportional regulation (line 1) Setpoint set by the user for suction regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (line 1) Actual setpoint for suction regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (with compensations applied, line 1) Dead zone for suction regulation under pressure (line 1) Increase differential for suction regulation under pressure, regulation in dead zone (line 1) Decrease differential for suction regulation under pressure, regulation in dead zone (line 1) Setpoint set by the user for suction regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (line 2) Actual setpoint for suction regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (with compensations applied, line 2) Suction regulation under pressure differential, proportional regulation (line 2) Setpoint set by the user for suction regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (line 2) Actual setpoint for suction regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (with compensations applied, line 2) Dead zone for suction regulation under pressure (line 2) Increase differential for suction regulation under pressure, regulation in dead zone (line 2) Decrease differential for suction regulation under pressure, regulation in dead zone (line 2) Setpoint set by the user for gas cooler regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (line 1) Actual setpoint for gas cooler regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (with compensations applied, line 1) Gas cooler regulation under pressure differential, proportional regulation (line 1) Setpoint set by the user for gas cooler regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (line 1) Actual setpoint for gas cooler regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (with compensations applied, line 1) Dead zone for gas cooler regulation under pressure (line 1) Increase differential for gas cooler regulation under pressure, regulation in dead zone (line 1) Decrease differential for gas cooler regulation under pressure, regulation in dead zone (line 1) Setpoint set by the user for condensing regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (line 2) Actual setpoint for condensing regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (with compensations applied, line 2) Condensing regulation under pressure differential, proportional regulation (line 2) pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 54 Default ----------------------------------- UoM … --… … --% ------s --------s ----- Values …(**) Active/Not active …(**) …(**) D, R 0.0…100.0 Active/Not active Active/Not active Normal / Serious 0…9999 Active/Not active Active/Not active Active/Not active Normal / Serious 0…9999 Active/Not active Monday, ..., Sunday --- … … … … … --- … … --- --% Active/Not active On/Off °C/°F Open/Closed On/Off % % On/Off °C/°F Open/Closed On/Off --------------------------------- % --… … min --… … min … … … --… … … --- ON/OFF …(**) …(**) 0…999/0…999 ON/OFF …(**) …(**) 0…999/0…999 …(**) …(**) …(**) Open / Closed …(**) …(**) …(**) Open / Closed --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) ENG Mask index Display description UserSetp. ActualSetp. Ab08 (display only) Dead zone Incr.Diff. Decr.Diff. Ab12 Ab13 Ab14 Ab15 Setpoint Setpoint Setpoint Setpoint Status Ac01 --L1: L2: ----Enable unit On/Off from digital input From supervisor Due to black out Delay unit startup after blackout Enable unit On/Off from digital input From supervisor Due to black out Unit startup delay after blackout Ac02 Ac03 Ac04 Ac06 Ac07 Description Setpoint set by the user for condensing regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (line 2) Actual setpoint for condensing regulation under pressure, proportional regulation (with compensations applied, line 2) Dead zone for condensing regulation under pressure (line 1) Increase differential for condensing regulation under pressure, regulation in dead zone (line 2) Decrease differential for condensing regulation under pressure, regulation in dead zone (line 2) Setpoint without compensation (suction line 1) Setpoint without compensation (gas cooler line 1) Setpoint without compensation (suction line 2) Setpoint without compensation (condens. line 2) Default UoM Values --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) --- … …(**) 26.0 barg 12.0 °C 12.0 barg 12.0 barg … … … … …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) --- Wait... UnitOn Off due to alarm Off due to blackout Off from BMS --- OFF/ ON Unit status (display only) Off from keypad On-off from keypad (line 1) On-off from keypad (line 1) On-off from keypad (line 2) OFF Off from keypad OFF OFF Enable unit On/Off from digital input (line 1) Enable on-off from supervisor (line 1) Enable on-off due to black out (line 1) Unit status (display only) --- ...(See Ac01 above) ----- OFF/ ON OFF/ ON NO --- NO/YES NO NO ----- NO/YES NO/YES Delay unit startup after blackout (line 1) 0 s 0…999 Enable unit On/Off from digital input (line 2) NO --- NO/YES Enable on-off from supervisor (line 2) Enable on-off due to black out (line 2) NO NO ----- NO/YES NO/YES Unit startup delay after blackout (line 2) 0 s 0…999 Off by default Off from DIN Off from keypad Manual Funct. work Prevent from HP Tab. 7.b Mask index Display description Description Default UoM Values B.Inp./Out. (The I/Os depend on the configuration selected, the following are only examples. See Appendix A.1 for the complete list and position of available I/Os.) DI Alarm 1 compressor 1 DI position(line 1) 03 --Status (display only) Status Alarm 1 compressor 1 DI (line 1) ----Baa02 Logic Logic alarm 1 compressor 1 DI (line 1) NC --Function (display only) Alarm 1 compressor 1 function status (line 1) ----… … … … … DI Heat recovery from digital input DI position (line 1) ----Status Heat recovery from digital input DI status (line 1) ----Baacf Logic Heat recovery from digital input DI logic (line 1) NC --Function Heat recovery from digital input function status (line 1) ----… … … … … --Suction pressure probe position (Line 1) B1 ----Suction pressure probe type (Line 1) 4...20mA ----- (display only) Suction pressure value (line 1) --… Bab01 Max limit Suction pressure maximum value (line 1) 44.8 barg … Min limit Suction pressure minimum value (line 1) 0.0 barg … Calibrat. Suction pressure probe calibration (Line 1) 0.0 barg … … … … … … Line relay DO Compressor 1 line relay DO position and status (On/Off ) display (line 1) … --Part winding DO/Star relay Compressor 1 part winding or star DO position and status (On/Off ) display … --DO (*) (line 1) Bac02 ---/Delta relay DO (*) Compressor 1 delta DO position and status (On/Off ) display (line 1) … --Logic Logic for compressor 1 power supply DO (line 1) NO --DO Compressor 1 unloader 1 DO position (line 1) … --Status (display only) Status for compressor 1 unloader 1 DO (line 1) ----Bac03 Logic Logic for compressor 1 unloader 1 DO (line 1) NO --Function (display only) Compressor 1 unloader 1 function status (line 1) ----… … … … … DO Line relay DO position and On/Off Status Parallel compressor consent … … Bacef Logic: Logic Parallel compressor consent DO: NA … … … … … … AO Compressor modulating device AO position (line 1) 0 --Bad01 Status (display only) Modulating device output value (line 1) 0 % … … … … … Suction L1 Suction line 1 in manual mode DIS --Suction L2 Suction line 2 in manual mode DIS --Bb01 Condenser L1 Condenser line 1 in manual mode DIS --Condenser L2 Condenser line 2 in manual mode DIS --Timeout Manual mode duration after last key pressed 10 min Compressor 1 Bba02 Manual stages request for compressor 1 (line 1) OFF --Force to … … … … … Compressor 12 Bba16 Manual stages request for compressor 12 (line 1) OFF --Force to Oil Cool. pump 1 Manual operation status for oil cooling pump 1 (line 1) OFF --Force to Bba17 Oil cool pump 2 Manual operation status for oil cooling pump 2 (line 1) OFF --Force to Oil cool fan 1 Bba18 Manual operation status for oil cooling fan 1 (line 1) OFF --Force to Compressor 1 Bba20 Manual stages request for compressor 1 (line 2) OFF --Force to … … … … … Compressor 12 Bba34 Manual stages request for compressor 12 (line 2) OFF --Force to 55 ---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****) Closed / Open NC/NO Not active/Active … ---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****) Closed / Open NC/NO Not active/Active … ---, B1…B10 (****) ----, 0-1V - 0-10V- 4...20mA- 0-5V …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) … ---, 01…29 (****) ---, 01…29 (****) ---, 01…29 (****) NC/NO ---, 01…29 (****) Closed / Open NC/NO Not active/Active … ---, 01…29 (****) NC/NA … ---, 01…06 (****) 0.0…100.0 … DIS/ AB DIS/ AB DIS/ AB DIS/ AB 0…500 OFF/ ON 2 STAGES (*) … OFF/ ON 2 STAGES (*) 3 STAGES (*) 4 STAGES (*) 3 STAGES (*) 4 STAGES (*) OFF/ ON OFF/ ON OFF/ ON OFF/ ON 2 STAGES (*) … OFF/ ON 2 STAGES (*) 3 STAGES (*) 4 STAGES (*) 3 STAGES (*) 4 STAGES (*) pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Mask index Bba35 Bba37 Bba38 … Bba53 Bba54 Bba55 Bba57 … Bba72 Bba73 Bba74 Bbb05 Bbb06 Bbb07 Bbb08 Bbb09 Bbb10 Bbb11 Bbb12 Bc01 Bc02 Bca10 … Bca26 Bcb10 … Bcb12 Display description Oil Cool. pump 1 Force to Oil Cool. pump 2 Force to Oil cool fan 1 Force to Fan 1 Force to … Fan 16 Force to Heat rec.pump Force to ChillBooster Force to Fan 1 Force to … Fan 16 Force to Heat rec.pump Force to ChillBooster Force to Compressor 1 Force to Oil cool. pump Force to Compressor 1 Force to Oil cool. pump Force to Fan 1 Force to Heat recovery pump Force to Fan 1 Force to Heat recovery pump Force to Test DO Timeout Test AO Timeout DO1 --… D29 --AO1 … AO6 Description Default UoM Values Manual operation status for oil cooling pump 1 (line 2) OFF --- OFF/ ON Manual operation status for oil cooling pump 2 (line 2) OFF --- OFF/ ON OFF/ ON Manual operation status for oil cooling fan (line 2) OFF --- Manual operation status for fan 1 (line 1) OFF --- OFF/ ON … … … … Manual operation status for fan 16 (line 1) OFF --- OFF/ ON Manual operation status for heat recovery pump (line 1) OFF --- OFF/ ON Manual operation status for ChillBooster (line 1) OFF --- OFF/ ON Manual operation status for fan 1 (line 2) OFF --- OFF/ ON … … … … Manual operation status for fan 16 (line 2) OFF --- OFF/ ON Manual operation status for heat recovery pump (line 2) OFF --- OFF/ ON Manual operation status for ChillBooster (line 2) OFF --- OFF/ ON Manual request for continuous capacity for compressor 1 (line 1) 0.0 % 0.0…100.0 Manual request for oil cooling pump (line 1) 0.0 % 0.0…100.0 Manual request for continuous capacity for compressor 1 (line 2) 0.0 % 0.0…100.0 Manual request for oil cooling pump (line 2) 0.0 % 0.0…100.0 Manual request for continuous capacity for fan 1 (line 1) 0.0 % 0.0…100.0 Manual request for heat recovery pump (line 1) 0.0 % 0.0…100.0 Manual request for continuous capacity for fan 1 (line 2) 0.0 % 0.0…100.0 Manual request for heat recovery pump (line 2) 0.0 % 0.0…100.0 Enable DO test mode Duration of test mode after last key pressed Enable AO test mode Duration of test mode after last key pressed DO 1 test logic DO 1 test value … DO 29 test logic DO 29 test value AO 1 test value … AO 6 test value NO 10 NO 10 NO OFF … NO OFF 0.0 … 0.0 --min --min ----… ------… --- NO/YES 0…500 NO/YES 0…500 NO/ NC OFF/ ON … NO/ NC OFF/ ON 0.0…100.0 … 0.0…100.0 Tab. 7.c Mask index Display description Description Default UoM Values C.Compressors The I/Os depend on the configuration selected, the following are only examples. See Appendix A.1 for the complete list and position of the I/Os.) DI Alarm 1 compressor 1 DI position (line 1) 03 --Status (display only) Status Alarm 1 compressor 1 DI (line 1) ----Caa01 Logic Logic alarm 1 compressor 1 DI (line 1) NC --Function (display only) Alarm 1 compressor 1 function status (line 1) ----… … … … … Line relay DO Compressor 1 line DO position and status (On/Off ) display (line 1) … --Part winding DO/Star relay Compressor 1 part winding/star DO position and status (On/Off ) display … --DO (*) (line 1) Caa08 ---/Delta relay DO (*) Compressor 1 DO position and status (On/Off ) display (line 1) … --Logic Logic for compressor 1 power supply DO (line 1) NC --DO Compressor 1 unloader 1 DO position (line 1) … --Status (display only) Status for compressor 1 unloader 1 DO (line 1) ----Caa09 Logic Logic for compressor 1 unloader 1 DO (line 1) NC --Function (display only) Compressor 1 unloader 1 function status (line 1) ----… … … … … AO Compressor modulating device AO position (line 1) 0 --Caa14 Status (display only) Modulating device output value (line 1) 0 % … … … … … --Suction pressure probe position (Line 1) B1 --- Cab01 Cab02 Cab03 Cab04/Cab6 (**) Cab05/Cab7 (**) ---, 01…29 (****) --- Suction pressure probe type (Line 1) 4...20 mA --- --- (display only) Max limit Min limit Calibrat. … Regulation Suction pressure value (line 1) Suction pressure maximum value (line 1) Suction pressure minimum value (line 1) Suction pressure probe calibration (Line 1) … Compressor control by temperature or pressure (line 1) --44.8 barg 0.0 barg 0.0 barg … PRESSURE … … … … … --- Reg. Type Compressor regulation type (line 1) DEAD ZONE --- Minimum Maximum Setpoint Compressor setpoint lower limit (line 1) Compressor setpoint upper limit (line 1) Compressor setpoint (line 1) … … … Reg. Type Proportional regulation type (line 1) --- PROPORTIONAL / PROP.+INT. Integral time Differential Integral time for proportional regulation (line 1) Differential for proportional regulation (line 1) 0.0 barg 40.0 barg 26.0 barg PROPORTIONAL 300 0.5 barg ---, 01…29 (****) NC/NO ---, 01…29 (****) Closed / Open NC/NO Not active/Active … ---, 01…06 (****) 0.0…100.0 … ---, B1…B10 (****) ---0-1 V 0-10 V 4...20 mA 0-5 V …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) … PRESSURE TEMPERATURE PROPORTIONAL BAND DEAD ZONE …(**) …(**) …(**) s … 0…999 …(**) Caaal … ---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****) Closed / Open NC/NO Not active/Active … ---, 01…29 (****) pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 56 ENG Mask index Display description NZ diff. Cab08/Cab10 (**) Activ.diff. Deact.diff. En.force off Cab09/Cab11 (**) Setp. force off Power to 100% min time Cab12 Power to 100% max time Cab13 Cac01 … Cac11 Cac13 Cac14 Cad01 Cad02 Cad03 Power reduction to 0% min time Power reduction to 0% max time Compressor 1 operating hours (Check in...) Compressor (Check in...) … Compressor 11 operating hours (Check in...) Compressor 12 (Check in...) Compressor threshold operating hours Compressor hours reset Enable suction setpoint compensation Winter offset Closing offset Enable setpoint compensation by scheduler Day Cad10 Cae01 Cae02 Cae03 Cae04 … Cae24 Cae25 Cae26 Cae27 Cae28 Cae29 Cae31 Cae40 Caf02 Caf03 Values …(**) …(**) …(**) NO/YES …(**) 15 s 0…9999 90 s 0…9999 30 s 0…9999 180 s 0…9999 Compressor 1 operating hours (line 1) --- h 0…999999 Compressor 1 remaining operating hours (line 1) Compressor 2 operating hours (line 1) Compressor 2 remaining operating hours (line 1) … … --… … h h h … 0…999999 0…999999 0…999999 … Compressor 11 operating hours (line 1) --- h 0…999999 Compressor 11 remaining operating hours (line 1) Compressor 12 operating hours (line 1) Compressor 12 remaining operating hours (line 1) … --… h h h 0…999999 0…999999 0…999999 88000 h 0…999999 N --- N/ Y Enable setpoint compensation (suction line 1) NO --- NO/YES 0.0 0.0 … … -999,9…999,9 -999,9…999,9 NO --- TB4: --:-- -> --:-- Offset applied for the Winter period Offset applied for closing period Enable scheduler setpoint compensation (suction line 1) Day of the week Enabling and definition of time band 1: start hour and minute, end hour and minute (suction line 1) … Enabling and definition of time band 4: start hour and minute, end hour and minute (suction line 1) Change Time band change action Cad04 Cad09 UoM … … … --… Reset compressor operating hours (line 1) … Cad08 Default 0.5 barg 0.7 barg 0.7 barg NO 0.0 barg Compressor maintenance threshold hours (line 1) TB1: --:-- -> --:-- Cad05 Description Dead zone regulation differential (line 1) Dead zone regulation differential for device activation (line 1) Dead zone regulation differential for device deactivation (line 1) Enable capacity immediate decreasing to 0 (line 1) Threshold for capacity decreasing to 0 (line 1) Minimum time to increase capacity request to 100%, dead zone regulation (suction line 1) Maximum time to increase capacity request to 100%, dead zone regulation (suction line 1) Minimum time to decrease capacity request to 0%, dead zone regulation (suction line 1) Maximum time to decrease capacity request to 0%, dead zone regulation (suction line 1) NO/YES MON, TUE, ...SUN --- … … … … … --- … … --- --- Copy to Copy settings to other days 0 --- Change set by DI Enable floating suction setpoint Maximum floating setpoint Minimum floating setpoint Max setpoint variation accepted Offline decreasingtime Number of alarms for each compressor Enable setpoint compensation by digital input (suct/cond line 1) NO --- --SAVE CHANGES LOAD PREVIOUS CLEAR ALL MONDAY...SUNDAY; MON-FRI; MON-SAT; SAT&SUN; ALL NO/YES Enable floating setpoint (suction line 1) NO --- NO/YES Max settable floating setpoint (line 1) Minimum settable floating setpoint (line 1) …(**) …(**) … … …(**) …(**) Maximum variation allowed for floating setpoint (suction line 1) …(**) Alarm 1 descr. … …(**) Reduction time when supervisor is offline for floating setpoint (suction line 1) 0 min 0…999 Number of alarms for each compressor (line 1) 1/4 (*) --- 0…4/7 (*) Selection of first compressor alarm description: Generic, Overload, High pressure, Low pressure, Oil (line 1) … --- Alarm 1 descr. (*) Selection of first compressor alarm description: Rotation, Oil warning (line 1) … --- Activ. delay Startup delay Reset Priority … High suction pressure/ temperature alarm Threshold Differen. Delay: Low suction pressure/ temperature alarm Threshold Differen. Delay Enable oil temp alarm mgmt. (*) Enable discharge temp alarm mgmt. (*) Low superheat alarm threshold Differen. Switch OFF comp. Reset Alarm delay Alarm setpoint Differential Switch off compressor with alarm Comp 1 off Reset Alarm delay Activation delay for alarm 1 during operation (line 1) Activation delay for alarm 1 at startup (line 1) Type of reset for compressor alarm 1 (line 1) Type of priority for compressor alarm 1 (line 1) … 0 0 AUT. SERIOUS … s s ----… :(Not available) (Not selected) ;(Selected) :(Not available) (Not selected) ;(Selected) 0…999 0…999 AUT./ MAN. NORMAL / SERIOUS … Type of high suction pressure/temperature alarm threshold ABSOLUTE --- ABSOLUTE/RELATIVE High suction pressure/temperature alarm threshold High suction pressure/temperature alarm differential High suction pressure/temperature alarm delay …(**) …(**) 120 … … s …(**) …(**) 0…999 Type of low suction pressure/temperature alarm ABSOLUTE --- ABSOLUTE/RELATIVE Low suction pressure/temperature alarm threshold Low suction pressure/temperature alarm differential Low suction pressure/temperature alarm delay …(**) …(**) 30 … … s …(**) …(**) 0…999 Enable Digital Scroll™ oil temperature alarm (line 1) NO --- NO/YES Enable Digital Scroll™ discharge temperature alarm (line 1) NO --- NO/YES Threshold for low superheat alarm (line 1) 3.0 K 0.0…99.9 Low superheat alarm differential (line 1) Enable compressor shutdown for low superheat alarm (line 1) Type of alarm reset for low superheat alarm (line 1) Low superheat alarm delay (line 1) Discharge temperature alarm threshold Discharge temperature alarm differential 1.0 NO MANUAL 30 … (**) … (**) K ----s … … 0.0…9.9 NO/YES MANUAL / AUTO 0…999 … (**) … (**) Enable shutdown of compressors with discharge temperature alarm DIS --- DIS/ EN Enable shutdown of compressor 1 for compressor warning inverter (line 1) Type of reset for compressor warning inverter (line 1) Delay for compressor warning inverter (line 1) NO Manual 0 Recriprocating 2/3 (*) EN ----s NO/YES Manual / AUTO 0…999 Reciprocating Scroll 1…6/12 (*) EN / DIS Compressor type Type of compressors (line 1) Number of compressors Cmp1,… Number of compressors (line 1) Enable compressors (line 1) 57 ------- pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Mask index Display description Description Default UoM Caf04 Refrigerant type Type of refrigerant (suction line 1) R744 --- Caf05 Min.time on Min.time off Minimum time to start same comp. Minimum compressor on time (line 1) Minimum compressor off time (line 1) 30 120 s s Minimum time between starts of same compressor (line 1) 360 s Caf06 Startup Type of compressor startup Direct --- Star time Star delay/line Star delta delay Partwinding delay Equalization Equal. time Star relay run time Delaty betwen star and line relay Delay between star and delta relay Partwinding delay Enable compressor equalization at startup Equalization duration 0 0 0 0 NO 0 ms ms ms ms --s Caf10 Device rotation type Type of rotation FIFO --- Caf11 Device sequence Unloader sequence in relation to compressor activation (C=compressor, P=unloader) CpppCppp --- Caf13 Caf14 Load up time Shutdown time Unloader delay Custom rotation on order Custom rotation off Delay between different compressor starts Delay between different compressor shutdowns Delay between stages Order of startup for compressor custom rotation Order of shutdown for compressor custom rotation 10 0 0 1 1 s s s ----- Caf15 Modulation device Compressor modulating device type (line 1) None --- Min frequency Max frequency Min.time on Min.time off Minimum time to start same comp. Minimum inverter frequency Maximum inverter frequency Minimum time compressor controlled by inverter on (line 1) Minimum time compressor controlled by inverter off (line 1) 30 60 30 60 Hz Hz s s Minimum time compressor controlled by inverter startup (line 1) 180 s Caf07 Caf08 Caf09 Caf12 Caf16 Caf17 Caf18 Caf19 … Caf90 Caf91 Caf92 Caf93 Caf95 Cag01 S1 Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1) … … S4 Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1) NO S1 Enable stages and stages for compressor group 1 (line 1) YES 100 --% … … S4 Enable stages and stages for compressor group 4 (line 1) C01 … C12 Min.time on Min.time off Minimum time to start same comp. Reactivate startup procedure after Minimum voltage Maximum voltage Nominal freq. Size group for compressor 1 (line 1) or presence of inverter (line 1) … Size group for compressor 6 (line 1) Minimum time on for Digital ScrollTM compressor (line 1) Minimum time off for Digital ScrollTM compressor (line 1) … NO --S1 … S1 60 180 … --kW --… --s s Minimum time between startups for Digital ScrollTM compressor (line 1) 360 s 0…999 480 min 0…9999 0.0 10.0 50 V V Hz 0.0…10.0 0.0…10.0 0…150 10.0 kW 0.0…500.0 90 s 0…600 Digital Scroll™ compressor valve control type (line 1) Optimized regulation --- Cycle time Oil dilution Discharge temp … Different sizes Different number of valves Cycle time (line 1) Enable Digital Scroll™ oil temperature alarm (line 1) Enable Digital Scroll™ discharge temperature alarm (line 1) … Enable compressors of different sizes (line 1) Enable compressor partialization (line 1) s ----… ------kW … ----kW Rising time Falling time Cag05 Cag06 0…999 13 Enable Enable … NO NO YES 10.0 … Digital comp. valve regulation Cag02 Cag04 0…999 Direct Part winding Star delta 0…9999 0…9999 0…9999 0…9999 NO/YES 0…999 -----FIFO LIFO TIME CUSTOM -------CCpppppp CpppCppp 0…999 0…999 0…999 1…16 1…16 None Inverter Digital scroll Stepless screw 0…150 0…150 0…999 0…999 Optimized regulation Variable cycle time Fixed cycle time 12…20 Disable/ Enable Disable/ Enable … NO/YES NO/YES NO/ YES 0.0...500.0 … --NO/ YES 0.0...500.0 NO/YES 100; 50/100; 50/75/100; 25/50/75/100; 33/66/100 … NO/ YES S1...S4 S1…S4/INV … S1…S4 0…999 0…999 Nominal power Cag03 Values R22/ R134a/ R404A/ R407C/ R410A/ R507A/ R290/ R600/ R600a/ R717/ R744/ R728/ R1270/ R417A/ R422D / R413A/ R422A/ R423A/ R407A/ R427A/ R245Fa/ R407F/ R32 0…999 0…999 Enable compressor modulat. in dead zone Enable suction press.backup probe Request in case of regulation probe fault Pumpdown Threshold Enable anti return of liquid Delay Time for reactivation of startup procedure for Digital ScrollTM compressor (line 1) Voltage corresponding to the minimum capacity of the inverter (line 1) Voltage corresponding to the maximum capacity of the inverter (line 1) Nominal frequency (frequency at nominal capacity) (line 1) Nominal capacity for compressor managed by inverter at nominal frequency (line 1) Time to pass from minimum to maximum capacity for modulating device (line 1) Time to pass from maximum to minimum capacity for modulating device (line 1) 30 s 0…600 Enable compressor 1 modulation inside dead zone (line 1) AB --- DIS/ EN Enable screens for the configuration of the suction pressure backup probe (line 1) NO --- NO/YES Compressor forcing value in case of suction probe fault (line 1) 50.0 % 0.0…100.0 Enable pumpdown function (line 1) Pumpdown end threshold (line 1) Enable liquid non return function (line 1) Delay liquid non return function (line 1) DIS 1.5 barg NO 0 --… --min DIS/ EN … (**) NO/YES 0…15 The following parameters refer to line 2, for details, see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 58 ENG Mask index Cba01 … Cbb01 … Cbc01 … Cbd01 … Cbe01 … Cbf02 … Cbg01 Display description DI Status (display only) Description Alarm 1 compressor 1 DI position (line 2) Status Alarm 1 compressor 1 DI (line 2) Default 03 --- UoM ----- Logic Logic alarm 1 compressor 1 DI (line 2) NC --- Function (display only) … Regulation Alarm 1 compressor 1 function status (line 2) … Compressor control by temperature or pressure (line 2) --… PRESSURE DEAD ZONE … --… --- Reg. Type Compressor regulation type (line 2) … Compressor 1 operating hours … Enable suction setpoint compensation … Number of alarms for each compressor … … Compressor type Type of compressors (line 2) Number of compressors … Minimum voltage Maximum voltage Nominal freq. Number of compressors (line 2) … Voltage corresponding to the minimum capacity of the inverter (line 2) Voltage corresponding to the maximum capacity of the inverter (line 2) Nominal frequency (frequency at nominal capacity) (line 2) Nominal capacity for compressor managed by inverter at nominal frequency 10.0 (line 2) … … Nominal power … … --… Values ---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****) Closed / Open NC NO Not active/Active … PRESSURE TEMPERATURE PROPORTIONAL BAND DEAD ZONE … Compressor 1 operating hours (line 2) --- --- 0…999999 … … … … NO/YES Enable setpoint compensation (suction line 2) NO --- … … … … Number of alarms for each compressor (line 2) 1 --- 0…4 … … RECRIPROCATING 2/3 (*) … 0.0 10.0 50 … --… Hz Hz Hz … RECIPROCATING SCROLL 1…12 … 0.0…10.0 0.0…10.0 0…150 Kw 0.0…500.0 … … --- Tab. 7.d Mask index Display description Description Default UoM Values C.Condensers The I/Os depend on the configuration selected, the following are only examples. See Appendix A.1 for the complete list and position of the I/Os. DI Fan 1 overload DI position (line 1) … --Status (display only) Fan 1 overload DI status (line 1) ----Daa01 Logic Fan 1 overload DI logic (line 1) NC --Function (display only) Fan 1 overload function status (line 1) ----… … … … … --Gas cooler backup probe position (line 1) B1 ----- Gas cooler backup probe type (line 1) 4...20 mA --- --- (display only) Max limit Min limit Calibration … DO Status (display only) Logic Function (display only) … AO Status (display only) … --30.0 barg 0.0 barg 0.0 barg … 03 --NC --… 0 0 … … … … … … --------… --% … Regulation Gas cooler backup pressure value Gas cooler backup maximum pressure value (line 1) Gas cooler backup pressure minimum value (line 1) Gas cooler backup pressure probe calibration (line 1) … Fan 1 DO position (line 1) Status of fan 1 DO (line 1) Logic of fan 1 DO (line 1) Fan 1 function status (line 1) … Inverter fan AO position (line 1) Inverter fan output value (line 1) … Condenser regulation by temperature or pressure (line 1) Note: with HPV valve management, only temperature regulation is enabled TEMPERATURE --- PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE Regulation type Condenser regulation Type (line 1) Condenser setpoint lower limit (line 1) Condenser setpoint upper limit (line 1) Condenser setpoint (line 1) PROPORT. BAND …(**) …(**) …(**) … … … PROPORTIONAL BAND DEAD ZONE …(**) …(**) …(**) Daa18 … Daa21 … Daa38 … Dab01 Minimum Maximum Dab03 Setpoint Fans work if at least one Dab04 compressor works Cut-off enable Cut-off request Dab05 Setpoint Diff. Hysteresis Reg. Type Dab6/ Dab8 (**) Integral time Dab7/ Dab9 (**) Differential DZ diff. Dab10/Dab11 (**) Activ.diff. Deact.diff. En.force off Dab12/Dab13 (**) Setp. force off Dab02 Power to 100% min time Dab14 Power to 100% max time Dab15 Dac Dad01 Dad02 Dad03 ---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****) Closed/Open NC/NO Not active/Active … ---, B1…B10 (****) ---0-1 V 0-10 V 4...20 mA 0-5 V …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) … ---, 01…29 (****) Closed / Open NC/NO Not active/Active … ---, 01…06 (****) 0.0…100.0 … Power reduction to 0% min time Power reduction to 0% max time '-Enable condensing setpoint compensation Winter offset Closing offset Enable setpoint compensation by scheduler --- Enable fan operation linked to compressor operation NO --- NO/YES Enable fan cut-off Cut-off value Setpoint cut-off Differential cut-off Hysteresis cut-off Proportional regulation type (condensing line 1) Integral time for proportional regulation (cond. line 1) Differential for proportional regulation (cond. line 1) Dead zone regulation differential (line 1) Dead zone regulation differential for device activation (line 1) Dead zone regulation differential for device deactivation (line 1) Enable capacity immediate decreasing to 0 (line 1) Threshold for capacity decreasing to 0 (line 1) Minimum time to increase capacity request to 100%, dead zone regulation (condensing line 1) Maximum time to increase capacity request to 100%, dead zone regulation (condensing line 1) Minimum time to decrease capacity request to 0%, dead zone regulation (condensing line 1) Maximum time to decrease capacity request to 0%, dead zone regulation (condensing line 1) Not available NO 0.0 …(**) …(**) …(**) PROPORT. 300 …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) NO …(**) --% … … … --s … … … … --… NO/YES 0.0…100.0 …(**) …(**) …(**) PROPORTIONAL / PROP.+INT. 0…999 …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) NO/YES …(**) 15 s 0…9999 90 s 0…9999 30 s 0…9999 180 s 0…9999 --- --- --- Enable setpoint compensation (condensing line 1) NO --- NO/YES Offset applied for the Winter period Offset applied for closing period Enable scheduler setpoint compensation (condensing line 1) 0.0 0.0 … … -999,9…999,9 -999,9…999,9 NO --- NO/YES 59 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Mask index Display description Description TB1: --:-- -> --:-- UoM Values … … TB4: --:-- -> --:-- Enabling and definition of time band 1: start hour and minute, end hour and --minute (condensing line 1) … … Enabling and definition of time band 4: start hour and minute, end hour and --minute (condensing line 1) Change Time band change action --- … Dad04 Dad05 Dad06 Dad07 Dae01 Dae02/ Dae06 Default … … … … Copy to Copy settings to other days --- --- --SAVE CHANGES LOAD PREVIOUS CLEAR ALL MONDAY...SUNDAY; MON-FRI; MON-SAT; SAT&SUN; ALL Enable floating gas cooler setpoint Offset for external temp. Controlled by: -Dig. input Change setpoint by digital input Gas cooler high pressure alarm Delay Gas cooler high pressure alarm Differen. Gas cooler low pressure alarm Delay Gas cooler low pressure alarm Differen. Common fan overload Delay Enable floating gas cooler setpoint (condensing line 1) NO --- NO/YES Setpoint variation for floating gas cooler setpoint (condensing line 1) 0.0 … -9,9…9.9 Enable floating gas cooler setpoint by digital input NO --- NO/YES NO/YES --- Enable setpoint compensation by digital input (suct/cond line 1) NO --- Type of gas cooler high pressure alarm threshold (line 1) ABSOLUTE --- ABSOLUTE/RELATIVE Gas cooler high pressure alarm delay (line 1) 60 s 0…999 Gas cooler high pressure alarm threshold (line 1) 24.0 barg … …(**) Gas cooler high pressure alarm differential (line 1) 1.0 barg … …(**) Type of gas cooler low pressure alarm threshold (line 1) ABSOLUTE --- ABSOLUTE/RELATIVE Gas cooler low pressure alarm delay (line 1) 30 s 0…999 Gas cooler low pressure alarm threshold (line 1) 7.0 barg … …(**) Gas cooler low pressure alarm differential (line 1) Enable common fan overload (line 1) Common fan alarm delay 1.0 barg YES 0 … --s …(**) NO/YES 0…500 Reset Common fan alarm reset type AUTOM. --- AUTOMATIC MANUAL Daf01 Daf02 Daf03 Number of fans Fan1, Fan2, ... Fan13, Fan14, ... Number of fans (line 1) Enable fan 1...12 (line 1) Enable fan 13...16 (line 1) 3 EN EN ------- Daf04 Refrigerant type Type of refrigerant (condensing line 1) R744 --- Daf05 Device rotation type Type of rotation devices (condensing line 1) FIFO --- Daf07, Daf08 Daf09, Daf10 Custom rotation on order Custom rotation off On order for devices for custom rotation (condensing line 1) Off order for devices for custom rotation (condensing line 1) 1 1 ----- Dag01 Speed modul. device Modulating condenser device type (line 1) NONE --- Dag02 Standby zone reg. Min out value Max out value Min. power ref. Max. power ref. Fan modulation even in dead zone (line 1) Minimum voltage for compressor inverter (line 1) Maximum voltage for compressor inverter (line 1) Minimum capacity of fan modulating device (line 1) Maximum capacity of fan modulating device (line 1) Time to pass from minimum to maximum capacity for fan modulating device (line 1) Time to pass from maximum to minimum capacity for fan modulating device (line 1) Number of fans under inverter (only for alarm enabling) Enable split condenser (line 1) NO 0.0 10.0 60 100 --V V % % 0…16 DIS/ EN DIS/ EN R22/ R134a/ R404A/ R407C/ R410A/ R507A/ R290/ R600/ R600a/ R717/ R744/ R728/ R1270/ R417A/ R422D / R413A/ R422A/ R423A/ R407A/ R427A/ R245Fa/ R407F/ R32 -----FIFO LIFO TEMPO CUSTOM 1…16 1…16 NONE INVERTER PHASE CUT-OFF CONTROL NO/YES 0.0…9.9 0.0…99.9 0…100 0…999 1200 s 0…32000 1200 s 0…32000 1 NO ----- 0…16 NO/YES Dae03 Dae04/ Dae07 Dae05 Rising time Dag03 Dag04 Dag05 Falling time Num. control. fans Split Condenser Controlled by: -Digital input -External temp -Scheduler Ext.Temp.Set. Ext.Temp.Diff. Split condenser controlled by digital input (line 1) --- --- NO/YES Split condenser controlled by external temperature (line 1) Split condenser controlled by scheduler (line 1) Split condenser setpoint by external temperature (line 1) Split condenser differential by external temperature (line 1) ----10.0 °C 2.5 °C ----… … Type Fans enabled with split condenser (line 1) CUSTOM --- NO/YES NO/YES -99,9…99.9 -99.9…99.9 CUSTOM ODD EVEN GREATER THAN LESS THAN --- Only when enabling is GREATER THAN or LESS THAN the number of fans to consider (line 1) 0 --- 0…16 Disable split condenser as first stage of HP pressure switch for Silencer Max output Controlled by: -Digital input -Scheduler Disable split condenser when high condensing pressure prevent occurs (line NO 1) --- NO/YES Duration of split condenser deactivation for high pressure prevent (line 1) Enable silencer (line 1) Maximum possible request when silencer is active (line 1) h --% 0…24 DISAB. / ENABLE 0.0…100.0 Dag06 Dag09 Dag10 0 DISAB. 75.0 % Silencer controlled by digital input (condensing line 1) NO --- NO/YES NO --- ----- NO/YES MON, ..., SUN --- … … … … … TB4: --:-- -> --:-- Silencer controlled by scheduler (condensing line 1) Day of the week Enabling and definition of time band 1: start hour and minute, end hour and minute (condensing line 1) … Enabling and definition of time band 4: start hour and minute, end hour and minute (condensing line 1) --- … … Change Time band change action --- --- Copy to Copy settings to other days 0 --- TB1: --:-- -> --:-… Dag12 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 60 --SAVE CHANGES LOAD PREVIOUS CLEAR ALL MONDAY...SUNDAY; MON-FRI; MON-SAT; SAT&SUN; ALL ENG Mask index Dag13 Display description Speed Up Speed up time Ext.Temp.Mgmt Ext.Temp.Set. Diff. Ext.Temp. Dag14 Dag15 Enable gas cooler press. backup probe Request in case of regulation probe fault Description Enable speed up (condensing line 1) Speed up time (condensing line 1) Enable speed up management by external temperature (condensing line 1) Speed up management by external temperature threshold (condensing line 1) Speed up management by external temperature differential (condensing line 1) Enable screens for the configuration of the gas cooler pressure backup probe (condensing line 1) Default YES 5 DIS 25.0 °C UoM --s --… Values NO/YES 0…60 DIS/ EN -99.9…99.9 2.5 °C … -99.9…99.9 NO --- NO/YES Value of fan forcing in case of gas cooler probe error (line 1) 50.0 % 0.0…100.0 --------… --… ---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****) Closed / Open NC/NO Not active/Active … PRESSURE TEMPERATURE PROPORTIONAL BAND DEAD ZONE … The following parameters refer to line 2, for details, see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above DI Status (display only) Logic Function (display only) … Regulation Fan 1 overload DI position (line 2) Fan 1 overload DI status (line 2) Fan 1 overload DI logic (line 2) Fan 1 overload function status (line 2) … Condenser regulation by temperature or pressure (line 2) Regulation type Condenser regulation Type (line 2) … Enable setpoint compensation (condensing line 2) NO --- NO/YES … Dbf01 … … Enable condensing setpoint compensation … Cond.pressure high alarm Delay … Number of fans … … --NC --… PRESSURE PROPORTIONAL BAND … … Condensing high pressure/temperature alarm threshold type (line 2) Condensing high pressure/temperature alarm delay (line 2) … Number of fans (line 2) … … ABSOLUTE 60 … 3 … … --s … --… Dbg01 Modulate speed device Modulating condenser device type (line 2) NONE --- … … … … … … ABSOLUTE/RELATIVE 0…999 … 0…16 … NONE INVERTER PHASE CUT-OFF CONTROL … Tab. 7.e Mask index Display description Dba01 … Dbb01 … Dbd01 … Dbe01 Description Default --- UoM Values E.Other functions The I/Os depend on the configuration selected, the following are only examples. See Appendix A.1 for the complete list and position of the I/Os. --Oil temperature probe position (line 1) B1 ----- Oil temperature probe type (line 1) 4...20 mA --- --- (display only) Max limit Min limit Calibration … DO Status (display only) Logic Function (display only) Enable com.cool. Oil temperature value (line 1) Maximum oil temperature value (line 1) Minimum oil temperature value (line 1) Oil temperature probe calibration (line 1) … Oil level valve compressor 6 DO position (line 1) Oil level valve compressor 6 DO status (line 1) Oil level valve compressor 6 DO logic (line 1) Oil level valve compressor 6 function status (line 1) Enable common oil cooling (line 1) --30.0 barg 0.0 barg 0.0 barg … 03 --NC --YES … … … … … ----------- Number of oil pumps Number of oil pumps for common oil cooler (ine 1) 0 --- Enable pump out. Enable AO of common oil cooler pump (line 1) YES --- Eaab06 Enable cool. Oil cool. off with comp. off Setpoint Differential Pump start delay Enable oil cooling compressors (line 1) Oil cooling functioning only when compressor functioning Common oil cooling setpoint (line 1) Common oil cooling differential (line 1) Pump 2 start delay after pump 1 startup (line 1) NO NO 0.0 °C 0.0 °C 0 ----… … s Eaab07 Oil pump config Oil pump output configuration: none, analog, digital NOT CONF. --- Setpoint Differential Duty on time Duty off time Threshold Differential Delay Enable oil lev. Num. oil level alarms Open time Closing time Puls. start delay Max. puls. time Oil temperature setpoint (line 1) Oil temperature differential (line 1) Fan startup time in case of oil probe error (line 1) Fan shutdown time in case of oil probe error (line 1) Common oil high temperature alarm threshold (line 1) Common oil high temperature alarm differential (line 1) Common oil high temperature alarm delay (line 1) Enable oil level management (line 1) Number of compressor alarms associated with the oil level (line 1) Oil level valve opening time (line 1) Oil level valve closing time (line 1) Delay for oil level valve pulsation at startup (line 1) Maximum pulsing time of the oil level valve (line 1) 0.0 0.0 0 0 100.0 °C 10.0 °C 0 NO 0 0 0 0 0 °C/°F °C/°F s s °C/°F °C/°F s ----s s s s Oil level controlled by Type of oil level separator control: with minimum level only, with minimum and maximum level and with compressor status (line 1) MIN.LEV. --- Min.off valve Min.lev. delay Ton Activ. Toff Activ. Ton Deact. Toff Deact. Threshold Differential Delay Threshold Differential Delay Threshold Differential Delay Minimum separator valve closing time (line 1) Minimum oil level detection delay (line 1) Valve opening time during oil level reset (line 1) Valve closing time during oil level reset (line 1) Valve opening time with correct oil level (line 1) Valve closing time with correct oil level (line 1) Oil separator differential pressure threshold (line 1) Oil separator differential pressure (line 1) Oil separator differential pressure delay (line 1) Oil cooler high temperature alarm threshold (line 1) Oil cooler high temperature alarm differential (line 1) Oil cooler high temperature alarm delay (line 1) Oil cooler low temperature alarm threshold (line 1) Oil cooler low temperature alarm differential (line 1) Oil cooler low temperature alarm delay (line 1) 0 0 10 0 0 10 1.0 barg 0.5 barg 0 100.0 °C 10.0 °C 0 100.0 °C 10.0 °C 0 s s s s s min … … s °C/°F °C/°F s °C/°F °C/°F s Eaaa04 … Eaaa45 Eaab04 Eaab15 Eaab05 Eaab08 Eaab09 Eaab10 Eaab11 Eaab12 Eaab13 Eaab14 Eaab16 Eaab20 61 ---, B1…B10 (****) ---/ NTC/ PT1000/ 0...1 V/ 0...10 V/ 4...20 mA/ 0...5 V/ HTNTC …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) … ---, 01…29 (****) Closed / Open NC/NO Not active/Active NO/YES 0...1 (analog output) 0...2 (digital outputs) NO (digital outputs) YES (analog output) NO/YES NO/YES …(**) -9.9…9.9 0…999 NOT CONF. ANALOG DIGITAL … … 0…9999 0…9999 … … 0…32767 NO/YES 0…4/7 (*) 0…999 0…999 0…999 0…999 MIN.LEV. MIN.&MAX.LEV. COMP. STATUS 0…999 0…999 0…999 0…999 0…999 0…999 …(**) …(**) 0…99 … … 0 to 9999 … … 0 to 9999 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Mask index Ebaa01 Ebab01 … Ecaa12 Ecab04 (*) Edaa01 … Edaa12 Edab01/Edab03 (*) Eeaa02 Eeaa05 Eeaa06 Eeaa09 Eeab01 Eeab02 Eeab04 Eeab05 Eeab07 Eeab08 Eeab09 Eeab10 Eeab11 Eeab13 Eeab14 Eeab15 Eeab16 Display description DO Status (display only) Logic Function (display only) Subcooling contr. Description Subcooling DO valve position (line 1) Subcooling DO valve status (line 1) Subcooling DO valve logic (line 1) Status of the subcooling valve function (line 1) Enable subcooling function (line 1) Default … --NO --NO TEMP. COND& LIQUID 0.0 °C 0.0 °C 0.0 barg 0.0 barg … … --NO --NO 0 0.0 °C 0.0 °C B1 UoM ----------- Values ---, 01…29 (****) Closed / Open NC/NO Not active/Active NO/YES --- Subcooling control type (line 1) --- TEMP. COND&LIQUID ONLY LIQUID TEMP Threshold Subcooling (display only) Min limit Calibration … DO Status (display only) Logic Function (display only) Economizer Comp.Power Thresh. Cond.Temp.Thresh. Discharge Temp.Thresh. --- Threshold for subcooling activation (line 1) Subcooling value (line 1) Discharge temperature minimum value, compressor 1 (line 1) Discharge temperature probe calibration, compressor 1 (line 1) … Compressor 6 economizer valve DO position (line 1) Compressor 6 economizer valve DO status (line 1) Compressor 6 economizer valve DO logic (line 1) Compressor 6 economizer valve function status (line 1) Enable economizer function (line 1) Capacity percentage threshold for economizer activation (line 1) Condensing temperature threshold for economizer activation (line 1) Discharge temperature threshold for economizer activation (line 1) Discharge temperature probe position, compressor 1 (line 1) … … … … … ----------% … … --- -9999.9…9999.9 -999.9…999.9 …(**) …(**) … ---, 01…29 (****) Closed / Open NC/NO Not active/Active NO/YES 0…100 -999.9…999.9 -999.9…999.9 ---, B1…B10 (****) ---/ NTC/ PT1000/ 0...1 V/ 0...10 V/ 4...20 mA/ 0...5 V/ HTNTC …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) … ---, 01…29 (****) Closed / Open NC/NO Not active/Active DIS/ EN … (**) … (**) ---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****) Opened/Closed NC/NO Not Active/Active ---, B1…B10 (****) 0-1V - 0-10V- 4...20mA- 0-5V …(**) 0.0…100.0 0.0…100.0 0.0…100.0 ---, 01…29 (****) Opened/Closed NC/NO Not Active/Active ---, 01…06 (****) … Yes/No Yes/No None/HR1+HR2/HR1 only/ HR2 only --- Discharge temperature probe type, compressor 1 (line 1) 4...20mA --- --- (display only) Max limit Min limit Calibration … DO Status (display only) Logic Function (display only) Liquid inj. Threshold Differential DI HR Enable/Activation Status Logic Function (display only) AI HR ext. signal: Probe Type Ext. Signal Value Upper Value: Lower Value: Calibration: DO Heat Reclaim out position: Status (display only) Logic: Function (display only) AO Heat Reclaim water pump: Status: Enable heat reclaim 1: Enable heat reclaim 2: Consider contribution for tot. req.: Gas Cooler Pressure lower limit Min toff betw. 2 activ. Heat reclaim 1: Min toff betw. 2 activ. Heat reclaim 2: Disable floating cond. By heat reclaim: Enable activation by scheduler: Activation indipendent from the closing: Discharge temperature value, compressor 1 (line 1) Discharge temperature maximum value, compressor 1 (line 1) Discharge temperature minimum value, compressor 1 (line 1) Discharge temperature probe calibration, compressor 1 (line 1) … Compressor 6 liquid injection valve DO position (line 1) Compressor 6 injection valve DO status (line 1) Compressor 6 injection valve DO logic (line 1) Compressor 6 injection valve function status (line 1) Enable liquid injection function (line 1) Liquid injection setpoint (line 1) Liquid injection differential (line 1) Digital input to activate heat reclaim Status HR DI (display only) Logic HR DI Function Status HR DI AI HR ext. Signal (HR request) Probe Type Heat reclaim Ext. Signal Value Upper Value HR ext. Signal Lower Value HR ext. Signal Calibration HR ext. Signal DO Heat Reclaim out position Status HR DO (display only) Logic HR DO: Function HR DO (display only) AO Heat Reclaim water pump: Status HR AO (display only) Enable heat reclaim 1 Enable heat reclaim 2 Composition of total request (used to activate different actions: increase HPV setpoint, GC setpoint, GC bypass) Gas cooler lower limit admitted to activate heat reclaim --30.0 barg 0.0 barg 0.0 barg … … --NO --DIS 70.0 °C 5.0 … … NO … … 0-10V … 100% 0% 0% … … NO Active 0 … No No … … … … … ----------… … … … … … % … % % % % … … … … … % 40.0 barg Minimum time off between 2 activations Heat reclaim 1 30 min min HR1 only Minimum time off between 2 activations Heat reclaim 2 30 Disable floating condensing by heat reclaim NO Yes/No Enable heat reclaim activation by scheduler NO Yes/No Activation indipendent from the closing NO Yes/No External Signal/Temperature/ Digital Input HR1 Regulation type: Different type of regulation of first heat reclaim Temperature Setpoint Kp: Integral time: HR1 Valve type: Activation thr: De-activat thr: Activation delay: En. Pump: Pump type: Pump delay off : Pump regulation type: On threshold: Off threshold: Pump Management Setpoint: Kp: Integral time: HR1 enable HR probe temp. Filter: Number of samples Max. water temp. Alarm thresh: Differential: Setpoint if HR1 is regulated by temperature Kp if HR1 is regulated by temperature Integral time if HR1 is regulated by temperature Type of valve of first heat reclaim Threshold to activate valve output HR1 Threshold to de-activate valve output HR1 Delay to activate valve output HR1 Enable pump of first heat reclaim Selection of pump type of first heat reclaim Delay to switch off pump HR1 Different type of pump regulation of first heat reclaim Threshold to activate pump output HR1 Threshold to de-activate pump output HR1 Setpoint if HR1 pump is regulated by temperature Kp if HR1 pump is regulated by temperature Integral time if HR1 pump is regulated by temperature 55 1 200 ON/OFF 10.0 5.0 30 No °C/°F %/°C s 0 HR request 5.0 0.0 55 1 120 s Enable multiple measurements of temperature probe No Number of samples Maximum water temperature Alarm threshold Differential for maximum water temperature Alarm threshold 85 5 Different type of regulation of first heat reclaim Temperature Setpoint Kp: Integral time: HR2 Valve type: Activation thr: De-activat thr: Activation delay: Setpoint if HR2 is regulated by temperature Kp if HR2 is regulated by temperature Integral time if HR2 is regulated by temperature Type of valve of first heat reclaim Threshold to activate valve output HR2 Threshold to de-activate valve output HR2 Delay to activate valve output HR2 40 1 200 ON/OFF 10.0 5.0 30 62 Yes/No Modulating/ On/Off HR request/delta temperature % % °C/°F %/°C s Yes/No 1…200 HR2 Regulation type: pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ON/OFF / 0/10V % % s °C/°F °C/°F External Signal/Temperature/ Digital Input °C/°F %/°C s ON/OFF / 0/10V % % s ENG Mask index Eeab17 Eeab18 Eeab19 Eeab20 Eeab21 Eeab25 Eeab26 Eeab28 Eeab29 Eeab30 Efa05 Efa06 Efa07 Efa08 Efa09 … Efb05 Efb06 Efb07 Efb08 Efb09 Efb20 Efb10 … Efb15 … Efc05 Efc06 Display description En. Pump: Pump type: Pump delay off : Pump regulation type: On threshold: Off threshold: Pump Management Setpoint: Kp: Integral time: HR2 enable HR probe temp. Filter: Number of sample Maximum water temp. Alarm thresh: Differential: Actions on HPV valve and gas cooler fans setpoints done in: Wait. Time to act: En. GasCool.bypass: Gas cooler bypass 3way valve type: Valve Mode Eval. Time to byp: Max receiver press. To allow byp: HPV valve modul. Setp.min%: HPV valve modul. Setp.100%: Time to min setp.: Incr. Step: Wait time: Gas cool. Fans modulat. Incr. Step: Gas cool. Fans modulat. Wait time: Gas cool. Fans modulat. Max offset: Gas cool. Fans modulat. Min. HR request: Gas cool. Fans modulat. Diff. OFF: Max decrease time of HPV offset: Max decrease time of GC offset: Max t.close byp. Min.HR request: Diff.OFF: Gen.funct.5 Regulation variable Mode Enable Description --------------Setpoint Differential High alarm High alarm Delay Alarm type Low alarm Low alarm Delay Alarm type … Gen.modulat.1 Gen.modulat.2 Regulation variable Mode Enable Description --------------Setpoint Differential High alarm High alarm Delay Alarm type Low alarm Low alarm Delay Alarm type Out upper limit Out lower limit Cut-off enable Cutoff Diff Cutoff hys. … Out upper limit Out lower limit Cut-off enable Cutoff Diff Cutoff hys. … Gen Alarm 1 Gen Alarm 2 Regulation variable Enable Description --------------- Description Enable pump of first heat reclaim Selection of pump type of first heat reclaim Delay to switch off pump HR2 Different type of pump regulation of first heat reclaim Threshold to activate pump output HR2 Threshold to de-activate pump output HR2 Setpoint if HR2 pump is regulated by temperature Kp if HR2 pump is regulated by temperature Integral time if HR2 pump is regulated by temperature Default No UoM 0 HR request 5.0 0.0 55 1 120 s Enable multiple measurements of temperature probe No Values Yes/No Modulating/ On/Off HR request/delta temperature % % °C/°F %/°C s Yes/No Number of samples 1…200 Maximum water temperature Alarm threshold 85 Differential for maximum water temperature Alarm threshold Delay to start HPV setpoint increment Enable Gas Cooler bypass 5 °C/°F Simultaneous Mode 120 s NO Gas cooler bypass 3way valve type 0/10 V Bypass valve mode Evaluation time to start GC bypass Max receiver pressure to allow bypass Min. HPV setpoint with heat reclaim total request upper setted threshold Max. HPV setpoint with heat reclaim total request equal to 100% Time to reach minimum setpoint Value of incremental step between setpoint min& e setpoint 100% Time each step ON/OFF 30 60.0 75.0 85.0 60 0.5 60 s barg barg barg s barg s Value of GC incremental step 1.0 °C/°F Time each step 60 s °C/°F Type of HPV setpoint increment °C/°F Yes/No 0/10 / On/Off ON/OFF / Modulating GC maximum offset 5.0 Minimum HR total request to start GC action 30.0 % Differential to decrease GC action Time to decrease total HPV offset Time to decrease total GC offset Time to close bypass valve Enable generic stage function 1 … Enable generic stage function 5 Regulation variable for stage 1 generic function Direct or reverse regulation Enabling variable for stage 1 generic function Enable description change Description Setpoint stage 1 generic function Stage 1 generic function differential High alarm enabling for stage 1 generic function High alarm threshold for stage 1 generic function High alarm delay for stage 1 generic function High alarm type for stage 1 generic function Low alarm enabling for stage 1 generic function Low alarm threshold for stage 1 generic function Low alarm delay for stage 1 generic function Low alarm type for stage 1 generic function … Enable generic modulating function 1 management Enable generic modulating function 2 management Regulation variable for generic modulating function 1 Direct or reverse regulation Enabling variable for generic modulating function 1 Enable description change Description Setpoint for generic modulating function 1 Differential for generic modulating function 1 High alarm enabling for generic modulating function 1 High alarm threshold for generic modulating function 1 High alarm delay for generic modulating function 1 Low alarm type for generic modulating function 1 Low alarm enabling for stage 1 generic function Low alarm threshold for stage 1 generic function Low alarm delay for stage 1 generic function Low alarm type for stage 1 generic function Output upper limit for generic modulating function 1 Output lower limit for generic modulating function 1 Enable cut-off function for generic modulating function 1 Cut-off differential for generic modulating function 1 Cut-off hysteresis for generic modulating function 1 … Output upper limit for generic modulating function 1 Output lower limit for generic modulating function 1 Enable cut-off function for generic modulating function 1 Cut-off differential for generic modulating function 1 Cut-off hysteresis for generic modulating function 1 … Enable generic alarm function 1 Enable generic alarm function 2 Monitored variable for generic alarm function 1 Enabling variable for generic alarm function 1 Enable description change Description 5.0 240 120 120 DISAB. … DISAB. --DIRECT --SKIP --0.0 °C 0.0 °C DISAB. 0.0 °C 0 NORMAL DISAB. 0.0 °C 0 NORMAL … DISAB. DISAB. --DIRECT --SKIP --0.0 °C 0.0 °C DISAB. 0.0 °C 0 NORMAL DISAB. 0.0 °C 0 NORMAL 100.0 0.0 NO 0.0 °C 0.0 °C … 100.0 0.0 NO 0.0 °C 0.0 °C … DISAB. DISAB. ----SKIP --- % s s s --… ------------… … --… s ----… s --… --------------… … --… s ----… s --% % --… … … % % --… … … ------------- 63 Simultaneous Mode/Sequent. Mode with Thr. DISAB. / ENABLE … DISAB. / ENABLE … DIRECT / REVERSE … SKIP / CHANGE … … (**) … (**) DISAB. / ENABLE … (**) 0…9999 NORMAL / SERIOUS DISAB. / ENABLE … (**) 0…9999 NORMAL / SERIOUS … DISAB. / ENABLE DISAB. / ENABLE … DIRECT / REVERSE … SKIP / CHANGE … … (**) … (**) DISAB. / ENABLE … (**) 0…9999 NORMAL / SERIOUS DISAB. / ENABLE … (**) 0…9999 NORMAL / SERIOUS 0…100 0…100 NO/YES … (**) … (**) … 0…100 0…100 NO/YES … (**) … (**) … DISAB. / ENABLE DISAB. / ENABLE … … SKIP / CHANGE … pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Mask index Efc07 … Efd05 Efd06 Display description Alarm type Delay … Enable generic scheduler funct. Gen. scheduling connected to common scheduler Enable Description Priority type for generic alarm function 1 Delay for generic alarm function 1 … Enable generic scheduler function Default NORMAL 0 … DISAB. UoM --s … --- Values NORMAL / SERIOUS 0…9999 … DISAB. / ENABLE Generic scheduler with the same days and special periods NO --- NO/YES Enabling variable for generic scheduler function ----- ----- … MON, ..., SUN … … TB4: --:-- -> --:-- Enabling and definition of time band 1: start hour and minute, end hour and --minute (suction line 1) … … Enabling and definition of time band 4: start hour and minute, end hour and --minute (suction line 1) Change Time band change action --- TB1: --:-- -> --:-… Efd07 Efe05 Efe06/Efe07 (**) … Eeaa02 … Efe21 … Efe29 … Egaa01 Egaa02 Egab01 Egab02 Egab03 Egab04 Ehb01 Ehb03 Ehb04 Ehb05 Ehb06 Eia01 … Eia04 … Eia06 … Eia08 … Eia15 … Eib01 … … … … Copy to Copy settings to other days 0 --- Gen. A measure … ------- (display only) Max limit Min limit Calibration ... DI Status Logic Function ... DO Status (display only) Logic Function (display only) … Modulating1 Status (display only) … DI Status Logic Function DO Status (display only) Logic Function (display only) Device present Deactivation when fan power less than Before activ. fans at max for Ext.tempThresh Sanitary proc. Start Duration Ext.tempThresh Maint. req. Chillb. after Maint time reset Avoid simultaneous pulse between lines Delay Force3 off L2 comps for L1 fault Delay Activ. L1 comps for L2 activ. Delay Force off L2 comps for L1 off Enable minimum threshold for act. of L1 Threshold Enable pump down Threshold ------- (display only) Max limit Min limit Calibration … DI Status Logic Function … --Status (display only) … DO Line relay Logic: … DI On/Off parall.compr. Status Logic Function (display only) … Enable HPV valve management Generic analog input A unit of measure selection … Generic probe A position Generic probe A type Generic probe A value Generic probe A maximum limit Generic probe A minimum limit Generic probe A calibration ... Generic digital input F DI position Generic digital input F DI status Generic digital input F DI logic Generic digital input F function status ... Generic stage 1 DO position Status of generic stage 1 DO Logic of generic stage 1 DO Generic stage 1 function status … Generic modulating 1 AO position Generic modulating 1 function output value … ChillBooster fault DI position (line 1) ChillBooster fault DI status (line 1) ChillBooster fault DI logic (line 1) ChillBooster fault function status (line 1) ChillBooster fault DO position (line 1) ChillBooster fault DO status (line 1) ChillBooster fault DO logic (line 1) ChillBooster function status (line 1) Enable ChillBooster function (line 1) °C … B1 4...20 mA --30.0 barg 0.0 barg 0.0 barg … ----NC --… … --NO --… 0 0 … ----NC --… --NO --NO --… ----… … … … … --------… --------… --% … ------------------- ---, SAVE CHANGES LOAD PREVIOUS CLEAR ALL MONDAY...SUNDAY; MON-FRI; MON-SAT; SAT&SUN; ALL °C/ °F/ barg/ psig/ %/ ppm … ---, B1…B10 (****) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) … ---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****) Closed / Open NC/NO Not active/Active … ---, 01…29 (****) Closed / Open NC/NO Not active/Active … ---, 01…06 (****) 0.0…100.0 … ---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****) Closed / Open NC/NO Not active/Active ---, 01…29 (****) Closed / Open NC/NO Not active/Active NO/YES Algorithm selection pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 --- Fan capacity under which the ChillBooster is deactivated (line 1) 95 % 0…100 Min. time for fans at maximum capacity before ChillBooster activation (line 1) External temperature threshold for ChillBooster activation (line 1) Enable sanitary procedure (line 1) Sanitary procedure starting time (line 1) Sanitary procedure duration (line 1) External temperature threshold for sanitary procedure activation (line 1) Maximum ChillBooster operation time (line 1) Maximum ChillBooster operation time (line 1) 5 30.0 °C Disab. 00:00 0 5.0 °C 200 NO min … ----min … h --- 0…300 …(**) Disab. / Enable … 0…30 …(**) 0…999 NO/YES Enable simultaneous compressor startup inhibition NO --- NO/YES Delay between compressor starts in different lines 0 s 0…999 Enable line 2 compressor Off forcing due to line 1 compressor fault NO --- NO/YES Delay for line 2 compressor Off forcing due to line 1 compressor fault Enable line 1 compressor On forcing due to line 2 compressor On Delay for line 1 compressor On forcing due to line 2 compressor On Enable line 2 compressor Off forcing due to line 1 off Enable line 1 activation for DSS only when the suction pressure is greater than a minimum threshold Minimum threshold for line 1 activation for DSS Enable pump down with at least one LT compressor active Pump down threshold RPRV tank pressure probe position RPRV tank pressure probe type RPRV tank pressure probe value RPRV tank pressure probe maximum value RPRV tank pressure minimum value RPRV tank pressure probe calibration … HPV alarm digital input position HPV alarm digital input status HPV alarm digital input logic HPV alarm digital input status … HPV valve analog output position HPV valve analog output value … DO position and On/Off Status Parallel compressor Logic Parallel Compressor DO: … Digital input on/off parallel compressor Status parallel compressor DI (display only) Logic parallel compressor DI Function Status parallel compressor DI … 0 NO 30 NO s --s --- 0…999 NO/YES 0…999 NO/YES NO --- NO/YES --NO 1.5 barg --4...20 mA --60.0 barg 0.0 barg 0.0 barg … ----NC --… 0 0 … … NO … … … NO … … … --… ----… … … … … --------… --% … … … … … … … … … … (**) NO/YES … (**) ---, B1…B10 (****) … (**) … (**) … (**) … (**) … (**) … ---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****) Closed / Open NC/NO Not active/Active … ---, 01…06 (****) 0.0…100.0 … ---, 01…29 (****) NC/NO … ---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****) Opened/Closed NC/NO Not Active/Active … HPV valve management enabled, or transcritical operation mode enabled NO --- NO/YES Selection of the algorithm-tyep to apply to the calculation of the pressure setpoint OPTIMIZ. --- OPTIMIZ. / CUSTOM 64 ENG Mask index Eib02 Eib03 Eib04 Display description Min HPV vale opening when OFF During ON Max HPV valve opening Max delta Pre-positioning Prepos. time --P100% Pmax Eib05 (Definition of the points on Pcritic the graph, see T12 mask Eib04) T23 Tmin Eib06 (Definition T100% of the points on Delta the graph, see Coeff.1 mask Eib04) P1 I1 Eib07 PHR IHR Eib08 Enable HPV setpoint filter Number of samples Enable mgmt of HPV with HR Eib09 Eib10 Eib11 Eib12 Eib13 Eib14 Eib15 Eib16 Eib17 Eib18 Eib19 Eib20 Eib21 Eib22 Eib23 Eib24 Eib25 Eib27 Eib28 Eib31 Eib32 Eib35 Eib40 Description Default UoM Minimum opening of the HPV valve with the unit OFF 0 % 0.0…100.0 Minimum opening of the HPV valve with the unit ON Maximum opening of the HPV valve Maximum variation per second allowed for the HPV valve output Opening of the HPV valve at start-up during pre-positioning Pre-positioning duration Calculation algorithm graph P100% upper pressure limit Pmax pressure for defining the upper proportional zone Pcritic optimal pressure calculated at the passage temperature between the intermediate zone and transcritical zone T12 limit temperature between the transcritical zone and intermediate zone T23 temperature limit between the intermediate zone and subcritical zone Tmin temperature for defining the lower proportional zone T100% temperature for defining the complete opening zone of the valve Subcooling for optimized regulation Coefficient for determining the customized line Proportional gain for the proportional + integral regulation of the HPV valve Integral time for the proportional + integral regulation of the HPV valve Proportional gain for the proportional + integral regulation of the HPV valve with heat recovery Integral time for the proportional + integral regulation of the HPV valve with heat recovery Enabling of the filter action on the HPV valve setpoint Number of samples Enabling of the various management of the HPV valve during heat recovery activation Setpoint regulation of the HPV valve during heat recovery Time scale for the setpoint reset procedure after heat recovery Pressure scale for the setpoint reset procedure after heat recovery HPV valve safety position Offset to be applied to the external temperature in the event of gas cooler pressure probe error 0 0 0 0 0 --109.0 barg 104.0 barg % % % % s --… … 0.0…100.0 0.0…100.0 0.0…100.0 0.0…100.0 0…9999 --… (**) … (**) 76.8 barg … … (**) 31.0 °C 20.0 °C 6.0 °C -10.0 °C 3.0 °C 2.5 5 %/ barg 60 … … … … … … %/barg s … (**) … (**) … (**) … (**) … (**) -999.9…999.9 0…100 0…9999 5 %/ barg %/barg 0…100 60 s 0…9999 NO 5 ----- NO/YES 0…99 NO --- NO/YES 90.0 barg 0.1 1.0 barg 50.0 … s … % … (**) 0…999 … (**) 0.0…100.0 0.0 °C … … (**) NO --- NO/YES 40.0 barg 45.0 barg … … … (**) … (**) 10.0 barg … … (**) 32.0 barg 27.0 barg … … … (**) … (**) 10.0 barg … … (**) NO 10 NO --s --- NO/YES 0…999 NO/YES NO --- NO/YES 30.0 barg … … (**) 30 NO s --- 0…999 NO/YES HR setp. Post HR Dt Post HR DP HPV valve safety position Gas cooler temp delta with probe error Enable HPV safeties from tank HPV valve safety procedure enabling pressure High tank pressure threshold High tank pressure threshold Max tank pressure Maximum tank pressure allowed Maximum offset to add to the HPV setpoint when the tank pressure exceeds HPV set.incr. the high pressure threshold Low tank pressure threshold Low tank pressure threshold Min tank pressure Minimum tank pressure allowed Maximum offset to subtract from the HPV setpoint when the tank pressure HPV set.decr. goes below the low pressure threshold Force close with comp OFF Enable HPV valve closure when all compressors on line 1 are off Delay clos. with comp. OFF HPV valve closure delay when all compressors on line 1 are off Regul. in subcritical zone Enabling the regulation of the gas cooler in the subcritical zone Enable warning function when the gas cooler pressure is too far from the Enable setpoint for the set time Difference between the gas cooler pressure and the setpoint which Delta generates the warning Delay Delay time before generating the warning Enable RPRV valve mgmt Enable RPRV valve mgmt Min RPRV vale opening when Minimum opening of the RPRV valve with the unit ON ON During OFF Minimum opening of the RPRV valve with the unit OFF Pre-positioning Opening of the RPRV valve at start-up during pre-positioning Prepos. time Pre-positioning duration Max RPRV valve opening Maximum opening of the RPRV valve Max delta Maximum variation allowed for the HPV valve output CO2 rec. pressure setpoint Regulation setpoint for the pressure for the CO2 receiver Gain Proportional gain for the proportional + integral regulation of the RPRV valve Int time Integral time for the proportional + integral regulation of the RPRV valve RPRV valve safety position RPRV valve safety position Force close with comp OFF Enable RPRV valve closure when all compressors on line 1 are off Delay clos. with comp. OFF RPRV valve closure delay when all compressors on line 1 are off Threshold Receiver high pressure threshold alarm Diff. Receiver high pressure differential alarm Delay Receiver high pressure alarm delay Reset Receiver high pressure alarm reset type Enable compressor shutdown when high pressure receiver alarm occurs Swith-off comp. Enable parallel compressor: Enable parallel compressor RPRV opening: RPRV opening to allow parallel compressor Delay: Delay on parallel compressor activation Min g.c.temp.: Minimum GC temperature to allow parallel compressor Receiver pressure threshold Threshold pressure for the gas cooler when the Heat Reclaim is ON Time Time during which this threshold remains active Var. delta Allowed variation Max. HPV valve opening HPV valve maximum opening percentage Max. delta HPV valve maximum variation per second Min on time: Parallel compressor by inverter, timings. Min on time Min off time: Parallel compressor by inverter, timings. Min off time Min time to start same Parallel compressor by inverter, timings. Min time to start same compressor compressor: RPRV offset with par. compr. Increment of RPRV setpoint during parallel compressor regulation On: Par. Comp. ON Rising time Rising time of RPRV setpoint RPRV: Par. Comp. Off Falling time Falling time of RPRV setpoint RPRV: 65 Values 10.0 % 0.0…100.0 10.0 50.0 5 100.0 10.0 35.0 barg 20 %/barg 60 50.0 NO 10 45.0 barg 5.0 barg 30 MANUAL NO NO 30 10 15 ------- % % s % % … %/barg s % --s … … s ----- 0.0…100.0 0.0…100.0 0…9999 0.0…100.0 0.0…100.0 … (**) 0…100 0…9999 0.0…100.0 NO/YES 0…999 … (**) … (**) 0…9999 MANUAL / AUTO NO/YES Yes/No 0 % 0.0…100.0 0 30 30 % s s 0.0…100.0 % s °C/°F ------- 60 s 2 barg 0 s 20 s 0…999 ------- pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Mask index Display description HPV Valve RPPV Valve EVD address Description Enable EVS management of HPV valve Enable EVS management of HPV valve RPRV Driver address managed in FBUS from pRack Default ENABLE ENABLE 198 UoM ------- Valves routing Valve type driver association --- --- EVD Status Driver connection to pRack status --- --- HPV Valve type HPV valve type CAREL EXV --- RPRV Valve type RPRV valve type CAREL EXV --- Min. steps Max. steps closing steps Nom. step rate Move current Holding current Duty Cycle Opening sincre Closing sincre Em. closing speed Min. steps Max. steps closing steps Nom. step rate Move current Holding current Duty Cycle Opening sincre Closing sincre Em. closing speed Minimum valve step number Maximum valve step number Valve closing steps Valve nominal speed Nominal current Holding current Valve duty cycle Opening position synchronization Closing position synchronization Valve emergency closing speed Minimum valve step number Maximum valve step number Valve closing steps Valve nominal speed Nominal current Holding current Valve duty cycle Opening position synchronization Closing position synchronization Valve emergency closing speed 50 480 500 50 450 100 30 YES YES 150 50 480 500 50 450 100 30 YES YES 150 step step step step/s mA mA % ---------step/s step step step step/s mA mA % ---------step/s Eic01 Eic02 Eic03 (HPV valve) Eic04 (HPV valve) Eic05 (RPRV valve) Eic06 (RPRV valve) The following parameters refer to line 2, for details, see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above --Oil temperature probe position (line 2) Eaba04 … Eabb04 … Ebba01 … Ebbb01 … Ecba01 … Ecbb04 … Edba01 … Edbb01 … Eeba02 Eebb01 … Egba01 … B1 --- --- Oil temperature probe type (line 2) 4...20 mA --- --- (display only) Max limit Min limit Calibration … Enable com.cool. Oil temperature value (line 2) Maximum oil temperature value (line 2) Minimum oil temperature value (line 2) Oil temperature probe calibration (line 2) … Enable common oil cooling (line 2) --30.0 barg 0.0 barg 0.0 barg … YES … … … … … --- Number of oil pumps Number of oil pumps for common oil cooler (line 2) 0 --- Enable pump out. Enable AO of common oil cooler pump (line 2) YES --- … DO Status (display only) Logic Function (display only) … Subcooling contr. … Subcooling DO valve position (line 2) Subcooling DO valve status (line 2) Subcooling DO valve logic (line 2) Status of the subcooling valve function (line 2) … Enable subcooling function (line 2) … --------… --- --- Subcooling control type (line 2) … … --NO --… NO TEMP. Threshold Subcooling (display only) … --- Threshold for subcooling activation (line 2) Subcooling value (line 2) … Discharge temperature probe position, compressor 1 (line 2) 0.0 °C 0.0 °C … B1 --- Discharge temperature probe type, compressor 1 (line 2) 4...20 mA --- --- (display only) Max limit Min limit Calibration … Economizer Comp.Power Thresh. Cond.Temp.Thresh. Discharge Temp.Thresh. … --- Discharge temperature value, compressor 1 (line 2) Discharge temperature maximum value, compressor 1 (line 2) Discharge temperature minimum value, compressor 1 (line 2) Discharge temperature probe calibration, compressor 1 (line 2) … Enable economizer function (line 2) Capacity percentage threshold for economizer activation (line 2) Condensing temperature threshold for economizer activation (line 2) Discharge temperature threshold for economizer activation (line 2) … Discharge temperature probe position, compressor 1 (line 2) --30.0 barg 0.0 barg 0.0 barg … NO 0 0.0 °C 0.0 °C … B1 … … … … … --% … … … --- --- Discharge temperature probe type, compressor 1 (line 2) 4...20mA --- --- (display only) Max limit Min limit Calibration … Liquid inj. Threshold Differential … DI Status Logic Function Enable heat rec. … DI Status Logic Function … Discharge temperature value, compressor 1 (line 2) Discharge temperature maximum value, compressor 1 (line 2) Discharge temperature minimum value, compressor 1 (line 2) Discharge temperature probe calibration, compressor 1 (line 2) … Enable liquid injection function (line 2) Liquid injection setpoint (line 2) Liquid injection differential (line 2) … Heat recovery from digital input DI position (line 2) Heat recovery from digital input DI status (line 2) Heat recovery from digital input DI logic (line 2) Heat recovery from digital input function status (line 2) Enable heat recovery function (line 2) … ChillBooster fault DI position (line 2) ChillBooster fault DI status (line 2) ChillBooster fault DI logic (line 2) ChillBooster fault function status (line 2) … --30.0 barg 0.0 barg 0.0 barg … DIS 70.0 °C 5.0 … … --NC --NO … ----NC --… … … … … … --… … … ----------… --------… pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 COND&LIQUID 66 --… … … --- Values ENABLE/DISABLE ENABLE/DISABLE 0..207 Single A->HPV; Single A->RPRV; Twin A->RPRV, B->HPV; Twin A->HPV, B->RPRV connected/not connected CAREL EXV, CUSTOM, Danfoss CCMT, Danfoss ICMTS (0-10V) CAREL EXV, CUSTOM, Danfoss ETS 400, Danfoss ETS 250, Danfoss ETS 100B, Danfoss ETS 50B, Danfoss ETS 12.5-25B, Danfoss CCM 40, Danfoss CCM 10-20-30, Danfoss ICMTS (0-10V) 0…9999 0…9999 0…9999 1…2000 0…800 0…250 0…100 YES/NO YES/NO 1…2000 0…9999 0…9999 0…9999 1…2000 0…800 0…250 0…100 YES/NO YES/NO 1…2000 ---, B1…B10 (****) ---/ NTC/ PT1000/ 0...1 V/ 0...10 V/ 4...20 mA/ 0...5 V/ HTNTC …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) … NO/YES 0...1 (analog output) 0...2 (digital outputs) NO (digital outputs) YES (analog output) … ---, 01…29 (****) Closed / Open NC/NO Not active/Active … NO/YES TEMP. COND&LIQUID ONLY LIQUID TEMP -9999.9…9999.9 -999.9…999.9 … ---, B1…B10 (****) ---/ NTC/ PT1000/ 0...1 V/ 0...10 V/ 4...20 mA/ 0...5 V/ HTNTC …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) … NO/YES 0…100 -999.9…999.9 -999.9…999.9 … ---, B1…B10 (****) ---/ NTC/ PT1000/ 0...1 V/ 0...10 V/ 4...20 mA/ 0...5 V/ HTNTC …(**) …(**) …(**) …(**) … DIS/ EN … (**) … (**) … ---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****) Closed / Open NC/NO Not active/Active NO/YES … ---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****) Closed / Open NC/NO Not active/Active … ENG Mask index Egbb01 … Display description Device present Deactivation when fan power less than … Description Enable ChillBooster function (line 2) Default NO UoM --- Values NO/YES Fan capacity under which the ChillBooster is deactivated (line 2) 95 % 0…100 … … … … Tab. 7.f Mask index Display description Description Default UoM Values Summer/Winter Special days Closing per. Start End Day 1 … Day 10 P1 --… P5 --- Enable summer/winter management Enable special days management Enable closing period management Summer start date Summer end date Special day 1 date … Special day 10 date P1 closing period start date P1 closing period end date … P5 closing period start date P5 closing period end date NO NO NO ------… ------… ----- ------------… ------… ----- Date format Date format DD/MM/YY --- Hour Date Day (display only) Daylight savings time Transition time Start End Language Disable language mask at startup Countdown Hour and minutes Date Day of the week calculated from the date Enable daylight savings time offset time Daylight savings time starting week, day, month and time Daylight savings time ending week, day, month and time Current language … … … DISAB. 60 … … ENGLISH … … … ----… … --- NO/YES NO/YES NO/YES 01/JAN...31/DEC 01/JAN...31/DEC 01/JAN...31/DEC … 01/JAN...31/DEC 01/JAN...31/DEC 01/JAN...31/DEC … 01/JAN...31/DEC 01/JAN...31/DEC ---DD/MM/YY MM/DD/YY YY/MM/DD … … Monday… Sunday DISAB. / ENABLE 0…240 … … … Disable the change language screen at startup YES --- NO/YES Starting value for countdown, time change language screen active 60 s Main mask selection Main screen selection LINE 1 --- Address Address of the supervisory system (line 1) 196 --- Protocol Supervisor communication protocol (line 1) CAREL SLAVE --LOCAL Baudrate Insert password Supervisor communication speed (line 1) Password Current password level Logout User password Service password Manufacturer password 19200 0000 --NO 0000 1234 1234 --------------- 0…60 LINE 1 LINE 2 DOUBLE SUCT. DOUBLE COND. 0…207 -CAREL SLAVE LOCAL CAREL SLAVE REMOTE MODBUS SLAVE pRACK MANAGER CAREL SLAVE GSM 1200…19200 0…9999 User, Service, Manufacturer NO/YES 0 to 9999 0…9999 0…9999 The following parameters refer to line 2, for details, see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above Address Address of the supervisory system (line 2) 196 --- Fcb01 F. Settings Faaa01 Faaa02 Faaa03 … Faaa04 Faaa05 Faab01 Faab02/Faab03/ Faab04 Faab05 Fb01 Fb02 Fb03 Fca01 Fd01 Fd02 Logout User Service Manufacturer Fd03 Protocol Supervisor communication protocol (line 2) pRACK MANAGER --- Baudrate Supervisor communication speed (line 2) 19200 --- 0…207 --CAREL SLAVE LOCAL CAREL SLAVE REMOTE MODBUS SLAVE pRACK MANAGER CAREL SLAVE GSM 1200…19200 Tab. 7.g Mask index Display description Description Default UoM Values Enable high pressure condensing prevent (line 1) High pressure condensing prevent threshold (line 1) High pressure condensing prevent differential (line 1) NO 0.0 barg 0.0 barg --… … NO/YES … (**) 0.0…99.9 G. Safeties Gba01 Gba02 Gba03 Gba04 Gba05 Gca01 Gca02 Gca03 Gca04 Gca05 Enable prevent Setpoint Differential Decrease compressor power time Enable heat recov. as first prevent step Offset HeatRecov Enable ChillB. as first prevent step Chill. offset Max. num prevent Prevent max number evaluation time Reset automatic prevent Common HP type Common HP delay Common LP start delay Common LP delay Time of semi-automatic alarm evaluation Numer of retries before alarm becomes manual (line 1) Liquid alarm delay Oil alarm delay Output relay alarm activation with Decreasing compressor capacity time (line 1) 0 s 0…999 Enabling heat recovery as first stage for condensing HP prevent (line 1) NO --… NO YES 0.0…99,9 NO YES 0.0…99,9 1…5 Offset between heat recovery and prevent setpoint (line 1) 0.0 barg Enable ChillBooster as first stage for condensing HP prevent (line 1) NO --- Offset between ChillBooster and prevent setpoint (line 1) Max number of prevent before locking compressors (line 1) 0.0 barg 3 … --- Prevent max number evaluation time 60 h 0…999 Reset maximum number of prevent (line 1) Type of reset for common HP alarm (line 1) Common high pressure delay (line 1) Common low pressure delay at startup (line 1) Common low pressure delay during operation (line 1) NO AUTO 10 60 20 ----s s s NO/YES AUTO / MAN 0…999 0…999 0…999 Number of LP interventions evaluation time (line 1) 120 min 0…999 Number of LP interventions in the period after which the alarm becomes a manual reset (line 1) 5 --- 0…999 Liquid level alarm delay (line 1) Common oil alarm delay (line 1) Selection of output relay alarm activation with active alarms or alarms not reset 0 0 ACTIVE ALARMS s s 0…999 0…999 ACTIVE ALARMS ALARMS NOT RESET 67 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Mask index Display description Description The following parameters refer to line 2, for details, see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above Gbb01 Enable prevent Enable high pressure condensing prevent (line 2) … … … Common HP type Type of reset for common HP alarm (line 2) Gcb01 Common HP delay Common high pressure delay (line 2) … … … Default UoM Values NO … AUTO 10 … --… --s … NO/YES … AUTO / MAN 0…999 … Tab. 7.h Mask index Display description Description Default UoM Values Ver. Bios Boot Board type Size FLASH mem RAM Built-in type Software version and date Bios version and date Boot version and date Hardware type Hardware size Flash memory size RAM memory size Built-in display type … … … … … ------- … … … … … … … None / PGDE Cycle time Number of cycles per second and cycle time software --- ----------kB kB --cycles/s ms H. Info H01 (display only) H02 (display only) … Tab. 7.i Mask index Display description Description Default UoM Values --- --- Suction, Condenser Suction + Condenser °C/barg / °F/psig Reciprocating Scroll 1…6/12 (*) 0…4/7 (*) I. Setup Compressor type Type of compressors (line 1) Number of compressors (line 1) Ib04 Number of compressors Number of alarms for each compressor SUCTION + CONDENS. °C/barg RECRIPROCATING 2/3 (*) Number of alarms for each compressor (line 1) 1 --- Ib05 Modulate speed device Modulating device for first compressor (line 1) NONE --- Ib30 Compress. size Compressors sizes (line 1) --kW … --kW Ib01 Type of system Type of system Ib02 Units of meas. Units of measure Ib03 Ib34 Ib35 Ib36 Ib11 Ib16 --- ----- S1 Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1) … … S4 Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1) SAME SIZE & SAME PARTIAL. YES 10.0 … NO --- S1 Enable stages and stages for compressor group 1 (line 1) Yes 100 --% … … S4 Enable stages and stages for compressor group 4 (line 1) C01 … C12 Size for compressor 1 or presence of inverter (line 1) … Size for compressor 12 (line 1) … NO --S1 … S1 … --kW --… --- --- Compress. size Compressors sizes (line 1) SAME SIZE --- S1 Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1) … … S4 Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1) Yes --… NO --- --kW … --kW --C01 … C06 Size for compressor 1 or presence of inverter (line 1) … Size for compressor 6 (line 1) S1 … --- --… --- Compress. size Compressors sizes (line 1) SAME SIZE --- S1 Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1) … … --kW … --kW --… ------- None, Inverter ---/Digital scroll(*) ---/Continuous (*) Same size &Same Partial. Same size & different Partial. Define sizes NO/YES 0.0...500.0 … NO/YES 0.0...500.0 NO/YES 100; 50/100; 50/75/100; 25/50/75/100; 33/66/100 … NO/ YES S1...S4 S1…S4/INV … S1…S4 Same size Define sizes NO/YES 0.0...500.0 … NO/YES 0.0...500.0 S4 Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1) C01 … C12 Regulation Units of measure Size for compressor 1 or presence of inverter (line 1) … Size for compressor 12 (line 1) Compressor control by temperature or pressure (line 1) Units of measure (line 1) Yes --… NO --S1 … S1 PRESSURE barg Refrigerant Type of refrigerant (suction line 1) R744 --- Compressor regulation type (line 1) Enable integral time for proportional regulation of suction line (line 1) Setpoint without compensation (suction line 1) Differential (suction line 1) Dead zone NO 3.5 barg 0.3 barg ----…(**) …(**) Second line configuration NO --- NO/YES Suction lines in different boards NO --- NO/YES Type of compressors (line 2) Number of compressors (line 2) Recriprocating --3 --- RECIPROCATING/SCROLL 1…12 Ib51 Regulation type Enable integral time action Setpoint Differential Configure another suction line Dedicated pRack board for suction line Compressor type Number of compressors Number of alarms for each compressor S1…S4/INV … S1…S4 Same size Define sizes NO/YES 0.0...500.0 … NO/YES 0.0...500.0 S1…S4/INV … S1…S4 Pressure / Temperature … R22/ R134a/ R404A/ R407C/R410A/ R507A/ R290/ R600/ R600a/ R717/ R744/ R728/ R1270/ R417A/ R422D / R413A/ R422A/ R423A/ R407A/ R427A/ R245Fa/ R407F/ R32 Proportional Band / Dead Zone NO/YES …(**) …(**) Number of alarms for each compressor (line 2) 1 --- 0…4 Ib52 Modulate speed device Modulating device for first compressor (line 2) NONE --- NONE / INVERTER ---/DIGITAL SCROLL(*) Ib17 Ib20 Ib21 Ib22 Ib40 Ib41 Ib42 Ib43 Ib45 Ib50 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 68 ENG Mask index Display description Description Ib70 Compress. size Compressors sizes (line 1) UoM Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1) Default SAME SIZE & SAME PARTIAL. Yes --… NO --- S1 Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1) … … S4 S1 Enable stages and stages for compressor group 1 (line 1) YES 100 --% … … S46 Enable stages and stages for compressor group 4 (line 1) Ib60 C01 … C12 Compress. size Size for compressor 1 or presence of inverter (line 1) … Size for compressor 6 (line 1) Compressors sizes (line 1) S1 Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1) Ib61 … … … --kW --… ------kW … --kW --… ------- Ib74 Ib75 Ib76 Ib62 ----kW … --kW S4 Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1) C01 … C12 Regulation Units of measure Size for compressor 1 or presence of inverter (line 1) … Size for compressor 6 (line 1) Compressor control by temperature or pressure (line 1) Units of measure (line 1) … NO --S1 … S1 Same size Yes --… NO --S1 … S1 Pressure barg Refrigerant Type of refrigerant (suction line 1) R744 --- Regulation type Enable integral time action Setpoint Differential Dedicated pRack board for cond. line Number of fans Compressor regulation type (line 1) Enable integral time for proportional regulation of suction line (line 2) Setpoint without compensation (suction line 2) Differential (suction line 2) Suction and condensing lines on different boards, that is condensing line on dedicated board Number of fans (line 1) Dead zone NO 3.5 barg 0.3 barg ----…(**) …(**) NO --- NO/YES 3 --- 0…16 None / Inverter Phase cut-off control Pressure / Temperature … R22/ R134a/ R404A/ R407C/R410A/ R507A/ R290/ R600/ R600a/ R717/ R744/ R728/ R1270/ R417A/R422D/ R413A/ R422A/ R423A/ R407A/ R427A/ R245Fa/ R407F/ R32 Proportional Band Dead Zone NO/YES …(**) …(**) Ib80 Ib81 Ib82 Ib90 Ib91 Ib54 Modulate speed device Fan modulating device (line 1) None --- Regulation Units of measure Fan regulation by pressure or temperature (line 1) Units of measure (line 1) Pressure barg ----- Refrigerant Type of refrigerant (condensing line 1) R744 --- Regulation type Fan regulation type (line 1) Enable integral time for proportional regulation Setpoint without compensation (condens. line 1) Differential (condensing line 1) --…(**) …(**) Ib1a … Ib1e Enable integral time action Setpoint Differential Configure another condens. line Number of fans … Differential Proport. band NO 12.0 barg 2.0 barg Ic01 Type of system Type of system Ic02 Ic03 Units of measure Number of suction lines Dedicated pRack board for suction line Ib93 Ib94 Ib95 Ib96 Ic04 Ic05 Ic06 Values Same size &Same Partial. Same size & different Partial. Define sizes NO/ YES 0.0...500.0 … NO/YES 0.0...500.0 NO/YES 100; 50/100; 50/75/100; 25/50/75/100; 33/66/100 … NO/ YES S1...S4 S1…S4/INV … S1…S4 Same size / Define sizes NO/ YES 0.0...500.0 … NO/ YES 0.0...500.0 S1…S4/INV … S1…S4 Pressure / Temperature … R22/ R134a/ R404A/ R407C/R410A/ R507A/ R290/ R600/ R600a/ R717/ R744/ R728/ R1270/ R417A/R422D/ R413A/ R422A/ R423A/ R407A/ R427A/ R245Fa/ R407F/ R32 Proportional Band / Dead Zone NO/YES …(**) …(**) --- Configuration of a second condensing line NO --- NO/YES Number of fans (line 2) … Differential (condensing line 2) --… …(**) Unit of measure Number of suction lines 3 … 2.0 barg Suction + Conden. °C/barg 1 ----- 0…16 … …(**) Suction / Condenser Suction+ Condenser °C/barg / °F/psig 0…2 Suction line in separate boards NO --- NO/YES Compressor type Type of compressors (line 1) Number of compressors Number of compressors (line 1) --- Reciprocating / Scroll Number of compressors (line 2) System condensing line number Number of fans (line 1) Number of fans (line 2) Recriprocating 4 Recriprocating 0 1 4 0 --------- 1…6 0…2 0…16 0…16 Condensing lines in separate boards NO --- NO/YES pLAN boards needed for the selected configuration Save Manufacturer configuration Install Manufacturer configuration Install default Carel configuration --NO NO NO --------- --NO/YES NO/YES NO/YES Compressor type Number of compressors Ic07 Condenser line number Line 1 Ic08 Line 2 Dedicated pRack board for Ic09 cond. line Ic10 (display only) Boards needed Save configuration Id01 Load configuration Id02 Reset Carel default Type of compressors (line 2) --- --- Reciprocating / Scroll --- 1…6/12 (*) Tab. 7.j (*) According to compressor type (**) According to unit of measure selected (***) According to compressor manufacturer, refer to the related paragraph. (****) According to hardware size 69 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG 7.2 Alarm table pRack pR300T can manage both alarms relating to the status of the digital inputs and to system operation, similar to the pRack pR300. For each alarm, the following are controlled: • The actions on the devices, if necessary • The output relays (one global and two with different priorities, if configured) • The red LED on the terminal and the buzzer, where present • The type of acknowledgement (automatic, manual, semiautomatic) • Any activation delay The complete list of alarms for the pRack pR300T with the related information as described above, is reported below. Code ALA01 ALA02 ALA03 ALA04 ALA05 ALA06 ALA07 ALA08 ALA09 ALA10 ALA11 ALA12 ALA13 ALA14 ALA15 ALA16 ALA17 ALA18 ALA19 ALA20 ALA21 ALA22 ALA23 ALA24 ALA25 ALA26 ALA27 ALA28 ALA29 ALA30 ALA31 ALA32 ALA33 ALA34 ALA35 ALA36 ALA39 ALA40 ALA41 ALA42 ALA43 ALA44 ALA45 ALB01 ALB02 ALB03 Description Discharge temperature probe malfunction Discharge temperature probe malfunction External temperature probe malfunction Generic probe malfunction A, PLB1 Generic probe malfunction B, PLB1 Generic probe malfunction C, PLB1 Generic probe malfunction D, PLB1 Generic probe malfunction E, PLB1 Generic probe malfunction A, PLB2 Generic probe malfunction B, PLB2 Generic probe malfunction C, PLB2 Generic probe malfunction D, PLB2 Generic probe malfunction E, PLB2 Generic probe malfunction A, PLB3 Generic probe malfunction B, PLB3 Generic probe malfunction C, PLB3 Generic probe malfunction D, PLB3 Generic probe malfunction E, PLB3 Generic probe malfunction A, PLB4 Generic probe malfunction B, PLB4 Generic probe malfunction C, PLB4 Generic probe malfunction D, PLB4 Generic probe malfunction E, PLB4 Suction pressure probe malfunction Suction temperature probe malfunction Room temperature probe malfunction Condensing pressure probe malfunction, line 2 Discharge temperature probe malfunction, line 2 Suction pressure probe malfunction, line 2 Suction temperature probe malfunction, line 2 Gall cooler backup pressure probe malfunction Condensing pressure backup probe malfunction, line 2 Suction pressure backup probe malfunction Suction pressure backup probe malfunction, line 2 Common oil temperature probe malfunction Common oil temperature probe malfunction, line 2 Discharge temperature probe malfunction, compressors 1...6 Discharge temperature probe malfunction, compressors 1...6, line 2 Oil temperature probe malfunction, compressors 1...6, line 1 Oil temperature probe malfunction, compressor 1, line 2 Gas cooler output temperature probe malfunction CO2 receiver pressure probe malfunction Gas cooler output backup temperature probe malfunction Low suction pressure from pressure switch High condensing pressure from pressure switch Low gas cooler output temperature from probe ALB04 High gas cooler output temperature from probe ALB05 ALB06 ALB07 ALB08 ALB09 ALB10 ALB11 ALB12 ALB13 ALB14 ALB15 ALB16 ALB17 ALB18 ALB21 ALB22 ALC01 ALC02 ALC03 ALC04 ALC05 ALC06 ALC07 ALC08 ALC09 ALC10 ALC11 ALC12 ALC13 ALC14 ALC15 ALC16 ALC17 Liquid level Common oil differential Common fan circuit breaker Low suction pressure from pressure switch. line 2 High condensing pressure from pressure switch. line 2 Low condensing pressure from probe, line 2 High condensing pressure from probe, line 2 Liquid level, line 2 Common oil differential, line 2 Common fan circuit breaker, line 2 High suction pressure from probe Low suction pressure from probe High suction pressure from probe, line 2 Low suction pressure from probe, line 2 Shutdown to prevent high pressure Shutdown to prevent high pressure, line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 1 Alarm 2, compressor 1 Alarm 3, compressor 1 Alarm 4, compressor 1 Alarm 5, compressor 1 Alarm 6, compressor 1 Alarm 7, compressor 1 Alarm 1, compressor 2 Alarm 2, compressor 2 Alarm 3, compressor 2 Alarm 4, compressor 2 Alarm 5, compressor 2 Alarm 6, compressor 2 Alarm 7, compressor 2 Alarm 1, compressor 3 Alarm 2, compressor 3 Alarm 3, compressor 3 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 Reset Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Semiautomatic Man./Autom. Automatic Delay 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s Config. Config. Settable Automatic Settable R1 Automatic Automatic Automatic Semiautomatic Man./Autom. Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Manual Manual Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. R2 R2 Config. R1 R1 R1 R1 R2 R2 Config. R1 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1 Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. 70 Alarm relay R2 R1 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R1 R2 R2 R1 R2 R1 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R1 R1 R1 Action Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Shutdown compressors Shutdown compressors Fan forcing at 0% Fan forcing at 100% and shutdown compres. Shutdown compressors, line 2 Shutdown compressors, line 2 Shutdown compressors Shutdown compressors, line 2 Shutdown compressor 1 Shutdown compressor 1 Shutdown compressor 1 Shutdown compressor 1 Shutdown compressor 1 Shutdown compressor 1 Shutdown compressor 1 Shutdown compressor 2 Shutdown compressor 2 Shutdown compressor 2 Shutdown compressor 2 Shutdown compressor 2 Shutdown compressor 2 Shutdown compressor 2 Shutdown compressor 3 Shutdown compressor 3 Shutdown compressor 3 ENG Code ALC18 ALC19 ALC20 ALC21 ALC22 ALC23 ALC24 ALC25 ALC26 ALC27 ALC28 ALC29 ALC30 ALC31 ALC32 ALC33 ALC34 ALC35 ALC36 ALC37 ALC38 ALC39 ALC40 ALC41 ALC42 ALC43 ALC44 ALC45 ALC46 ALC47 ALC48 ALC49 ALC50 ALC51 ALC52 ALC53 ALC54 ALC55 ALC56 ALC57 ALC58 ALC59 ALC60 ALC61 ALC62 ALC63 ALC64 ALC65 ALC66 ALC67 ALC68 ALC69 ALC70 ALC71 ALC72 ALC73 ALC74 ALC75 ALC76 ALC77 ALC78 ALC79 ALC80 ALC81 ALC82 ALC83 ALC84 ALC85 ALC86 ALC87 ALC88 ALC89 ALC90 ALC91 ALC92 ALC93 ALC94 ALC95 ALC96 ALC97 ALC98 ALC99 ALCaa ALCab ALCac ALCad ALCae ALCaf ALCag ALCah ALCai ALCal ALCam AlCan Description Alarm 4, compressor 3 Alarm 5, compressor 3 Alarm 6, compressor 3 Alarm 7, compressor 3 Alarm 1, compressor 4 Alarm 2, compressor 4 Alarm 3, compressor 4 Alarm 4, compressor 4 Alarm 5, compressor 4 Alarm 6, compressor 4 Alarm 7, compressor 4 Alarm 1, compressor 5 Alarm 2, compressor 5 Alarm 3, compressor 5 Alarm 4, compressor 5 Alarm 6, compressor 5 Alarm 7, compressor 5 Alarm 7, compressor 5 Alarm 1, compressor 6 Alarm 2, compressor 6 Alarm 3, compressor 6 Alarm 4, compressor 6 Alarm 5, compressor 6 Alarm 6, compressor 6 Alarm 7, compressor 6 Alarm 1, compressor 7 Alarm 2, compressor 7 Alarm 1, compressor 8 Alarm 2, compressor 8 Alarm 1, compressor 9 Alarm 2, compressor 9 Alarm 1, compressor 10 Alarm 1, compressor 11 Alarm 1, compressor 12 Alarm 1, compressor 1, line 2 Alarm 2, compressor 1, line 2 Alarm 3, compressor 1, line 2 Alarm 4, compressor 1, line 2 Alarm 5, compressor 1, line 2 Alarm 6, compressor 1, line 2 Alarm 7, compressor 1, line 2 Alarm 2, compressor 1, line 2 Alarm 2, compressor 2, line 2 Alarm 3, compressor 2, line 2 Alarm 4, compressor 2, line 2 Alarm 5, compressor 2, line 2 Alarm 6, compressor 2, line 2 Alarm 7, compressor 2, line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 3, line 2 Alarm 2, compressor 3, line 2 Alarm 3, compressor 3, line 2 Alarm 4, compressor 3, line 2 Alarm 5, compressor 3, line 2 Alarm 6, compressor 3, line 2 Alarm 7, compressor 3, line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 4, line 2 Alarm 2, compressor 4, line 2 Alarm 3, compressor 4, line 2 Alarm 4, compressor 4, line 2 Alarm 5, compressor 4, line 2 Alarm 6, compressor 4, line 2 Alarm 7, compressor 4, line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 5, line 2 Alarm 2, compressor 5, line 2 Alarm 3, compressor 5, line 2 Alarm 4, compressor 5, line 2 Alarm 5, compressor 5, line 2 Alarm 6, compressor 5, line 2 Alarm 7, compressor 5, line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 6, line 2 Alarm 2, compressor 6, line 2 Alarm 3, compressor 6, line 2 Alarm 4, compressor 6, line 2 Alarm 5, compressor 6, line 2 Alarm 6, compressor 6, line 2 Alarm 7, compressor 6, line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 7, line 2 Alarm 2, compressor 7, line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 8, line 2 Alarm 2, compressor 8, line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 9, line 2 Alarm 2, compressor 9, line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 10, line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 11, line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 12, line 2 High oil sump temperature, Digital Scroll™ High discharge temperature, Digital Scroll™ High oil dilution, Digital Scroll™ High oil sump temperature, Digital Scroll™, line 2 High discharge temperature, Digital Scroll™, line 2 High oil dilution, Digital Scroll™, line 2 High discharge temperature, compressors 1...6 High discharge temperature, compressors 1...6, line 2 Compressor envelope Reset Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Automatic Automatic Manual 71 Delay Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. 60 s 60 s Config. Alarm relay Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R1 Action Shutdown compressor 3 Shutdown compressor 3 Shutdown compressor 3 Shutdown compressor 3 Shutdown compressor 4 Shutdown compressor 4 Shutdown compressor 4 Shutdown compressor 4 Shutdown compressor 4 Shutdown compressor 4 Shutdown compressor 5 Shutdown compressor 5 Shutdown compressor 5 Shutdown compressor 5 Shutdown compressor 5 Shutdown compressor 5 Shutdown compressor 5 Shutdown compressor 5 Shutdown compressor 6 Shutdown compressor 6 Shutdown compressor 6 Shutdown compressor 6 Shutdown compressor 6 Shutdown compressor 6 Shutdown compressor 6 Shutdown compressor 7 Shutdown compressor 7 Shutdown compressor 8 Shutdown compressor 8 Shutdown compressor 9 Shutdown compressor 9 Shutdown compressor 10 Shutdown compressor 11 Shutdown compressor 12 Shutdown compressor 1, line 2 Shutdown compressor 1, line 2 Shutdown compressor 1, line 2 Shutdown compressor 1, line 2 Shutdown compressor 1, line 2 Shutdown compressor 1, line 2 Shutdown compressor 1, line 2 Shutdown compressor 2, line 2 Shutdown compressor 2, line 2 Shutdown compressor 2, line 2 Shutdown compressor 2, line 2 Shutdown compressor 2, line 2 Shutdown compressor 2, line 2 Shutdown compressor 2, line 2 Shutdown compressor 3, line 2 Shutdown compressor 3, line 2 Shutdown compressor 3, line 2 Shutdown compressor 3, line 2 Shutdown compressor 3, line 2 Shutdown compressor 3, line 2 Shutdown compressor 3, line 2 Shutdown compressor 4, line 2 Shutdown compressor 4, line 2 Shutdown compressor 4, line 2 Shutdown compressor 4, line 2 Shutdown compressor 4, line 2 Shutdown compressor 4, line 2 Shutdown compressor 4, line 2 Shutdown compressor 5, line 2 Shutdown compressor 5, line 2 Shutdown compressor 5, line 2 Shutdown compressor 5, line 2 Shutdown compressor 5, line 2 Shutdown compressor 5, line 2 Shutdown compressor 5, line 2 Shutdown compressor 6, line 2 Shutdown compressor 6, line 2 Shutdown compressor 6, line 2 Shutdown compressor 6, line 2 Shutdown compressor 6, line 2 Shutdown compressor 6, line 2 Shutdown compressor 6, line 2 Shutdown compressor 7, line 2 Shutdown compressor 7, line 2 Shutdown compressor 8, line 2 Shutdown compressor 8, line 2 Shutdown compressor 9, line 2 Shutdown compressor 9, line 2 Shutdown compressor 10, line 2 Shutdown compressor 11, line 2 Shutdown compressor 12, line 2 Shutdown compressor Shutdown compressor Shutdown compressor Shutdown compressor Shutdown compressor Shutdown compressor Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Shutdown compressors pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Code ALCao AlCap ALCaq ALCar ALF01 ALF02 ALG01 ALG02 ALG11 ALG12 ALG13 ALG14 ALG15 ALG16 ALG17 ALG18 ALG19 ALG20 ALG21 ALG22 ALG23 ALG24 ALG25 ALG26 ALG27 ALG28 ALG29 ALG30 ALG31 ALG32 ALG33 ALG34 ALH01 ALH02 ALO02 ALT01 ALT02 ALT03 ALT04 ALT07 ALT08 ALT09 ALT10 ALT11 ALT12 ALT13 ALT14 ALT15 ALT16 ALT17 ALT18 ALU01 ALU02 ALW01 Description High compressor oil temperature, line 1 High compressor oil temperature, line 2 High compressor oil temperature, from 1 to 6 Low compressor oil temperature, from 1 to 6 Fan circuit breaker Fan circuit breaker, line 2 Clock error Extended memory error Generic high temperature alarms 1...5, PLB1 Generic high temperature alarms 1...5, PLB2 Generic high temperature alarms 1...5, PLB3 Generic high temperature alarms 1...5, PLB4 Generic low temperature alarms 1...5, PLB1 Generic low temperature alarms 1...5, PLB2 Generic low temperature alarms 1...5, PLB3 Generic low temperature alarms 1...5, PLB4 Generic high modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB1 Generic high modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB2 Generic high modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB3 Generic high modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB4 Generic low modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB1 Generic low modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB2 Generic low modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB3 Generic low modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB4 Normal alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB1 Serious alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB1 Normal alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB2 Serious alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB2 Normal alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB3 Serious alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB3 Normal alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB4 Serious alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB4 ChillBooster fault ChillBooster fault, line 2 pLan malfunction Compressor maintenance request Compressor maintenance request, line 2 ChillBooster maintenance request ChillBooster maintenance request, line 2 HPV valve alarm RPRV valve alarm Oil compressor alarm 1 Oil compressor alarm 2 Oil compressor alarm 3 Oil compressor alarm 4 Oil compressor alarm 5 Oil compressor alarm 6 Low superheat alarm Low superheat alarm, line 2 HPV valve opening different from setpoint warning Receiver high pressure Configuration not allowed Control probes missing High pressure prevent warning Reset Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Automatic Automatic Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Man./Autom. Automatic Automatic Automatic Manual Manual Manual Manual Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Settable Settable Automatic Settable Automatic Automatic Automatic Delay Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. 60 s 0s 0s Settable Settable Settable Settable Settable Settable Settable Settable Settable Not present Not present Config. Alarm relay R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. Config. R2 R2 R1 Not present Not present Not present Not present R2 R2 Not featured Not featured Not featured Not featured Not featured Not featured R1 R1 Not featured R1 Not present Not present Not present Action Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Shutdown fans Shutdown fans Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Disable ChillBooster Disable ChillBooster Shutdown unit Safety procedure activation Safety procedure activation Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Related functions disabled Shutdown compressors, line 1 Shutdown compressors, line 2 Shutdown compr., line 1 (can be enabled) Shutdown unit Shutdown unit Shutdown compr., except min. load stage Shutdown compr., line 2, except min. load stage Depends on the “Probe SX alarm management” parameter ALW02 High pressure prevent warning, line 2 Automatic Config. Not present ALW03 ALW04 ALW05 ALW06 ALW07 ALW08 ALW09 ALW10 ALW11 ALW12 ALW13 ALW14 ALW15 ALW16 ALW17 Compressor inverter warning Compressor inverter warning, line 2 Fan inverter warning Fan inverter warning, line 2 Envelope warning: refrigerant not compatible with compressor series Envelope warning: custom envelope not configured Envelope warning: suction or condensing probes not configured Low superheat warning Low superheat warning, line 2 Warning, ChillBooster operating without external probe Warning, ChillBooster operating without external probe, line 2 Warning, probe type configured not allowed Warning, error during autoconfiguration Warning oil receiver levels not configured correctly, line 1 Warning oil receiver levels not configured correctly, line 2 Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present 0s 0s Not present Not present - Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present Not present R2 R2 ALW18 Probe SX fault Automatic Not present Not present ALW19 EEPROM damaged Not present Not present Total shutdown ALW20 ALW21 Valve motor error Driver OFFLINE Not present 5s Not present Not present Interruption Shutdown unit ALW22 Battery discharged Not present Not present No effect Replace the driver/Contact service automatic manual Replace the battery Tab. 7.a pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 72 ENG 7.3 I/O Table The list of pRack pR300T inputs and outputs is reported below. Other functions Stage in high pressure Line 1 Suction Digital inputs Mask index Ac05, Baack Baa56, Caaah Baada, Caa14 Baa02, Caa01 Baa03, Caa02 Baa04, Caa03 Baa05, Caa04 Baa06, Caa05 Baa07, Caa06 Baa08. Caa07 Baa09, Caa15 Baa10, Caa16 Baa11, Caa17 Baa12, Caa18 Baa13, Caa19 Baa14, Caa20 Baa15, Caa21 Baa17, Caa28 Baa18, Caa29 Baa19, Caa30 Baa20, Caa31 Baa21, Caa32 Baa22, Caa33 Baa23, Caa34 Baa24, Caa40 Baa25, Caa41 Baa26, Caa42 Baa27, Caa43 Baa28, Caa44 Baa29, Caa45 Baa30, Caa46 Baa32, Caa53 Baa33, Caa54 Baa34, Caa55 Baa35, Caa56 Baa36, Caa57 Baa37, Caa58 Baa38, Caa59 Baa39, Caa65 Baa40, Caa66 Baa41, Caa67 Baa42, Caa68 Baa43, Caa69 Baa44, Caa70 Baa45, Caa71 Baa47, Caa78 Baa48, Caa79 Baa49, Caa84 Baa50, Caa85 Baa51, Caa90 Baa52, Caa91 Baa53, Caa95 Baa54, Caa99 Baa55, Caaad Baa58, Caaaj Baa59, Caaak Baadc Baa57, Daa50 Baadf, Daa51 Baaau, Daa01 Baaav, Daa02 Baaaw, Daa03 Baaax, Daa04 Baaay, Daa05 Baaaz, Daa06 Baaba, Daa07 Baabb, Daa08 Baabc, Daa09 Baabd, Daa10 Baabe, Daa11 Baabf, Daa12 Baabg, Daa13 Baabh, Daa14 Baabi, Daa15 Baabj, Daa16 Baabk, Daa17 Baabl Baacn Baacx, Egaa01 Baacl, Caa00, Dad08 Daa52 Daa53 Eeaa02 Baade, Eia04 Baadf, Eia05 Eaaa55 Description ON/OFF unit, line 1 Common low pressure switch, line 1 Compressor inverter warning, line 1 Alarm 1 compressor 1, line 1 Alarm 2, compressor 1, line 1 Alarm 3, compressor 1 line 1 Alarm 4, compressor 1 line 1 Alarm 5, compressor 1 line 1 Alarm 6, compressor 1 line 1 Alarm 7, compressor 1 line 1 Alarm 1, compressor 2, line 1 Alarm 2, compressor 2, line 1 Alarm 3, compressor 2, line 1 Alarm 4, compressor 2, line 1 Alarm 5, compressor 2, line 1 Alarm 6, compressor 2, line 1 Alarm 7, compressor 2, line 1 Alarm 1, compressor 3 line 1 Alarm 2, compressor 3, line 1 Alarm 3, compressor 3 line 1 Alarm 4, compressor 3 line 1 Alarm 5, compressor 3 line 1 Alarm 6, compressor 3 line 1 Alarm 7, compressor 3 line 1 Alarm 1, compressor 4 line 1 Alarm 2, compressor 4, line 1 Alarm 3, compressor 4 line 1 Alarm 4, compressor 4 line 1 Alarm 5, compressor 4 line 1 Alarm 6, compressor 4 line 1 Alarm 7, compressor 4 line 1 Alarm 1, compressor 5 line 1 Alarm 2, compressor 5, line 1 Alarm 3, compressor 5 line 1 Alarm 4, compressor 5 line 1 Alarm 5, compressor 5 line 1 Alarm 6, compressor 5 line 1 Alarm 7, compressor 5 line 1 Alarm 1, compressor 6 line 1 Alarm 2, compressor 6, line 1 Alarm 3, compressor 6 line 1 Alarm 4, compressor 6 line 1 Alarm 5, compressor 6 line 1 Alarm 6, compressor 6 line 1 Alarm 7, compressor 6 line 1 Alarm 1, compressor 7 line 1 Alarm 2, compressor 7 line 1 Alarm 1, compressor 8 line 1 Alarm 2, compressor 8 line 1 Alarm 1, compressor 9 line 1 Alarm 2, compressor 9 line 1 Alarm 1, compressor 10 line 1 Alarm 1, compressor 11 line 1 Alarm 1, compressor 12 line 1 Common oil alarm, line 1 Liquid level alarm, line 1 Fan inverter warning, line 1 Common high pressure switch, line 1 High pressure prevention, line 1 Fan circuit breaker 1, line 1 Fan circuit breaker 2, line 1 Fan circuit breaker 3, line 1 Fan circuit breaker 4, line 1 Fan circuit breaker 5, line 1 Fan circuit breaker 6, line 1 Fan circuit breaker 7, line 1 Fan circuit breaker 8, line 1 Fan circuit breaker 9, line 1 Fan circuit breaker 10, line 1 Fan circuit breaker 11, line 1 Fan circuit breaker 12, line 1 Fan circuit breaker 13, line 1 Fan circuit breaker 14, line 1 Fan circuit breaker 15, line 1 Fan circuit breaker 16, line 1 Common fan circuit breaker, line 1 Heat recovery, line 1 pRack automatic or manual operation status ChillBooster fault, line 1 Setpoint compensation, line 1 Anti noise, line 1 Split condenser, line 1 Heat recovery activation, line 1 HPV alarm RPRV alarm Maximum receiver oil level, line 1 73 Channel Logic Notes pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Other functions Other functions Condenser Line 2 Suction Line 1 Digital inputs Mask index Eaaa56 Eaaa57 Eaaa58 Eaaa59 Eaaa60 Eaaa61 Eaaa62 Ac08, Baacy Baaap, Cbaah Baadb, Cba14 Baaar, Cbaaj Baa61, Cba01 Baa62, Cba02 Baa63, Cba03 Baa64, Cba04 Baa65, Cba05 Baa66, Cba06 Baa67, Cba07 Baa68, Cba15 Baa69, Cba16 Baa70, Cba17 Baa71, Cba18 Baa72, Cba19 Baa73, Cba20 Baa74, Cba21 Baa76, Cba28 Baa77, Cba29 Baa78, Cba30 Baa79, Cba31 Baa80, Cba32 Baa81, Cba33 Baa82, Cba34 Baa83, Cba40 Baa84, Cba41 Baa85, Cba42 Baa86, Cba43 Baa87, Cba44 Baa88, Cba45 Baa89, Cba46 Baa91, Cba53 Baa92, Cba54 Baa93, Cba55 Baa94, Cba56 Baa95, Cba57 Baa96, Cba58 Baa97, Cba59 Baa98, Cba65 Baa99, cba66 Baaaa, Cba67 Baaab, Cba68 Baaac, Cba69 Baaad, Cba70 Baaae, Cba71 Baaag, Cba78 Baaah, Cba79 Baaai, Cba84 Baaaj, Cba85 Baaak, Cba90 Baaal, Cba91 Baaam, Cba95 Baaan, Cba99 Baaao, Cbaad Baaas, Cbaak Baadd Baaaq Baabn, Dba01 Baabo, Dba02 Baabp, Dba03 Baabq, Dba04 Baabr, Dba05 Baabs, Dba06 Baabt, Dba07 Baabu, Dba08 Baabv, Dba09 Baabw, Dba10 Baabx, Dba11 Baaby, Dba12 Baabz, Dba13 Baaca, Dba14 Baacb, Dba15 Baacc, Dba16 Baacd, Dba17 Baace Baadg, Egba01 Baade Baacm, Cbd06, Dbd08 Baacn Dba52 Dba53 Eeba02 Description Minimum receiver oil level, line 1 Oil level compressor 1 line 1 Oil level compressor 2 line 1 Oil level compressor 3 line 1 Oil level compressor 4 line 1 Oil level compressor 5 line 1 Oil level compressor 6 line 1 ON/OFF unit, line 2 Common low pressure switch, line 2 Compressor inverter warning, line 2 Common oil alarm, line 2 Alarm 1 compressor 1, line 2 Alarm 2, compressor 1 line 2 Alarm 3, compressor 1 line 2 Alarm 4, compressor 1 line 2 Alarm 5, compressor 1 line 2 Alarm 6, compressor 1 line 2 Alarm 7, compressor 1 line 2 Alarm 1 compressor 2, line 2 Alarm 2, compressor 2 line 2 Alarm 3, compressor 2 line 2 Alarm 4, compressor 2 line 2 Alarm 5, compressor 2 line 2 Alarm 6, compressor 2 line 2 Alarm 7, compressor 2 line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 3 line 2 Alarm 2, compressor 3 line 2 Alarm 3, compressor 3 line 2 Alarm 4, compressor 3 line 2 Alarm 5, compressor 3 line 2 Alarm 6, compressor 3 line 2 Alarm 7, compressor 3 line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 4 line 2 Alarm 2, compressor 4 line 2 Alarm 3, compressor 4 line 2 Alarm 4, compressor 4 line 2 Alarm 5, compressor 4 line 2 Alarm 6, compressor 4 line 2 Alarm 7, compressor 4 line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 3 line 2 Alarm 2, compressor 3 line 2 Alarm 3, compressor 3 line 2 Alarm 4, compressor 3 line 2 Alarm 5, compressor 3 line 2 Alarm 6, compressor 3 line 2 Alarm 7, compressor 3 line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 4 line 2 Alarm 2, compressor 4 line 2 Alarm 3, compressor 4 line 2 Alarm 4, compressor 4 line 2 Alarm 5, compressor 4 line 2 Alarm 6, compressor 4 line 2 Alarm 7, compressor 4 line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 7 line 2 Alarm 2, compressor 7 line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 8 line 2 Alarm 2, compressor 8 line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 9 line 2 Alarm 2, compressor 9 line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 10 line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 11 line 2 Alarm 1, compressor 12 line 2 Liquid level alarm, line 2 Fan inverter warning, line 2 Common high pressure switch, line 2 Fan circuit breaker 1, line 2 Fan circuit breaker 2, line 2 Fan circuit breaker 3, line 2 Fan circuit breaker 4, line 2 Fan circuit breaker 5, line 2 Fan circuit breaker 6, line 2 Fan circuit breaker 7, line 2 Fan circuit breaker 8, line 2 Fan circuit breaker 9, line 2 Fan circuit breaker 10, line 2 Fan circuit breaker 11, line 2 Fan circuit breaker 12, line 2 Fan circuit breaker 13, line 2 Fan circuit breaker 14, line 2 Fan circuit breaker 15, line 2 Fan circuit breaker 16, line 2 Common fan circuit breaker, line 2 Heat recovery, line 2 ChillBooster fault, line 2 Enable floating condenser, line 2 Setpoint compensation, line 2 pRack automatic or manual operation status Anti noise, line 2 Split condenser, line 2 Heat recovery activation, line 2 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 74 Channel Logic Notes ENG Line 2 Other functions Board Generic F. Digital inputs Mask index Eaba15 Eaba16 Eaba17 Eaba18 Eaba19 Eaba20 Eaba21 Eaba22 Baacf, Efe16 Baacg, Efe17 Baach, Efe18 Baaci, Efe19 Baacj, Efe20 Description Maximum receiver oil level, line 2 Minimum receiver oil level, line 2 Oil level compressor 1 line 2 Oil level compressor 2 line 2 Oil level compressor 3 line 2 Oil level compressor 4 line 2 Oil level compressor 5 line 2 Oil level compressor 6 line 2 DI generic input F DI generic input G DI generic input H DI generic input I DI generic input J Channel Logic Notes Tab. 7.b Digital outputs Mask index Bac02, Caa08 Bac03, Caa09 Bac04, Caa10 Bac05, Caa11 Bac07, Caa12 Bac08, Caa22 Bac10, Caa23 Bac11, Caa24 Bac12, Caa25 Bac13, Caa26 Bac15, Caa35 Bac16, Caa36 Bac17, Caa37 Bac18, Caa38 Bac20, Caa39 Bac21, Caa47 Suction Bac22, Caa48 Bac23, Caa49 Bac24, Caa50 Bac26, Caa51 Bac28, Caa60 Line 1 Bac29, Caa61 Bac30, Caa62 Bac31, Caa63 Bac33, Caa64 Bac34, Caa72 Bac35, Caa73 Bac36, Caa74 Bac37, Caa75 Bac39, Caa76 Bac41, Caa80 Bac42, Caa81 Bac43, Caa82 Bac45, Caa83 Bac46, Caa86 Bac47, Caa87 Bac48, Caa88 Bac50, Caa89 Bac51, Caa92 Bac52, Caa93 Bac55, Caa94 Bac56, Caa96 Suction Bac57, Caa97 Bac60, Caa98 Bac61, Caaaa Bac62, Caaab Bac65, Caaac Bac66, Caaae Bac67, Caaaf Bac70, Caaag Description Line relay compressor 1 line 1 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 1 line 1 Delta relay compressor 1 line 1 Valve 1, compressor 1 line 1 Valve 2, compressor 1 line 1 Valve 3, compressor 1 line 1 Equalization valve compressor 1 line 1 Line relay compressor 2 line 1 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 2 line 1 Delta relay compressor 2 line 1 Valve 1, compressor 2 line 1 Valve 2, compressor 1 line 1 Valve 3, compressor 1 line 1 Equalization valve compressor 1 line 1 Line relay compressor 3 line 1 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 3 line 1 Delta relay compressor 3 line 1 Valve 1, compressor 3 line 1 Valve 2, compressor 3 line 1 Valve 3, compressor 3 line 1 Equalization valve compressor 3 line 1 Line relay compressor 4 line 1 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 4 line 1 Delta relay compressor 4 line 1 Valve 1, compressor 4 line 1 Valve 2, compressor 4 line 1 Valve 3, compressor 4 line 1 Equalization valve compressor 4 line 1 Line relay compressor 5 line 1 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 5 line 1 Delta relay compressor 5 line 1 Valve 1, compressor 5 line 1 Valve 2, compressor 5 line 1 Valve 3, compressor 5 line 1 Equalization valve compressor 5 line 1 Line relay compressor 6 line 1 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 6 line 1 Delta relay compressor 6 line 1 Valve 1, compressor 6 line 1 Valve 2, compressor 6 line 1 Valve 3, compressor 6 line 1 Equalization valve compressor 6 line 1 Line relay compressor 7 line 1 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 7 line 1 Delta relay compressor 7 line 1 Valve 1, compressor 7 line 1 Valve 2, compressor 7 line 1 Equalization valve compressor 7 line 1 Line relay compressor 8 line 1 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 8 line 1 Delta relay compressor 8 line 1 Valve 1, compressor 8 line 1 Valve 2, compressor 8 line 1 Equalization valve compressor 8 line 1 Line relay compressor 9 line 1 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 9 line 1 Delta relay compressor 9 line 1 Valve 1, compressor 9 line 1 Equalization valve compressor 9 line 1 Line relay compressor 10 line 1 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 10 line 1 Delta relay compressor 10 line 1 Valve 1, compressor 10 line 1 Equalization valve compressor 10 line 1 Line relay compressor 11 line 1 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 11 line 1 Delta relay compressor 11 line 1 Valve 1, compressor 11 line 1 Equalization valve compressor 11 line 1 Line relay compressor 12 line 1 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 12 line 1 Delta relay compressor 12 line 1 Valve 1, compressor 12 line 1 Equalization valve compressor 12 line 1 75 Channel Logic Notes pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Other functions Other functions Line 1 Condenser Digital outputs Mask index Bacbt, Daa21 Bacbu, Daa22 Bacbv, Daa23 Bacbw, Daa24 Bacbx, Daa25 Bacby, Daa26 Bacbz, Daa27 Bacca, Daa28 Baccb, Daa29 Baccc, Daa30 Baccd, Daa31 Bacce, Daa32 Baccf, Daa33 Baccg, Daa34 Bacch, Daa35 Bacci, Daa36 Bacck, Eeaa03 Baccl, Egaa02 Bacdp, Eaaa11 Bacdq, Eaaa12 Bacdr, Eaaa13 Bacdv, Ecaa07, Edaa07 Bacdw, Ecaa08, Edaa08 Bacdx, Ecaa09, Edaa09 Bacdy, Ecaa10, Edaa10 Bacdz, Ecaa11, Edaa11 Bacea, Ecaa12, Edaa12 Bacei Bacej Bacek, Ebaa01 Eaaa40 Eaaa41 Eaaa42 Eaaa43 Eaaa44 Eaaa45 Bac71 Eaaa16 Eaaa19 Eaaa22 Eaaa25 Eaaa28 Eaaa31 Eaaa54 Ebaa01 Baceh Bacem Bacen Bac73, Cba08 Bac74, Cba09 Bac75, Cba10 Bac76, Cba11 Bac78, Cba12 Bac79, Cba22 Bac80, Cba23 Bac81, Cba24 Bac82, Cba25 Bac84, Cba26 Suction Line 2 Bac86, Cba35 Bac87, Cba36 Bac88, Cba37 Bac89, Cba38 Bac91, Cba39 Bac92, Cba47 Bac94, Cba48 Bac95, Cba49 Bac96, Cba50 Bac98, Cba51 Bacaa, Cba60 Bacab, Cba61 Bacac, Cba62 Bacad, Cba63 Bacaf, Cba64 Bacag, Cba72 Bacah, Cba73 Bacai, Cba74 Bacaj, Cba75 Description Fan 1 line 1 Fan 2 line 1 Fan 3 line 1 Fan 4 line 1 Fan 5 line 1 Fan 6 line 1 Fan 7 line 1 Fan 8 line 1 Fan 9 line 1 Fan 10 line 1 Fan 11 line 1 Fan 12 line 1 Fan 13 line 1 Fan 14 line 1 Fan 15 line 1 Fan 16 line 1 Heat recovery pump, line 1 ChillBooster line 1 Oil pump 1 line 1 Oil pump 2 line 1 Oil fan 1 line 1 Liquid injection valve / Economizer compressor 1 line 1 Liquid injection valve / Economizer compressor 2 line 1 Liquid injection valve / Economizer compressor 3 line 1 Liquid injection valve / Economizer compressor 4 line 1 Liquid injection valve / Economizer compressor 5 line 1 Liquid injection valve / Economizer compressor 6 line 1 Forcing from BMS, line 1 Non return of liquid, line 1 Subcooling, line 1 Oil level valve compressor 1 line 1 Oil level valve compressor 2 line 1 Oil level valve compressor 3 line 1 Oil level valve compressor 4 line 1 Oil level valve compressor 5 line 1 Oil level valve compressor 6 line 1 Oil receiver line 1 Oil cooling compressor 1 line 1 Oil cooling compressor 2 line 1 Oil cooling compressor 3 line 1 Oil cooling compressor 4 line 1 Oil cooling compressor 5 line 1 Oil cooling compressor 6 line 1 Common oil level valve line 2 Subcooling valve (line 1) Sign of life Normal alarm Serious alarm Line relay compressor 1 line 2 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 1 line 2 Delta relay compressor 1 line 2 Valve 1, compressor 1 line 2 Valve 2, compressor 1 line 2 Valve 3, compressor 1 line 2 Equalization valve compressor 1 line 2 Line relay compressor 2 line 2 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 2 line 2 Delta relay compressor 2 line 2 Valve 1, compressor 2 line 2 Valve 2, compressor 1 line 2 Valve 3, compressor 1 line 2 Equalization valve compressor 1 line 2 Line relay compressor 3 line 2 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 3 line 2 Delta relay compressor 3 line 2 Valve 1, compressor 3 line 2 Valve 2, compressor 3 line 2 Valve 3, compressor 3 line 2 Equalization valve compressor 3 line 2 Line relay compressor 4 line 2 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 4 line 2 Delta relay compressor 4 line 2 Valve 1, compressor 4 line 2 Valve 2, compressor 4 line 2 Valve 3, compressor 4 line 2 Equalization valve compressor 4 line 2 Line relay compressor 5 line 2 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 5 line 2 Delta relay compressor 5 line 2 Valve 1, compressor 5 line 2 Valve 2, compressor 5 line 2 Valve 3, compressor 5 line 2 Equalization valve compressor 5 line 2 Line relay compressor 6 line 2 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 6 line 2 Delta relay compressor 6 line 2 Valve 1, compressor 6 line 2 Valve 2, compressor 6 line 2 Valve 3, compressor 6 line 2 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 76 Channel Logic Notes ENG Digital outputs Mask index Bacal, Cba76 Bacan, Cba80 Bacao, Cba81 Bacap, Cba82 Bacar, Cba83 Bacas Cba86 Bacat, Cba87 Bacau, Cba88 Bacaw, Cba89 Suction Bacax, Cba92 Bacay, Cba93 Bacbb, Cba94 Bacbc, Cba96 Bacbd, Cba97 Bacbg, Cba98 Bacbh, Cbaaa Bacbi, Cbaab Bacbl, Cbaac Other functions Line 2 Other functions Condenser Line 2 Bacbm, Cbaae Bacbn, Cbaaf Bacbq, Cbaag Baccn, Dba20 Bacco, Dba21 Baccp, Dba22 Baccq, Dba23 Baccr, Dba24 Baccs, Dba25 Bacct, Dba26 Baccu, Dba27 Baccv, Dba28 Baccw, Dba29 Baccx, Dba30 Baccy, Dba31 Baccz, Dba32 Bacda, Dba33 Bacdb, Dba34 Bacdc, Dba35 Bacdd, Dba36 Bacde, Eeba03 Bacdf, Egba02 Bacds, Eaba10 Bacdt, Eaba11 Bacdu, Eaba12 Baceb, Ecba07, Edba07 Bacec, Ebca08, Edba08 Baced, Ecba09, Edba09 Bacee, Ecba10, Edba10 Bacef, Ecba11, Edba11 Baceg, Ecba12, Edba12 Bac72 Bacep Bacel, Ebbb01 Eaba23 Eaba40 Eaba41 Eaba42 Eaba43 Eaba44 Eaba45 Ebaa01 Baceo Bacdg, Efe21 Bacdh, Efe22 Bacdi, Efe23 Bacdj, Efe24 Bacdk, Efe25 Bacdl Bacdm, Efe26 Bacdn, Efe27 Bacdo, Efe28 Description Equalization valve compressor 6 line 2 Line relay compressor 7 line 2 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 7 line 2 Delta relay compressor 7 line 2 Valve 1, compressor 7 line 2 Valve 2, compressor 7 line 2 Equalization valve compressor 7 line 2 Line relay compressor 8 line 2 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 8 line 2 Delta relay compressor 8 line 2 Valve 1, compressor 8 line 2 Valve 2, compressor 8 line 2 Equalization valve compressor 8 line 2 Line relay compressor 9 line 2 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 9 line 2 Delta relay compressor 9 line 2 Valve 1, compressor 9 line 2 Equalization valve compressor 9 line 2 Line relay compressor 10 line 2 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 10 line 2 Delta relay compressor 12 line 2 Valve 1, compressor 10 line 2 Equalization valve compressor 10 line 2 Line relay compressor 11 line 2 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 11 line 2 Delta relay compressor 11 line 2 Valve 1, compressor 11 line 2 Equalization valve compressor 11 line 2 Line relay compressor 12 line 2 Partwinding/ Star relay compressor 12 line 2 Delta relay compressor 12 line 2 Valve 1, compressor 12 line 2 Equalization valve compressor 12 line 2 Fan 1 line 2 Fan 2 line 2 Fan 3 line 2 Fan 4 line 2 Fan 5 line 2 Fan 6 line 2 Fan 7 line 2 Fan 8 line 2 Fan 9 line 2 Fan 10 line 2 Fan 11 line 2 Fan 12 line 2 Fan 13 line 2 Fan 14 line 2 Fan 15 line 2 Fan 16 line 2 Fan inverter warning, line 1 Heat recovery pump, line 2 ChillBooster line 2 Oil pump 1 line 2 Oil pump 2 line 2 Oil fan line 2 Liquid injection valve compressor 1 line 2 Liquid injection valve compressor 2 line 2 Liquid injection valve compressor 3 line 2 Liquid injection valve compressor 4 line 2 Liquid injection valve compressor 5 line 2 Liquid injection valve compressor 6 line 2 Non return of liquid, line 2 Forcing from BMS, line 2 Subcooling, line 2 Common oil level valve line 2 Oil level valve compressor 1 line 2 Oil level valve compressor 2 line 2 Oil level valve compressor 3 line 2 Oil level valve compressor 4 line 2 Oil level valve compressor 5 line 2 Oil level valve compressor 6 line 2 Subcooling valve line 2 Oil receiver line 2 Stage 1 generic function Stage 2 generic function Stage 3 generic function Stage 4 generic function Stage 5 generic function Alarms present Generic alarm function 1 Generic alarm function 2 General scheduling function Channel Logic Notes Tab. 7.c 77 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Line 2 Other f. Other functions Line 2 Con. Suct. Other functions Line 1 Cond. Suct. Analog inputs Mask index Description Bab01, Caaal Bab02, Caaam Bab03, Caaao Bab60 Bab04, Daa39 Bab09, Daa40 Bab61, Daa43 Bab62, Daa44 Bab11, Daa41 Bab12 Bab13, Eeaa05 Bab15, Daa20 Bab16 Bab17, Eaaa04 Bab29, Ecaa01, Edaa01 Bab30, Ecaa02 Edaa02 Bab31, Ecaa03, Edaa03 Bab32, Ecaa04, Edaa04 Bab33, Ecaa05, Edaa05 Bab34, Ecaa06, Edaa06 Bab41, Eaaa05 Bab42, Eaaa06 Bab43, Eaaa07 Bab44, Eaaa08 Bab45, Eaaa09 Bab46, Eaaa10 Bab63 Bab66, Eia01 Bab67, Eia02 Bab68, Eia03 Eeaa06 Bab05, Caal Bab06, Caaam Bab07, Caaao Bab64 Bab08, Dba39 Bab10, Dba40 Bab48, Dba38 Bab49 Bab14, Eeba05 Bab18, Eaba04 Bab35, Ecba01, Edba01 Bab36, Ecba02, Edba02 Bab37, Ecba03, Edba03 Bab38, Ecba04, Edba04 Bab39, Ecba05, Edba05 Bab40, Ecba06, Edba06 Bab47, Eaba05 Bab65 Eaba05 Eaba06 Eaba07 Eaba08 Eaba09 Eaba10 Bab20, Efe07 Bab21, Efe08 Bab22, Efe09 Bab23, Efe10 Bab24, Efe11 Bab25, Efe12 Bab26, Efe13 Bab27, Efe14 Bab28, Efe15 Suction pressure probe line 1 Suction pressure backup probe type line 1 Suction temperature probe line 1 Suction pressure probe compensation line 1 Gas cooler pressure probe line 1 Gas cooler backup pressure probe line 1 Gas cooler output temperature probe line 1 Gas cooler temperature backup probe Discharge temperature probe line 1 Liquid temperature probe line 1 Heat recovery output temperature probe line 1 External temperature probe line 1 Room temperature probe line 1 Oil temperature probe line 1 Discharge temperature probe compressor 1 line 1 Discharge temperature probe compressor 2 line 1 Discharge temperature probe compressor 3 line 1 Discharge temperature probe compressor 4 line 1 Discharge temperature probe compressor 5 line 1 Discharge temperature probe compressor 6 line 1 Oil temperature probe compressor 1 line 1 Oil temperature probe compressor 2 line 1 Oil temperature probe compressor 3 line 1 Oil temperature probe compressor 4 line 1 Oil temperature probe compressor 5 line 1 Oil temperature probe compressor 6 line 1 Oil receiver differential pressure probe line 1 RPRV receiver pressure probe HPV Feedback (not used) RPRV Feedback (not used) HPV setpoint compensation and floating condensing with heat recovery Suction pressure probe line 2 Suction pressure backup probe type line 2 Suction temperature probe line 2 Suction pressure probe compensation line 2 Condensing pressure probe line 2 Condensing pressure backup probe line 2 Discharge temperature probe line 2 Liquid temperature probe line 2 Heat recovery output temperature probe line 2 Oil temperature probe line 2 Discharge temperature probe compressor 1 line 2 Discharge temperature probe compressor 2 line 2 Discharge temperature probe compressor 3 line 2 Discharge temperature probe compressor 4 line 2 Discharge temperature probe compressor 5 line 2 Discharge temperature probe compressor 6 line 2 Oil temperature probe compressor 1 line 2 Oil receiver differential pressure probe line 2 Oil temperature probe compressor 1 line 2 Oil temperature probe compressor 2 line 2 Oil temperature probe compressor 3 line 2 Oil temperature probe compressor 4 line 2 Oil temperature probe compressor 5 line 2 Oil temperature probe compressor 6 line 2 Passive generic probe A Active generic probe B Passive generic probe B Active generic probe C Passive generic probe C Active generic probe D Passive generic probe D Active generic probe E Passive generic probe E Channel Type Notes Tab. 7.d Line 2 Line 1 Analog outputs Mask index Bad01, Caa14 Bad02, Eaaa14 Bad07, Daa38 Bad08, Eeaa04 Bad12, Efe29 Bad14, Eia06 Bad15, Eia07 Bad04 Bad05, Eaba14 Bad10, Dba37 Bad11, Eeba04 Bad13, Efe30 Description Compressor inverter output line 1 Oil pump output line 1 Inverter fan output line 1 Heat recovery valve output line 1 Modulating generic output 1 HPV valve output RPRV valve output Compressor inverter output line 2 Oil pump output line 2 Inverter fan output line 2 Heat recovery valve output line 2 Modulating generic output 2 Channel Type Notes Tab. 7.e pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 78 ENG 8. ALARMS pRack PR300T can manage both alarms relating to the status of the digital inputs and to operation of the system. For each alarm, the following are controlled: • The actions on the devices, if necessary • The output relays (one global and two with different priorities, if configured) • The red LED on the terminal and the buzzer, where present • The type of acknowledgement (automatic, manual, semiautomatic) • Any activation delay The complete list of alarms, with the related information as described above, is available in Alarm table. Note: A maximum of 50 alarms can be logged; after this limit any new events overwrite the oldest ones, which are therefore deleted. 8.2 Compressor alarms The number of alarms for each compressor can be set during the configuration phase using the Wizard or subsequently from branch C.a.e/ C.b.e of the main menu. The number of alarms is the same for all the compressors on the same line. Alarms Cae01 Number of alarms for each compressor: 3 8.1 Alarm management All alarms feature the following behaviour: • When an alarm is activated, the red LED flashes and the buzzer is activated (where present); the output relays corresponding to the global alarm and to any alarms with priority are activated (if configured) • Pressing the (Alarm) button, the red LED stays on steady, the buzzer is muted and the alarm screen is shown • If there is more than one active alarm, these can be scrolled using (Down). This condition is signalled by an arrow at the bottom (Up) right of the screen • Pressing the (Alarm) button again for at least 3 seconds acknowledges the alarms manually, and these are cleared from the display unless others are active (they are saved in the log) Fig. 8.a Note: The maximum number of alarms that can be configured for each compressor depends not only on the type of compressor, but also on the size of pRack and the number of compressors fitted. After having selected the number of alarms (maximum 4), the settings can be configured for each alarm, choosing a description from the options shown in the table, the output relay, the type of reset, delay and priority. The effect of the alarm on the devices is set and involves stopping the compressor, except for the oil warning. 8.1.1 Priority For certain alarms, the alarm output relay can be set with two types of priority: • R1: serious alarm • R2: normal alarm The corresponding relays, once configured, are activated when an alarm with the corresponding priority occurs. For the other alarms, the priority is fixed and is associated by default with one of the two relays. Possible descriptions for compressor alarms Reciprocating or scroll Generic Overload High pressure Low pressure Oil 8.1.2 Acknowledgement Tab. 8.a The alarms can have manual, automatic or semiautomatic acknowledgement: • Manual: the alarm is acknowledged by pressing the (Alarm) button twice, the first time displays the corresponding alarm screen and mutes the buzzer, the second (extended, for at least 3 seconds) cancels the alarm (which is saved in the log). If the alarm is still active, acknowledgement has no effect and the signal is shown again. • Automatic: when the alarm condition ceases, the alarm is automatically reset, the LED comes on steady and the corresponding screen remains displayed until the (Alarm) button is pressed and held; the alarm is saved in the log. • Semiautomatic: acknowledgement is automatic, until a maximum number of activations in set time. If the number reaches the maximum set, acknowledgement becomes manual. For manual acknowledgement, the functions associated with the alarm are not reactivated until acknowledgement has been completed, while for automatic acknowledgement they’re reactivated as soon as the alarm condition ceases. An example of a screen for selecting the description of the alarm is shown in the figure: Alarms Cae02 Alarm 1 description: Generic: Overload: High pressure: Low pressure: Oil: Fig. 8.b After having selected the ‘generic’ description, no other description can be selected. In general, the descriptions are divided into four groups: • generic • others (overload, oil, high pressure , low pressure) • oil warning After a description has been selected for a certain group, descriptions from a different group can not be selected for that alarm. For example, generic only, or overload + oil, or rotation only or overload + high pressure., etc. can be selected. 8.1.3 Log The alarm log can be accessed: • from branch G.a of the main menu • by pressing the (Alarm) button and then (Enter) when there are no active alarms • by pressing (Enter) after having scrolled all the alarms. Each alarm will have one alarm screen, which will show all the descriptions associated to that alarm. Based on the number of alarms selected, the descriptions associated by default are shown in the table below The alarm log screens show: Order of activation (no. 01 is the oldest alarm) Hour and date the alarm was activated Short description Main values recorded at the moment the alarm was activated (suction pressure and condensing pressure). 1. 2. 3. 4. Default descriptions based on the number of alarms Number of alarms 1 79 Descriptions Generic pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Low suction pressure from pressure switch The low suction pressure alarm from pressure switch has the effect of stopping all the compressors without observing the various times, therefore when the digital input configured as low pressure switch is activated, all the compressors on the line affected are stopped immediately. Overload HP-LP Overload HP-LP Oil Overload HP LP Oil Overload HP LP Oil Oil warning Overload HP LP Oil Oil warning Rotation Overload HP LP Oil Oil warning Rotation Generic 2 3 4 5 6 7 This alarm features semiautomatic reset, and both the monitoring time and the number of activations in the specified period can be set. If the number of activations is higher, reset becomes manual. In addition, the delay after which the alarm is activated on both start-up and during operation can be set. The delay at start-up only applies to unit start-up and not compressor power-up. High condensing pressure from pressure switch The high condensing pressure alarm from pressure switch has the effect of stopping all the compressors without observing the various times and forcing the fans on at maximum speed, therefore when the digital input configured as high pressure switch is activated, all the compressors on the line affected are stopped immediately and the fans operate at maximum output. This alarm features manual or automatic reset, as configured by the user. The delay after which the alarm is activated can also be set Tab. 8.b Note: for oil alarms, special management is available whereby the alarm is interpreted as an oil level alarm. When the alarm is activated, a number of attempts are made to restore the level for a set time before the alarm is signalled and the compressor stopped. 8.3.2 Pressure alarms from probe The parameters corresponding to these alarms can be set in branch C.a.e/C.b.e of the main menu for the suction pressure and D.a.e/D.b.e for the condensing pressure. If a modulating device is used for the compressors, further alarms become available: • compressor inverter warning, common for the entire suction line, when the device is an inverter • oil sump temperature alarm, high discharge temperature and oil dilution, for Digital Scroll™ compressors For these types of alarms, reset is automatic and the activation threshold and differential can be set, as well as the type of threshold, which may be absolute or relative to the control set point. The figure shows an example of setting the threshold to relative. HP For each compressor, two alarm variables are sent to the supervisor, one for each priority. As well as the alarm signal, the description of the alarm is also sent to the supervisor, using the values shown in the table: Relative threshold Setpoint Alarm Fig. 8.d 8.3 Pressure and prevent alarms pRack PR300T can manage pressure alarms from a pressure switch or probe, according to the following diagram. Note: for temperature control, the alarms from probe are managed based on temperature even when pressure probes are fitted. Alarms from pressure switch: • Low suction pressure • High condensing pressure The effects of the different pressure alarms from probe are described below. Alarms from probe: • Low suction pressure • High suction pressure • Low condensing pressure • High condensing pressure Low suction pressure from probe The low suction pressure alarm from probe has the effect of stopping all the compressors, ignoring the times. High suction pressure from probe The high suction pressure alarm from probe has the effect of forcing all the compressors on, ignoring the control times, but observing the compressor protection times. One possible example for the low pressure alarms is shown in the figure: LP Differential Pressostat alarm Pressure Differential The supervisor can interpret the variables sent by pRack PR300T and provide the correct description of the alarm. Low condensing pressure from probe The low condensing pressure alarm from probe has the effect of stopping all the fans, ignoring the times. Pressure Probe alarm High condensing pressure from probe The high condensing pressure alarm from probe has the effect of forcing all the fans on and stopping all the compressors, ignoring the times. Fig. 8.c In addition, the high pressure alarm features a prevent function, available by manually overriding the devices as well as using additional functions, such as heat recovery and ChillBooster. Operation of the alarms and prevent function is described below. 8.3.1 Pressure alarms from pressure switch The parameters corresponding to these alarms can be set in branch G.c.a/G.c.b of the main menu. pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 80 ENG 8.3.3 High pressure prevention pRack PR300T can manage 3 types of high condensing pressure prevention actions, involving: • overriding the compressors and fans • activating heat recovery • activating ChillBooster Prevent by overriding the compressors and fans The parameters relating to this function can be set in branch G.b.a/G.b.b of the main menu. The effect of this type of prevent action is to force all the fans on at maximum and switch all the compressors off, except for the minimum capacity stage, ignoring the control times but observing the compressor protection times. The minimum capacity stage means one compressor in the case of compressors without capacity control and modulation devices, or the minimum capacity stage for capacity-controlled compressors (e.g. 25%), or alternatively the minimum output of the modulation device in the case of inverters, Digital ScrollTM. As well as the activation threshold, which is always absolute, and the activation differential, a compressor deactivation time can be set, corresponding to the time needed to switch off all the compressors, except for the minimum capacity stage. In addition, both the monitoring time and the number of activations in the specified period can be set. If the number of activations is higher, reset becomes manual. Prevent by activating heat recovery The parameters corresponding to this function can be set in branch G.b.a/G.b.b of the main menu, if the heat recovery function is present. As well as enabling the function, an offset from the activation threshold for the prevent by overriding devices function must be set. The activation differential for this function is the same as set for the prevent by overriding devices function. When reaching the threshold, pRack PR300T activates the heat recovery function, if the conditions allow. Prevent by activating ChillBooster The parameters relating to this function can be set in branch G.b.a/G.b.b of the main menu, if the ChillBooster function is present. As well as enabling the function, an offset from the activation threshold for the prevent by overriding devices function must be set. The activation differential for this function is the same as set for the prevent by overriding devices function. When reaching the threshold, pRack PR300T force activates the ChillBooster, if the conditions allow. The following figure illustrates the activation thresholds for the prevent function and the safety devices: Pressure HP by pressostat HP by probe Prevent Offset Heat reclaim or ChillBooster time Fig. 8.e 81 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG 9. SUPERVISORY AND COMMISSIONING SYSTEMS pRack PR300T can be connected to various supervisory systems, specifically the Carel and Modbus communication protocols can be used. For the Carel protocol, the PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO models are available. In addition, pRack PR300T can be connected to the pRack Manager commissioning software. 9.2 Commissioning software pRack Manager is configuration and real-time monitoring software used to check the operation of pRack PR300T, for commissioning, debug and maintenance operations. The software is available on the internet at http://ksa.CAREL.com in the section “download à support à software utilities”.The installation includes, in addition to the program, the user manual and the necessary drivers. 9.1 PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO supervisory systems pRack Manager can be used to set the configuration parameters, modify the values of volatile and permanent variables, save graphs of the main system values to file, manually manage the unit I/Os using simulation files and monitor/reset alarms on the unit where the device is installed. Connection to Carel PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO supervisor systems uses the RS485 card already fitted on some models of pRack PR300T. For details on the models of card available, see Chapter 1. Note: In general, the pRack boards that manage the suction lines must be fitted with the supervisor connection card, consequently boards with pLAN address 1 or 2. pRack PR300T is able to virtualise all the inputs and outputs, both digital and analogue, therefore each input and output can be overridden by pRack Manager. Three different models of PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO are available, used to supervise system configurations with one or two lines: • L1 – one line: can be used for system configurations with just one suction and/or condenser line. • L2 – one line: can be used for system configurations with two suction and/or condenser lines, and the two suction lines are managed by separate boards. • Two lines: can be used for system configurations with two suction and/ or condenser lines, and the two suction lines are managed by the same board. pRack Manager manages <file name>.DEV files that contain the user parameter configurations and that can be downloaded from the pRack PR300T board and then subsequently uploaded. To use the pRack Manager program, a serial converter output RS485 with CVSTDUTLF0 (telephone connector) or CVSTDUMOR0 (3 pin terminal) must be connected to the board. The connection to pRack Manager can be made: 1. Via the RS485 serial port used for the “pLAN” connection 2. Via the BMS serial port with RS485 serial card and activating the pRack Manager protocol by parameter on screen Fca01 or connecting pRack Manager and selecting SearchDevice = Auto (BMS or FB) on the “Connection settings” tab. In this case, the connection is established after around 15-20 seconds. Important: model L2 – One line must be used only in association with model L1 – One line. For supervision of system configurations with just one line only model L1 – One line can be used. Tutorial: the rule applied for using the models is summarised below: • cconfiguration with board with pLAN address 2 Æ separate models • configuration without board with pLAN address 2 Æ one model only Important: the BMS serial port should only be used for monitoring the variables, while to update the software use the RS485 serial port dedicated to the pLAN connection. The following figure shows an example of connection to the PC via the RS485 serial port used for the “pLAN” connection A connection example for using PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO is shown in the figure. pGD1 user interface Field-Bus CVSTDUTLF0 BMS pGD1 user interface CVSTDUMOR0 Field-Bus BMS Fig. 9.a The complete list of supervisor variables, with the corresponding addresses and descriptions, can be supplied upon request. Power supply Fig. 9.b Note: for further details see the pRack Manager program online help. pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 82 ENG 10. SOFTWARE UPDATE AND CONFIGURATION Meanings of Buttons/Symbols 10.1 Smart Key: operating instructions start start + start start mode mode start + start + mode Flashing: The key is connecting to the pRack. During this phase, which may last a few seconds, the start button is disabled. Flashing: The key has detected the pRack and is checking the access rights. On steady: Pressing the start button will start writing the software to the pRack. On steady: Pressing the start button will start reading the software from the pRack. On steady: Pressing the start button will start reading the logs from the pRack. On steady: In case of C, pressing the button for 1 second switches from read to write. Tab. 10.b If the key is type C, pressing the “mode” button for 1 second switches from read to write. The symbols (write to pRack), (read from pRack), (read logs) reflect the selected status. If the key is not type “C”, the “mode” button is disabled and off. The “start” button starts the read or write operation, indicated by the flashing of the corresponding symbol ( or ) at a frequency proportional to the progress of the operation. When the operation is completed, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 2 seconds. Pressing the “start” button again will make the buzzer sound without repeating the operation. To repeat the operation, the key must first be unplugged. In case of error the symbol will light up together with the other LEDs. The following table can help you find the cause of the problem. Fig. 10.a Programming the Smart Key via Personal Computer The operating modes described in the table below can be configured using a program on the PC. The program can also load the software to the key or transfer logged data from the controller to disk. Type Function Update software from key to pRack B (BIOS, application, parameters, etc.) Copy software from pRack to pRack C* (BIOS, application, parameters, etc.) Mode button Disabled Switches the key from write mode to read mode Errors before pressing the START button *: Default mode + Tab. 10.a The key is factory-programmed in read/write mode (type C) so that it can be used immediately to transfer software from one controller to another. When the key is connected to the personal computer, the symbols have the following meanings: + +mode +mode Symbols flashing Type of key is incompatible. + + + Flashing Waiting for connection to PC Alternating When connected to PC indicates data transfer in progress + Using the Smart Key with the pRack Switch off the pRack, remove any peripherals connected in the pLAN and plug the key into the telephone connector on the controller. When switching on again, all the symbols light up momentarily and the buzzer emits a beep. A few seconds later the key becomes operational. During Symbols steady Password error Symbols steady The key is missing one or more required files (memory empty; no kit for the type of pRack connected). Symbols steady Incompatibility between the software +start + flashing start on the key and the pRack HW. Symbols steady Incompatibility between pRack +mode + flashing mode application and HW (application size). + The programming key is compatible starting from BIOS version 3.43 and BOOT version 3.01. For more detailed information on programming the key, see the pRack Manager program manual. Communication error: No response Symbols flashing from the pRack or: Key firmware version is incompatible. Symbols steady No logged data present on the pRack. Steady Type of key not programmed. Tab. 10.c Errors after pressing the START button this period the symbols will flash. The controller then enters programming mode and the start button lights up steadily. Press the button to start data transfer. +start+ +start+ Important: If the key is type B or C pressing the start button will immediately delete the software already loaded on the pRack. +start+ Important: Do not remove the key while data is being transferred to the key itself, as the file being transferred will be lost and the corresponding space will not be restored. To restore the original capacity all the files will need to be deleted. If the key is type “C” , simply perform a new application read operation. + + + Symbols flashing and buzzer sounding +buzzer intermittently Symbols flashing and buzzer sounding +buzzer intermittently Symbols flashing and buzzer sounding +buzzer intermittently Symbols steady + flashing Steady Flashing Write operation failed. Read operation failed. Read logs operation failed. Incompatibility between log configuration and pRack HW (no dedicated flash memory). This error does not prevent writing other files. Insufficient space to read logs. Generic error Tab. 10.d 83 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG 10.2 pRack Manager: operating instructions 10.2.1 IInstalling the application to update the software pRack Manager is a program that lets you manage all the configuration, debugging and maintenance operations on CAREL pRack devices. pRack Manager can be installed by itself or as part of the 1Tool programming environment. Select the directory containing the application program files and click “Upload” to upload the program to the pRack controller. Installing pRack Manager On http://ksa.carel.com, under the section "software & support/ Configuration & updating software/parametric controller software", select pRack_manager. After having selected the most recent version of the tool, click "download " and accept the general terms and conditions for the free software user license; the program can then be installed on the computer. Connecting the PC to the pRack Connect a cable with USB/RS485 converter to the USB port on the computer, and connect the converter to a telephone cable plugged into the pLAN port of the pRack. Additional connection methods are described in par. 6.5. Fig. 10.e 10.2.2 Commissioning Using the mouse, select “Commissioning” at the bottom left. A new work environment will appear. CVSTDUTLF0 Fig. 10.f Click on “configura dispositivo” [configure device] to display all the application variables. The variables can be selected according to the categories that appear at the bottom. J10 pR300T FieldBus card B M S card POWER SUPPLY Fig. 10.b Upon launching, pRack_manager will display a screen showing the connection settings in the upper right-hand corner. Choose: 1) “connessione locale” [local connection] 2) baud rate: Auto 3) “ricerca dispositivo” [find device]: Auto (pLAN) As for the port number, follow the Wizard’s instructions for the port to be identified automatically (e.g. COM4). Fig. 10.g 10.2.3 Changing a parameter Select the parameter category and then the parameter that you want to edit. The parameter (e.g. recovery.recovery_type) will be highlighted in blue. Fig. 10.h Fig. 10.c 1. Double-click on the column marked“letto”[read]. A window will appear Switch the controller off and then on again and use the Connect command to establish the connection. When the connection is established the flashing message “ONLINE” will appear at the bottom left of the screen. in which you can enter the new value for the parameter. Fig. 10.d pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 Fig. 10.i 84 ENG • • • • 2. Enter the new value (e.g. 3) and click OK. The new value will appear in the column marked “scritto” [written]. To write the parameter to the pRack controller, right-click and select “scrivi selezionate” [write selected]. The new value will appear in the column marked “scritto” [written], meaning that the parameter has been written to the controller. • • • • <nomeApplicativo>.BLB [<ApplicationName>.BLB] (download reserved) <nomeApplicativo>.BIN [<ApplicationName>.BIN] (download reserved) <nomeApplicativo>.DEV [<ApplicationName>.DEV] <nomeApplicativo>.GRT [<ApplicationName>.GRT] (upload only, from which the.GRP file is extracted) <nomeApplicativo>.IUP [<ApplicationName>.IUP] <nomeApplicativo>.LCT [<ApplicationName>.LCT] <nomeApplicativo>.PVT [<ApplicationName>.PVT] <nomepRacklog>.BIN, <nomepRacklog>.CSV, <nomepRacklog_ GRAPH>.CSV [<pRacklogName>.BIN, <pRacklogName>.CSV, <pRacklog_GRAPHName>.CSV] (only if log files have been configured, download only). The files exchanged with the NAND memories of pRack controllers are: • any file that the pRack can independently copy to the flash memory (see above list); • external files (e.g..pdf or.doc files for documentation). 10.3 Pendrive: operating instructions Fig. 10.j 10.3.1 File extensions, names and contents Click on “Salva” [Save] to generate the project’s “.2cw” file. Various types of files can be uploaded and downloaded and are distinguished by their extension. 10.2.4 Commissioning: basic concepts File names In order to be recognised, the names of the directories and files on the pendrive must have no more than 8 characters; the controller makes no distinction between upper-case and lower-case characters. However, during DOWNLOAD the names of the directories created by the controller on the pendrive are always in upper-case. Note: The following paragraphs are from the online help of pRack Manager, to which the user is referred for further details. Commissioning is a configuring and real-time monitoring software that can be used to supervise the performance of an application program installed on a pRack, to start up the pRack and to perform debugging and maintenance. FILE TYPES FOR UPLOAD File extension Description .IUP Contains the definitions of the screens on the terminal .BLB Contains the application .BIN Contains the application (with pLAN table) .BLX Contains the Logique of atoms custom in C language .GRP Contains the graphics .DEV Contains the preset configuration parameter values PVT,.LCT Contains the descriptions of the public variables to be logged. Generated by 1Tool, this is used by the LogEditor module and must be loaded together with the.LCT file Operators using Commissioning for maintenance will be able to see the necessary variables and to draw from preset configuration values. 10.2.5 Support files Once the design of the application is completed, 1Tool generates a number of files in the compiling stage, two of which are required by Commissioning: • <nomeApplicativo>.2CF [<ApplicationName>.2CF] (variable descriptor) • <nomeApplicativo>.2CD [<ApplicationName>.2CD] (category and access profile descriptor) Downloaded files are saved in directories created automatically, with the following name format: NAMXY_WZ Where: NAM: identifies the type of data downloaded (LOG for logs, BKP for the application, DEV for the buffer memory, CPY for all the data from the controller). XY: progressive number from 0 to 99 WZ: controller pLAN address. In addition to these files, the software also manages the <nome applicativo>.DEV [<Application Name>.DEV] file, which contains the unit’s preset parameters. When the user has finished using Commissioning, whether for configuration or monitoring purposes, the following files can be generated: • <nomeApplicativo>.2CW [<ApplicationName>.2CW] (descriptor for categories, access profiles, monitoring groups) • <nomefileCommissioningLog>.CSV [<FilenameCommissioningLog>. CSV] (file used for the commissioning log, containing data of the variables logged during monitoring) Example: a directory named LOG00_01 contains the log files (LOG) downloaded from a device whose pLAN address is 1. Since the key contained no directory of this type before download, it is indicated with 00. Important: No more than 100 files of the same type can be downloaded to the pendrive, as the directories created can only be numbered with XY=00 to 99. Therefore, to configure Commissioning the following files are required:.2CF, 2CD and, if necessary, the.DEV file, which can be imported or exported. For monitoring purposes, in addition to the files above, it might also be necessary to have the.2CW file, containing the definition of the work environment. The commissioning log file is a simple output file. FILE TYPES FOR DOWNLOAD (controller pLAN address = 1) File extension Directory name Description .DWL LOG00_01 Logged data .DWL,.DEV,.LCT,. BKP00_01 Application PVT .DEV DEV00_01 Non-volatile parameters .DWL,.DEV,.LCT,. CPY00_01 All data on the controller PVT 10.2.6 pRack Load: basic concepts pRackLoad is the module that manages: • uploading to the flash memory (of the device or of the ProgKeyX key installed on the pRack); • uploading to the NAND memory of certain devices; • downloading the log file,.DEV file and P memory (from the flash memory); • downloading files from the NAND memory, if present. Tab. 10.e The downloaded files to have fixed names. In particular, the application file is called “ppl–pRack.dwl”, the BIOS file “bios–pRack.bin”, the files containing the logs and related information are “logs.dwl”, “logs.lot” and “logs.pvt”, respectively. Finally, the buffer memory is saved to the file on the pendrive. The files exchanged with the Flash memories of pRack controllers are: • BOOT.BIN (download reserved, upload enabled from menu) • BIOS.BIN (download reserved) 85 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG Menu access The following are the steps for accessing the pendrive management menu. Procedure: 1. Connect the pendrive to the master port. After the description of the desired function, various options are available: 1. To copy the complete contents of the directory, simply write the name of the directory (e.g. the entire contents of the CHILLER directory): [FUNCTION] Upload non volatile memory [DIR] CHILLER USB key 2. To copy just 1 file in a directory, enter the file’s name (e.g. the CHILLER.DEV file in the CHILLER directory). BMS card [FUNCTION] Upload non volatile memory Fig. 10.k [DIR] 2. Press Alarm and Enter together for 3 seconds to enter the option menu. Select FLASH/USB memory and press Enter to confirm. CHILLER CHILLER.DEV 4:45&.*/'03."5*0/ -0(%"5" 05)&3*/'03."5*0/ '-"4)64#.&.03: To show a string on the display describing the operation being performed, add the “[NAM]” instruction, followed by the string to display. The following file will display the string: “UPL CHILLER.DEV” Fig. 10.l [FUNCTION] 3. Select USB pen drive and press Enter to confirm. Upload non volatile memory [DIR] /"/%'-"4)'*-&4 64#1&/%3*7& CHILLER [NAM] Fig. 10.m UPL CHILLER.DEV Important: Wait a few seconds after the pendrive has been plugged in for it to be recognised by the controller. If the message “No USB disk or PC connected” is displayed momentarily with the request to connect a pendrive key or computer USB cable, wait a few seconds until the recognition message is shown (“USB disk found”) and the following screen appears. 4. CHILLER.DEV 3. To select only some of the files in the same directory, list them after a label. The following labels are allowed and must be entered in the order shown in the table: Select UPLOAD. UPLOAD file labels 4ELECTFUNCTION 61-0"%PENP$0 %08/-0"%P$0PEN Fig. 10.n 10.3.2 Upload An application plus BIOS or buffer memory (parameters) can be uploaded from the pendrive. The following modes are available: automatic, autorun and manual. Automatic and autorun modes require using configuration files. File type No. Label File type 1 [BIO] (*) file.bin 6 [PVT] file.pvt 2 [IUP] file.iup 7 [LCT] file.lct 3 [BIN] file.bin, blb 8 [OED] file.oed 4 [DEV] file.dev 9 [SGN] file.sgn 5 [GRP] file.grp (*) BIO = BIOS file Notes: Configuration file structure Configuration files must start with the string “[FUNCTION]” followed by a string that identifies the function, as shown in the table. Function UPLOAD an application or a BIOS file plus an application UPLOAD non-volatile memory (.dev) UPLOAD the entire contents of the pRack No. Label • to get the.bin file from the BIOS in the format available on http://ksa. carel.com (.os file), unzip the.os file; • the [IUP] label can be followed by one or more “.iup” files. String Upload application Important: Upload non volatile memory Copy pRack upload • the order in which the file names are entered is fundamental and must not be changed; • do not enter empty lines or spaces in the file (e.g. at the end of a line); • each file after the last line of code must contain a “carriage return” character (CR ), as shown in the following example. pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 86 ENG Example: The following file will upload the BIOS and an application. 3. At the end a message will ask the user to remove the pendrive. [FUNCTION] 61-0"%*/('*-& 1-&"4&8"*5 Upload application [DIR] NEW AHU Fig. 10.q [NAM] 10.3.4 Upload in autorun mode BIOS+APPL+LOGSv58B36 Uploading in autorun mode is a special case of uploading in automatic mode. Unlike automatic mode, the user must wait for a specific message to appear on the display to start or disable the operation described in the configuration file. To upload a file in autorun mode, a configuration file must be created and named “autorun.txt”. Example of uploading BIOS+application. The upload involves two steps: first the BIOS is updated and then the application. The information is shown on the pRack’s builtin display and on the pGDE terminal, when both are featured. bisn509.bin [IUP] AHU_EN.iup AHU_IT.iup Procedure: 1. Connect the pendrive to port A. [BIN] AHU.blb USB key [DEV] AHU.dev B M S c a rd [GRP] Fig. 10.r AHU.grp 2. After a few seconds, Autorun mode starts. Press Enter to confirm. [PVT] AHU.pvt "65036/.0%& 61-0"%"11-*"5*0/ 1RESS&/5&3TOSTART &4$TOEXITAUTORUN [LCT] AHU.lct Fig. 10.s 10.3.3 Automatic upload 3. The validity of the FW is checked and the BIOS is loaded. To automatically upload the parameter memory using the first configuration file shown in the preceding paragraph, access the system menu as previously described and proceed as follows: 1. '8VALIDATION 1LEASEWAIT Select automatic mode. A screen is shown describing the function of the buttons. Press Enter to confirm. Fig. 10.t 4. 4ELECTUPLOADMODE "650."5*$.0%& ."/6"-.0%& The display flashes to indicate that after loading the new BIOS the controller is being reset. '8WBMJEBUJPO 1MFBTFXBJU Fig. 10.o 2. Confirm by selecting Prg. A screen is displayed requesting confirmation to upload the non-volatile memory. Press Enter to confirm. Fig. 10.u 61-'*-&?%&7 pGD NO LINK Fig. 10.p Fig. 10.v 87 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG 5. The test phase starts. pGD /0-*/, "PPLICATIONPROGRAM CORRUPTEDORNOT PRESENT 8"*5*/(FORUPGRADE Fig. 10.ad Fig. 10.w Important: As can be seen, when updating the BIOS and the application, the pGDE terminal shows the message “NO LINK”, meaning that no connection is established. Do not remove the terminal and wait for the end of the update procedure, when the pGDE terminal replicates the messages on the built-in display. pGD /0-*/, Note: Autorun run is especially useful in those cases in which the same operation needs to be performed on several controllers. For example, to load different applications on controllers connected in a pLAN network, only one autorun file needs to be created; this uploads the various directories contained on the pendrive based on the address of the controllers. The controller with address XY will only load the directory called “nomedir_XY” [“DirName_XY”]. The pendrive then only needs to be plugged into each controller to run the upload, confirming from the shared terminal. Fig. 10.x 6. The controller warns that no application has been loaded. "PPLICATIONPROGRAM CORRUPTEDORNOT PRESENT 8"*5*/(FORUPGRADE 10.3.5 Manual upload Fig. 10.y To manually upload the contents of the pendrive the user must access the management menu from the system screens, selecting UPLOAD and then MANUAL. The files are selected by pressing ENTER when the cursor is on the desired file name. A selected file is marked by the symbol “*” on the left. Once the files have been selected (all in the same directory), press PRG to start the upload. To display the contents of a directory press ENTER. To go up one directory level press ESC. Once the upload has started, the messages shown on the screen are the same as in automatic and autorun mode. pGD /0-*/, Fig. 10.z 7. The application update then starts. 10.3.6 Download As mentioned above, the DOWNLOAD operation can be managed in two ways: 1. Manual mode: follow the steps described in the paragraph“Automatic upload” and select manual operation. Then each file must be selected and downloaded. 2. Autorun mode: prepare a file called“autorun.txt”, containing a string that identifies the function to be performed. 6PLOADAPPL 1LEASEWAIT Fig. 10.aa Function DOWNLOAD the application DOWNLOAD non-volatile memory DOWNLOAD the entire contents of the pRack pGD /0-*/, The result is the creation of files with the required extensions, which will be placed in the respective directories as described in the paragraph “File names”. When the operation is completed, the display shows a message with the name of the directory created. Fig. 10.ab 8. String Download application Download non volatile memory (.dev) Copy pRack download Remove the pendrive. The update is complete. Wait for the display to stop flashing, indicating that the controller is being reset before restarting. [FUNCTION] Download application The following screen will be displayed. 1. Press Enter to confirm. 6QMPBEDPNQMFUF 3FNPWF64#LFZ BOEXBJUSFTFU '8VALIDATION 1LEASEWAIT Fig. 10.ac Fig. 10.ae pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 88 ENG 2. Download completed. After a short time the fields are populated with the current parameters. If the fields are not populated with the current parameters, check the firmware version of pCOWeb and the protocol used by the BMS serial port. The parameters can now be edited by selecting the respective fields using the ENTER button and setting the desired values using the UP/DOWN buttons. If the DHCP option is set to ON, the IP address and Netmask fields cannot be changed. Pressing ENTER repeatedly will display all the parameters available, as listed in the following screens: 0PERATIONCOMPLETE %ATADOWNLOADED TO#,1? Fig. 10.af Example: On the controller with address 1, the autorun file will create a directory called BKP00_01 and copy the files APPL_PRack.DWL and FILE_DEV.DEV to this directory. N e G a t m a - - t e w - - - s k . a y . - : : - . - . - - . - - - . - - - - . - - - . - - - - - . - - - . - - - - - . - - - . - - - : - p e - - : - - - - - - - Connecting to a computer D N S D N S - Connect the slave USB port on the controller to the USB port on the computer where pRack Manager is installed. USB connector from computer B M S card 1 1 - : : - B A C n e t B A C n e t I D T y - Once the parameters have been chosen they can be updated by going to the following screen and pressing ENTER. Fig. 10.ag P C O W E B U p d a t e Important: • do not install any type of converter between the computer and port B, even if requested by the program’s guided procedure; • pRack Manager manages compressed files (.GRT/.OS). Once the connection is established, the following operations are available: 1. UPLOADING the application or BIOS+application. 2. DOWNLOADING the non-volatile memory. 3. Commissioning 4. Managing the NAND flash memory. C O N F I G E N A B L E p C O W e b ? N O While the parameters are being updated, the following message is displayed: P C O W E B P l e a s e e n d o f Once the USB cable is removed, the port will become available again after approximately 5 s. C O N F w a i t u p d a I G E N A B L E f o r t e At the end, the screen shows: Important: If no connection is established with pRack Manager after plugging in the USB cable, wait at least 1 minute before using the USB ports again after removing the cable. P U R a 10.4 ConfiguringpCOWeb/pCOnetfromasystem screen I P E B t e o t y n B A C n e t B A C n e t - C c p e O N F I G E N A B L E o m p l e t e C O W e b t o w s e t t i n g I D b a - - : - u d - - : - - - - - - After a short time the fields are populated with the current parameters. The parameters can now be edited by selecting the respective fields using the ENTER button and setting the desired values using the UP/ DOWN buttons. Pressing ENTER repeatedly will display all the parameters available, as listed in the following screen: B A C n e t M A C : M a x M a s t e r s M a x F r a m e s : : - - - - - Once the parameters have been chosen they can be updated following the procedure described for configuring pCOWeb. When you select “PCOWEB settings” the following screen will appear: - W a o l When you select “PCONET settings” the following screen will appear: Configuring pCOWeb - O d b p Configuring pCOnet See par. 6.6 for information on how to access the BIOS system menu. Starting from: • BIOS release 5.16 BIOS, and from • pCOWeb firmware version A1.5.0, and from • pCOnet firmware version A485_A1.2.1 pCOWeb and pCOnet communication parameters can be configured. The purpose is to configure the network (Ethernet for pCOWeb, RS485 for pCOnet) when the respective card is installed for the first time. The remaining parameters (alarms, events, etc.) can be configured using the usual tools, i.e. BACset or web interface (pCOWeb only). Configuration can be done either when using the Modbus protocol or the CAREL protocol, but only on the BMS1 serial port. The screens for configuring pCOWeb and pCOnet can be opened by accessing the system screens and selecting OTHER INFORMATION and then PCOWEB/NET Konfig. Then, select “PCOWEB settings” to configure pCOWeb parameters or “PCONET settings” to configure pCOnet parameters. D H C P : C p e p - A D D R E S S - - - . - - - . - - - . - - - 89 pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 ENG pRack PR300T +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 90 CAREL INDUSTRIES - Headquarters Via dell’Industria, 11 - 35020 Brugine - Padova (Italy) Tel. (+39) 049.9716611 - Fax (+39) 049.9716600 e-mail: [email protected] - www.carel.com pRack +0300018EN rel. 1.3 - 21.01.2015 Agenzia / Agency: ">

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- CO2 compressor racks management
- Integrated control for medium and low temperature lines
- High pressure stage management
- HPV and RPRV management
- Valve management via external or built-in driver
- Double suction line and one high pressure stage
- Up to 16 fans for condensing line
- Inverter regulation on the first compressor and on the first fan